- he/him
Male | Gay | Writer | INTP-T | Finland
Songs Into Stories: MastermindA black midnight strikes and with it comes the winds of malevolence. They howl dreadfully like a pack of hounds from hell, desiring to bite any poor creature that would dare to wander outside at their mercy. In fact, there was a lone figure defining the harrowing breezes, veiled in a dark cloak. Carrying a bucket filled with ice, he hurried among the corpses of abandoned buildings to find the one he had taken as his lair. A cold rain started to pour from the black sky while the man was on the move, causing him to move faster. The shrieks of the wind sounded outright eerie and sinister as they blew throughout the area of forsaken buildings that were left to rot, sounding like cries of spirits. The man had seen apparitions during these many years, so it wasn't farfetched to think that these grounds were haunted. Such a reputation was totally fine with him; it would keep most curious eyes away and not meddle with his work. Through the labyrinth of rust and debris, he eventually managed to reach the building that was in decent shape, at least when compared to its decayed brethren. A weak light above the entrance was trying its best to cast away the surrounding darkness, but was barely able to do so. It kept flickering in an unnerving way, sometimes going out for several seconds. Still it managed to guide the man to this huge warehouse. He opened the rusty metal door that let out a horrible creak as he forced it to move; it almost sounded like somebody had screamed. Once the man had passed through its frame, the metal door became a guardian once more, closing behind the man with a loud thud. The warehouse concealed a terrible secret. A huge part of the building was occupied by a noisy machine, the finest work of the man, although it wasn't perfect. Most of the metal pieces were covered in rust and there were many spots that were either sparking or smoking. The whole contraption looked like it could fall into pieces at any moment. But against all odds, it still stood there firmly, waiting for the moment when it would be able to unleash its powers and fulfill its purpose. It was a doomsday device. The man had been working on it for years, in the solitude of his warehouse. He was a genius, though not one of a sane kind. With this machine, he would make the whole world kneel before him and he would rule as the supreme lord. He could see this grand vision in his mind, and had been seeing it for years now. He wasn't like the other miserable dwellers of the world, he was different. Once the machine would be completed, he would claim the world as his own. And he had tried, tried so hard to be one with the masses, but hadn't felt comfortable in his skin of false fellowship, especially after the tragedy took his dearest away from him. Now bitter and hateful, he shed this skin like a snake and strived to become the one who would mold this world anew. One strike of the heaven's fire was the last thing he needed for his machine to come alive. For this purpose, he had installed a long and crude antenna on the roof. It was reaching for the heaven like a hideous mechanical hand, desperate for power. The genius was looking upwards, gazing at the black heaven through the couple of windows there were in the ceiling. The rain was starting to pound harder on the glass and he pondered if a storm was approaching. The water from the sky was relentlessly tormenting the warehouse and the gusts of wind were growing stronger, violently toying with the antenna. Still, it was able to remain there even at the mercy of the black heaven. The genius held high hopes that night for it really seemed like he would get the final powerful touch that would make his visions of greatness real. He opened a hatch in the machine and emptied the bucket of ice in there, then he observed the weather, staring at the windows above him. He waited and waited, but he wasn't exactly the most patient man in the world. The harsh wind and rain were there, causing some sort of storm, but there was no lightning, the one thing he required. He was pacing around the warehouse for a while, but he needed something to do. He noticed that a part of his machine was barely functioning, the cogs were loose, and so the genius grabbed his tools and started to work on the doomsday device. However, one thing led to another and soon it occurred that he was dismantling the grand machine, bit by bit. It wasn't as perfect as he wanted. The warehouse was getting more and more quiet as he tore the device into pieces, only the clanking of metal echoed within the confinements of the building. The truth was that this machine wasn't the first one he had created and it wouldn't be the last. During his years in solitude, the genius had built many different versions of the doomsday device, mostly following the same pattern but some of them being slightly different. Perhaps this was because of perfectionism. Or maybe just a result of his mind's obsession with being occupied. He was stuck in a cycle, building a device he could use to conquer the world, just needing to capture a single strike of lightning in order to unleash the machine's potential, but he would never be able to wait long enough for that to happen. He had a brilliant mind for sure, but it was also his biggest downfall. Constantly getting distracted and bored, he would repeat building the machine, only to break it down a while afterwards. For years the genius had been doing the same thing over and over again. So many years later he managed to finally realize this. The warehouse was eerily silent since all the sounds of the machine were gone. Shadows were lurking in every corner, kept in their spots by the flickering of lights. The outside world was engulfed by darkness, and so was the mind of the genius. He was on his knees on the cold floor, holding his head and crying, while the broken metal was scattered all around him, their stillness telling the tale of his ultimate failure. All his tools and the pieces of machine, they were all the same, just useless debris with no function in their shattered form. Years of work. He had sacrificed so many years of his life into making the machine, but for what? He didn't even want to rule anymore. A portion of his life, wasted just like that, having all these visions of grandeur, but losing his desire to make them reality. Bitter tears in his eyes, he just wished he could go back in time and prevent himself from wasting all these years. An idea sparked in his mind. While the last of his tears were rolling down his face, he stood up from the floor. He could do that, go back in time. He was a genius after all. He would make the impossible possible. The genius rushed to his worktable to scribble down blueprints. A little bit of designing, a little bit of time and he would be able to travel back to the days when he hadn't yet wasted his potential. He committed to this project completely, nothing else mattered. Once he was fully focusing on something, he couldn't think of anything else. Eating or sleeping, he barely allowed himself to enjoy these necessities. Day and night he worked on his newest device and if it worked, it wouldn't be his last one. He scavenged new tools from the neighboring buildings, finding just enough and in decent condition for him to wield. But it's not like anyone would miss them anyway; they were left to decay. Now they would aid the genius in his finest work yet. And one evening, it was done. The genius looked at the object that now lay on the worktable, on top of the blueprints that had given the start for its existence. He felt rather surreal as he stared at his new device, but he was also proud of himself, even though he wasn't sure if it was going to work or not. But he was quite confident that it would function as it should. The object didn't really look like much; it was a rusty cube with wires and screws sticking out of it and was the size of about an alarm clock. Inside its core, it let out a blue shimmer. The genius was admiring his own work and he carefully picked it up from the table to give some late inspections on it. He eyed the cube thoroughly, but didn't find anything that should be fixed. It was ready to be used. He stood up from his seat and held the cube with both hands delicately as if it was the most fragile thing – though it would be a major setback if it happened to break. The genius let his gaze wander around the warehouse, feeling oddly sentimental about all this, like he was leaving and never coming back. But maybe that was partly true. He wouldn't see this exact state anymore. The genius activated his gadget by pressing a button on one of its sides and the device started to whirr. The blue shimmer spread from its core to all its external parts and from there, it kept devouring everything in its way, engulfing the genius inside its glow. A vortex of blue light dominated the warehouse for a short moment until it suddenly disappeared with a loud boom like if something had exploded. The genius was gone and so was his device. All that was left behind were the broken metal clutter and the curious little shadows that had followed his work for so long. A black midnight strikes and with it comes the winds of malevolence. They howl dreadfully like a pack of hounds from hell, desiring to bite any poor creature that would dare to wander outside at their mercy. In fact, there was a lone figure defining the harrowing breezes, veiled in a dark cloak. Carrying a bucket filled with ice, he hurried among the corpses of abandoned buildings to find the one he had taken as his lair. There was a scent of storm in the air and he wanted to get indoors before it would unleash its full might. A little bit of drizzle started to soak him already as he moved like a shadow around the cemetery of deserted buildings. It wasn't hard for him to find the warehouse he was residing in. The only light in this accursed darkness was hanging above the entrance of the man's lair, acting like a beacon that would guide him home. This light remained strong even before the might of the incoming storm and smothering night. The vile winds on his trail, the man opened the door to the warehouse and slipped inside, safe from their cold and ruthless fangs. The grand contraption that used to claim most of the space in the warehouse was no more. Or more like, it hadn't been built yet. The genius had successfully traveled backwards in time, years before he had started to work on his doomsday device. Sadly, his little time machine gadget had broken in the process; he would have liked to go even farther back. However, this was enough for him and he felt content, being years younger now. The genius walked towards a new kind of machine he had recently created. It was a rather crude mass of metal and wires, though the most notable part of it was a mechanical hand it was able to move. The device was placed next to a table and on the table, there was a chess board. The genius pressed a button to turn on the machine and it rumbled a little as it came to life. His opponent was ready. The genius sat down on a chair and contemplated his first move. He grabbed a bottle of beer from the bucket of ice and got immersed in the board game. It was one of those things he had always wanted to learn. And now, as he was years younger, he thought it would be a perfect opportunity to study chess. His little robot here would aid him with this. He had his whole life ahead of him, and if he wanted to pursue world domination again, there was time for that. But for now, he would keep playing, and the world could sigh in relief as the one madman had something else to do with his time. But the world was inside his head, his sense of reality fabricated. His spirit is bound to his own personal hell, unable to perceive life beyond his little plane of existence. Though you can't long for something you don't know anything about. Trapped inside his dark bubble, he would keep building his machines and living his life drenched in madness. He was all alone and being held in a cage.Suffering In SilenceA thick fog had shrouded the town in its cold and dreary embrace. It felt unnatural, giving to the townsfolk the sensation that nothing could thrive inside its miserable guts. The radiant sun that had blessed the town just a while ago couldn't penetrate through the mist with its holy and life-giving rays, and so the town was trapped in dimness, for not even their artificial lights managed to bring illumination to their dwelling. The fog was like a dormant grand beast, sitting on the town's chest and smothered it, because the air seemed to stay completely still, there wasn't even a single gust of wind to be felt. The haze also silenced all the noises and within the weak-minded, it felt like they had entered a spirit realm as a punishment for something they didn't even remember doing. Not many people believed in spirits or any other supernatural things whatsoever anymore, but sometimes even these nonbelievers were left to ponder whether there was something behind the strange happenings that couldn't be explained by logic. No matter what their stance was regarding the existence of spirits, the eerie gloom the fog had brought over their town made everyone wandering outside look like lost souls, condemned to seek something they would never find. The mist had transformed everyone into dark figures that were unable to recognize each other and would just drift through the haze like nothing mattered to them. However, there was one individual who was constantly like this, not just on this particular foggy day. Milanvi had lived in this town for years, but still, nobody could recognize him. He was like a ghost, sometimes wandering outside, but not interacting with anybody. He was so dull that nobody ever paid any attention to him. And that day was no different, not to him. But that day, he was one of the many, he was part of the town in a strange way, since everybody was like ghosts to each other. But every day Milanvi blended in perfectly and no one could tell that he was there, had been all along. Milanvi was a very quiet young man. He seldomly started conversations with anyone and even when he did, he tried his best to get out of the situation as fast as he could. He just didn't want to waste anyone's time; he wasn't worth it. He was a stranger to everyone and thus, no one would miss him, no one would wonder how he was doing. He was an unseen background character, not someone people could remember or care about. Just a bland man you would forget within the same day. And since there was no one who could be considered as part of his pathetic lonely life, there was no one who could help him. Maybe it was his own fault, being so wretched that nobody wanted to be around him. Milanvi was carrying a lot of anguish inside, sometimes it felt crushing. But being the oddly silent man that he was, screaming his pain was something he was unable to do, it was like a curse and his lips were sealed. Sometimes he wanted to call for help, reach his hand from the pit of misery where he was dwelling, but there was no one out there who was willing to listen or grasp his hand. In the end, Milanvi had accepted his role as a living ghost. He remained in his pit that was getting deeper and filled with black water so he could drown. From the outside, he was a regular young man you would expect to bypass in the streets. Maybe you would occasionally see him inside the apartment building where you lived, maybe pondering who he was. But since he was so plain, you wouldn't waste any more time thinking about him. He just kept to himself, not wanting to bother anyone. From the surface he looked calm, like the water of a pond. But from the inside, there was a relentless chaos, deep under that still and calm water. It was killing him from within, and yet, he couldn't ask for help. He had understood that he had failed every aspect of his life and there were no brighter days ahead. He had suffered all his life and that would never change. He was tired of it all, so very tired. People tend to go for walks when they want to calm down and clear their head, but in Milanvi, it had the opposite effect. His mind was a busy one, and if there was nothing for him to focus on, darkness would easily veil it. But even with this risk, he still possessed a particle of the will to just go outside instead of counting the shadows on his walls or being mesmerized by the television. On some days, he was glad of the sight of fellow people. But sometimes, he was afraid of them all, unable to stay out for long as he was filled with the desire to get back home, to safety. He would just sit there while his soul would rot, suffering in silence. This foggy day, it was strangely ordinary for Milanvi. He breathed in the still but fresh air, enjoying how it filled his lungs, even if the air would poison him. Under the cover of thick mist, he would dare to glance around more as he didn't have to worry about accidentally making eye contact with people. They were just dark figures, ghosts just like him, wandering around immersed in their own little world. The air was cold, but somehow Milanvi found it comfortable, giving him sensations of serenity and being strangely connected to the outside world. He had no particular destination set in mind as he strolled around the town of fog, he would just aimlessly go wherever his feet would take him. He didn't expect anything out of the ordinary to happen during his visit to the guts of the haze, he assumed this being just another mundane day in his life, but strange things tend to happen when you least expect it. Every form Milanvi saw in the fog appeared blurred and every sound was muffled, so he didn't think much of it when he saw a shadowy figure pass by near him. He assumed this was just one of the townsfolk. But then they bypassed him again, moving back and forth. This person's erratic behavior did catch his interest, even though he usually didn't want to pay too much attention to other people, not wanting them to feel uncomfortable because of him. But this entity here, they didn't seem… real. They didn't seem to be a human being. At first Milanvi tried to glance at them sneakily from the corner of his eye, not daring to look directly at them. But little by little he became more interested in this mysterious being and got courage to take a better look at them. By the first glance, the entity appeared as a human since it had the height of a tall person and because they were veiled in black, they didn't seem to differ much from the dark forms of the townsfolk that were walking around. But how this thing moved… There was something unnatural about it. They moved swiftly around despite not running and their limbs were twitching in a horrifying way. In Milanvi's opinion, it was like a glitch in a video game. The being was wrapped in black rags that concealed their whole body. This of course only highlighted the most notable feature they possessed; they were wearing a pure white mask, the only facial features it held were the eyes. Pitch-black, empty eyes that were crying blood. Milanvi wasn't sure how to feel about the strange entity that clearly wasn't human. Should he be terrified? Curious? Ignore them completely? Were they real or had he lost the last remains of his sanity? Did they happen to be a specter that had appeared only to him? No one else paid any attention to them. But was it because of the fog or because the entity refused to be seen by others, Milanvi wasn't sure. The entity moved around Milanvi, clearly having some sort of interest in him. But they made no sounds, so Milanvi couldn't tell what they wanted from him. At first, he had found their presence quite distressing, but as he continued to stroll in the mist, the creature started to seem more and more harmless. What a strange thing it is, the human brain. Milanvi was more afraid of fellow people than an unnatural entity. Even in Milanvi's mind this was pretty absurd. But despite the being's scary looks, they hadn't shown any signs of hostility. They just were there, fascinated by Milanvi, joining in his wandering around the town. They were a companion Milanvi hadn't expected to get, but surprisingly, he didn't really mind this even though he probably should have. But of course, the question was burning in his mind: what was this creature? What was their purpose, why did they appear to him today? He was afraid to open his mouth and ask these questions from the entity, because if only he could see them, he would seem pretty crazy in the eyes of the townsfolk. Milanvi remained quiet, walking forward with the strange being circling around him, acting normal just like he did every day. Perhaps it was his subconsciousness that had made the decision. Milanvi had somehow managed to walk to the small port the town had. He had this strange feeling inside, like he needed to be here. But why? The silence was hanging over the port just like it had done around the rest of the town, but in here, Milanvi could hear some noises that proved there was life inside the guts of the fog. He could hear the seagull's sad caw a few times, maybe it was trying to find somebody because it couldn't stand the loneliness anymore inside the mist. Then the bird's sounds faded away like an old man's memory. The only sound left behind was the waters that weakly crashed against the pier and the bottom of the boats that remained stationary, slumbering and waiting for the moment when they could fulfill their purpose once more. The port felt serene. Milanvi couldn't see anything except some of the dark forms of the sleeping vessels. The fog was leading into the nothingness. It gave him the impression that there was absolutely nothing beyond the curtain of mist. This town was trapped in the fog, cut from the rest of the world. Or maybe, if you took the risk and would get lost in the haze willingly, it would lead you to a new place. A better place, perhaps. Milanvi stared into the grey emptiness and wondered what could possibly lie beyond it. At this moment he also noticed that the entity had ceased their erratic movements. Milanvi glanced at the being, it was just standing there by his side, staring into the mist and its nothingness. It was a little strange to see them this calm. Did they feel the pull to this port as well? Slowly the entity shifted the gaze of its empty eyes at Milanvi. Because of the lack of facial features and being incapable of making sounds, Milanvi wasn't sure what they wanted from him. Then the creature raised their hand and held it in the air; a manner that suggested the creature wanted Milanvi to grasp their hand. For a short moment he pondered this, even though his response didn't linger in his mind for long. Was there anything left for him here? The answer was obvious. Wherever the creature was inviting him to come, it would be better than this. Milanvi grasped the entity's hand; it felt cold but the grip was strong. The creature's long thin fingers that had claws in them closed Milanvi's hand in their clutch, surprisingly tenderly considering their terrifying look. The being started to guide Milanvi towards the fog, walking along the pier. Only the sound of Milanvi's quiet steps could be heard. Once the man and the monster had come to the far end of the pier and there was nothing but water and mist ahead, the entity still encouraged Milanvi to step forward. The man had his doubts and fears, because what would happen once he would take the decisive step? But like a guardian angel, the entity urged him to let go and walk. Milanvi took a deep breath, his last one in the town of mist, and grasping tightly the creature's hand, he stepped over the last board of the pier and began to walk on the fog together with the entity. The sound of Milanvi's steps faded away. There was only silence. Hand in hand the man and the monster disappeared to the mist. Milanvi had been the silent unseen man all this time, so nobody would notice that he wasn't there in the background anymore. Eventually the thick fog that had veiled the town would fade away, and with that, so would the memories of Milanvi even existing. Behind him, he had left nothing but silence.Songs Into Stories: Church AsylumEvery individual carries sins with them and Milrath was no exception. But his sins were so heavy, his crimes so severe that he could feel their weight on his back constantly, no matter where he went, no matter if he tried to find some hidden purity from his stained and twisted soul. His sins were like a corpse that was riding on his back, reminding him of his bad deeds and laughing while the weight would crush him. And some of his sins followed him from the shadows, sneaking around him, watching, judging, sometimes they were pulling the shadow his own body casts. There was evil inside him, Milrath was aware that he was a bad man, but that was a twist in his life; unlike most people like him who have done wicked, terrible things, he felt guilt and wished for forgiveness. He wanted to get rid of the darkness that had a hold of his soul. For a long while already, Milrath had been running away from himself, but so far it had been futile. And yet, still he was trying. The snowstorm was awful that day. The visibility was very poor and the huge snowflakes were getting into Milrath's eyes while the freezing wind was cutting him with its cold viciousness and he had to protect his face with his arm. Traversing the mountain road was hard in such weather, it took a lot of effort to be able to proceed when there was a thick snow blanket covering the ground. Still Milrath found strength to keep going, refusing to let the storm overpower him. His sanity was being tested with the unnatural sounds he could hear from the depths of the mountain and occasionally he could see figures dancing behind the veil of snow, appearing and disappearing, and there was no way to tell what he saw and heard was real and what wasn't. But even though the mountain was playing these tricks, Milrath remained adamant and he continued his lonely journey. After some time, however, the mountain decided to show mercy on Milrath. As he was getting closer to the top, the snowstorm which had been tormenting him this whole time started to subside gradually and the wind lost its harshness, and Milrath didn't have to shield his eyes anymore. The blizzard had calmed down into a mild snowfall and as Milrath progressed, it then ceased completely, and suddenly the skies were clear and the great radiant sun was blessing the mountain with its light. Such an odd travel this had been, Milrath surmised in his head when he was unexpectedly basking in the golden rays of the sun. He wondered if the mountain had been testing him, to see if he was worthy of what he was seeking. It was the only reason he could think of to explain the strange weather anomaly. But now, as he was completely free from the snowstorm and could see around, he now had his destination in sight. A great building stood tall in the cold embrace of the mountain, surrounded by pillars of ice that never melted; it looked like the ice and the black stone had fused together. The building was a church and everything in its exterior looked sharp, like every nook of it was meant to pierce evil. A couple of towers were puncturing the sky and here and there Milrath could see gargoyles guarding the holy structure. He could feel their stony gazes at him as they silently observed and judged him; they could see all the sins he had brought with him. Milrath felt like they could get on their wings and attack him at any second. Under their harsh stares, Milrath cautiously walked towards the church, every now and then glancing at the stone monsters because he was afraid that they would come to life. But they remained stationary even when Milrath had managed to reach the grand double doors that granted entrance to the building. He raised his shaky hand and knocked on the dark wood. There was no response for a while. Milrath pondered if anyone had even heard his knocking. But just when he was about to knock again, one of the doors slowly creaked open and somebody peaked their head outside; a young man who was wearing priest's black robes. “How can I help you?” the young man asked humbly as he pushed the door more open. “I'd like to have a word with the high priest”, Milrath responded quietly. “Of course. Come inside”, the young priest invited him and stepped aside so Milrath could make his way in. Soon the door was closed again, leaving the coldness to the outside world. Milrath learned as soon as he had stepped in that the building was just as magnificent from the inside as it was on the outside. Beautiful pieces of artwork, whether it was paintings or sculptures, decorated the place moderately, portraying saints of the past. Gorgeous candelabras brought a little bit of light inside, together with the sunshine that flowed from the windows. The church was silent, but Milrath could feel some strange vibration in the air; maybe it was some sort of holy energy? “Follow me”, the young man said as he passed Milrath and kept walking forward. “The high priest is in the prayer room.” Without saying a word, Milrath started to follow the priest. The sound of their steps was muffled by the blue long carpet that stretched somewhere into the heart of the building. Milrath could distinguish a pair of doors in the distance and assumed that it was where they were heading. The journey wasn't long, but it felt uncomfortable to Milrath since just like the gargoyles outside, he could feel all the people in the paintings and sculptures judging him. Maybe he just had to get used to it. Once he and the priest had reached the doors, the young man pushed them open and they were allowed to enter the prayer room. It was the most magnificent place Milrath had ever seen in his life and he got filled with the radiating holy powers that dwelled in this room. It made him feel humble. The place was spacious; two rows of church pews took their places on the left and right side of the room. The most well-crafted candelabras were standing here and there and currently they were holding candles that brought a scent of honey into the air. At the far end of the room there was the altar, the heart of the church. Three tall stained-glass windows depicting holy figures were the ones that captured Milrath's gaze for the longest time. The altar consisted of a white pedestal where various objects were waiting for their use, though Milrath couldn't tell what they were used for. Then there were two other pedestals at the left and right side of the altar, filled with vivid flowers. Milrath was a little surprised as he saw the plants; they were blooming beautifully, even though they were inside a building located in the mountain where snow and ice never melted. Maybe it was just one of the holy miracles this place held. It really left Milrath with a sense of awe. There were a few people, all of them priests, on the altar, mumbling something Milrath couldn't hear. Soon they noticed him and the young priest walking closer and the whole group turned to look at them. Once they had reached the altar, the young priest made a slight bow and said: “A guest has asked to speak with you, your honor.” Milrath wasn't exactly sure who was the high priest as all of them wore the same black robes. However, there was undeniable authority radiating from one of the priests. A middle-aged man with long blond hair with certain dignity carved onto his face. And his eyes, Milrath had never seen such bright blue eyes. All the priests were observing him, but the one with those stunning eyes seemed to be able to look deeper, right into the very soul. Milrath felt so small, so insignificant in front of him. It was like the priest knew every bad deed he had done just by looking at him. Milrath's hunch about who was the high priest turned out to be correct. He opened his mouth and said: “Welcome, guest. Will you tell us your name?” Milrath fell on one knee in order to show respect and lowered his head. “My name is Milrath.” “Such a strong name”, the high priest said. “You may call me Casmia. What is it you seek from the house of Melresh?” Milrath barely knew what Melresh was; he was the great lord of the sun and this church had been built to worship him. But Milrath was pretty sure he would get more acquainted with this sun lord if he was allowed to stay and he said: “I'm humbly asking for your guidance and an asylum. Please, give me a place to stay and purify my wretched soul and I will pray to lord Melresh's name.” He lifted his head again and met once more the blue eyes of Casmia. For one short moment the high priest was piercing his soul and Milrath felt like he couldn't hide a single thing about himself. It worried him, for would Casmia let him stay once he knew the truth about him? “Very well.” Milrath almost couldn't believe his ears. The high priest had given him his permission. It was probably the greatest thing that had happened to him in years. “Oh, thank you, your honor!” Milrath exclaimed and stood up. “I will show my devotion to Melresh with all my heart.” “I do not doubt that”, Casmia said calmly. “Now, I will give you a little tour. Please, follow me.” It was that moment when Milrath thought his soul could be purified and he could gain a new start for himself, free from the sins of the past. Seeking guidance from faith was the last thing he could think of that could help him to redeem himself. He hated and feared the man he had become, but when you're born wicked, it's hard to not be like that, it's hard to strive to become something else, something better. Not all were able to resist their nature. But Milrath had this small strand of thought slithering inside his head, like a snake, that he could turn his life around. He allowed that snake to grow, absorbing its essence. Milrath himself felt like a snake as he gave up his clothes he had worn for a long time, thus shedding his skin. From that point on, he was wearing the black robes of a priest. These robes were his new scales and through them he could soak up the golden light of lord Melresh. Milrath adapted to his new life quickly. Living in the church was rather simple; pray and help those who occasionally would come to seek aid from the church. The high priest Casmia also demanded silence whenever they weren't praying, but that wasn't hard to achieve, although Milrath found this to be a little strange since Casmia was so adamant about it. But maybe it had something to do with this being a sacred place of worship and it was necessary to keep it devoutly silent. Just like the life of priests, their diet was simple as well, consisting of bread and water. That was probably the thing Milrath had most trouble getting used to, somewhere in the back of his mind was a voice that craved the meat of other living beings. But he wouldn't let himself consume flesh any more, his body had to turn into a holy instrument and shouldn't be tainted with anything, like with eating substances of other creatures; you'll never know if they've been even grazed by something evil. Bread and water should suffice as he would be vitalized by the holy light of Melresh. He thought that he had been able to run from himself and hide in the mountain of light. But radiant light also casts a dark shadow. These hands that now would be gently pressed against each other to pray had raised a blade to spill blood and end a life, more than once. These eyes that were allowed to witness the holy power of Melresh in the altar where the most vibrant flowers bloomed, they had been filled with hatred and watched how the light of a human life was extinguished. This black heart that was now letting in the golden sunshine had never learned how to love, only hate. Milrath had opened up his heart to seek guidance from the light, but it was hard to shed every bad deed he had done. He was able to feel guilt, perhaps that was a good sign. So many of his own crimes were haunting him in his sleep, the faces and the screams and the begging of all of his victims just repeated themselves in his nightmares. He wanted to forget them, perhaps even yearning for their forgiveness although he was sure he would never deserve that, so he continued to pray. Such a tormented soul. And every day he could feel the gaze of judgement by Casmia's piercing blue eyes. The high priest seldomly spoke with him, but Milrath couldn't help but notice that he was often staring at him. Casmia always remained expressionless so Milrath had no way of knowing what he was thinking or what he was searching for with his invading gaze. But it was uncomfortable, like he was keeping track of the beast Milrath had tried so hard to conceal from everybody. However, Casmia still let him stay in the church, so Milrath felt also a spark of hope whenever he was looking at him with those eyes that seemed to see everything. Milrath tried so hard to become a better man through faith, there was no doubt about that. However, no matter how much he prayed, no matter how devoted he strived to be, a monster still lived inside him. It never went away, it was merely slumbering, waiting for the day when it could raise its ugly head again. It had been there since the very beginning of his life; there was no way it could be separated from him. It didn't take long before Milrath would kill again. The monster was whispering to him, making him crawl back to his old tendencies. All it took was a quarrel with another priest and in a fit of rage Milrath had ruthlessly taken his life by stabbing. He just left the corpse to rot for other priests to find. They were merely the first drops of blood that would be spilled in the church. The beast was now loose and it would attack anyone. The faith, the radiance of sun and holy powers of Melresh, none of them were able to chasten the monster, and Milrath's attempts at striving to become a better person had ultimately failed. He would sin again, killing people who had shared their lives, food and prayers with him. He would take lives as if he had the authority to decide when someone's life should end. Why was he doing this? Even Milrath himself wasn't sure. He had been born wicked and as wicked he would stay. His desire to kill was unnatural, but so tainted and twisted his soul was that he didn't even care anymore. He had tried to run away from his true self, but it had caught him and stuck with him until the day he would die. The mountain church soon transformed from a holy place to a house of horror. Murders would happen frequently; the blood of the priests were staining the holy ground. Anxiety blossomed among the priests as they didn't know who or what was carrying out these murders and of course, Milrath's lips were sealed. In fear for their lives, some of the priests even decided to flee, abandoning the church that had been their home for decades. Some adamantly stayed, like high priest Casmia. Milrath had avoided him as well as he could, for he was sure the high priest was able to just take a quick glance at his soul and find out the truth behind the murders. However, he wouldn't get away with these slaughters forever. In the end, the culprit would always get exposed. One morning, the atmosphere inside the church felt heavy somehow. Milrath could tell something was different the moment he left his quarter. The church was always silent, but that morning, it was even more quiet, like in a grave that had been sealed for centuries. Milrath saw no one as he slowly walked towards the prayer room where all the priests gathered first thing in the morning to make their first prayers of the day. The great double doors were open and Milrath noted that everyone else was in the prayer room already. They had been muttering something between each other with low voices, but as soon as they noticed Milrath coming, they went silent. It was suspicious. Very suspicious. There was tension in the air, but nonetheless, they held the morning sermon just like any other day. Once this was done, however, Casmia then spoke to Milrath: “Brother Milrath, could you please kneel down?” Milrath instantly felt a sting in his black heart. Casmia was staring at him with that familiar piercing gaze, but somehow, it felt even more intense than ever before. He knew. He definitely knew. Nonetheless, Milrath did as the high priest had told and fell on one knee, just like he had done the day they first met. There had been many eyes judging him during all these years, but Casmia's gaze was without a doubt the sharpest one, giving Milrath even physical pain. For a moment Casmia just watched him and let the tension in the air drill into his skull. His back felt heavy as if all the sins he had carried throughout the years were gathering into a single mass, wanting to crush him. “Brother Milrath.” Casmia's voice resonated powerfully within the prayer room. “You came here asking for guidance and an asylum. I accepted your presence and granted them to you and you took lord Melresh into your heart. Or so I thought.” The sunlight behind the stained-glass windows suddenly became brighter and Milrath found it blinding. He had proudly stared at Casmia's face, but the light forced him to look down, making him look more humble than he wanted. “When I first saw you, I knew you were a sinner. That is the reason you came here in the first place, am I correct?” A moment of silence followed these words. However, Casmia soon continued. “You wanted to wash away your sins. That is a noble idea. You hoped that from faith you could find a blade of light that could slay your inner demons. But devoting your life to lord Melresh was not enough to kill them.” Milrath felt like there was a clawed hand inside him, crushing his heart more and more firmly with each word that came out of Casmia's mouth. His heart was a black one, but still a heart nonetheless. From the start Milrath had felt like Casmia could read his soul, but just how accurately he was able to do it was frightening. “I pity you, harbinger of darkness. You gave in to your inner evil and disturbed the house of Melresh. You wanted to feed your demons and so you fed them with the blood and flesh of your brothers. That can never be forgiven.” Milrath heard how multiple steps came closer to him. He could practically feel the eyes of priests on him, judging and despising him. He remained stationary like a statue, his head still low because of the brightness of the sunlight. He knew that this was the day of ultimate judgment, but would he accept it? “Brothers!” Casmia's voice echoed strongly in the room, so strongly that it almost felt like the building was shaking. “What is the fate of Milrath? Is it absolution and exile? Or is it execution?” There was only a short moment of whispering among the priests, they all came to the same conclusion very quickly. Milrath's black heart was trembling. “We have decided that Milrath's fate is…”The Flowers Are LyingA tender breeze caressed a deer's hair and ear as he lied on the ground on his side. It was a soft spot to lay on, the grass felt like a pillow, and so he had no haste in getting up. A delicate smile appeared on his face and he nudged his face against the soft grass. Maybe he could just lay there for a little while longer… The spot was so comfortable, like a finest bed. He was sure he had never slept in a bed that was as cozy as this one. He pondered this for a moment, until he realized something and suddenly opened up his eyes. He had forgotten who he was, except for his name; Kimene. At least he thought it was his name. A distressing observation to anyone, but for a reason Kimene didn't really understand, he wasn't that bothered by it. He felt calm and relaxed, but also curious. He decided to heave his body from the ground and was in a sitting position. He looked around him and was quite stunned by his surroundings. The scenery was dominated by various hues of blue; the grass, the trees, flowers, the creek and the sky… everything was blue. It was like straight from a fairy tale. Kimene was almost waiting for some little sprites to come out and dance on the flowers or on the surface of the water. But he didn't spot anything or anyone. Though, maybe he could find somebody around these parts, somebody who could tell him what this place was or how he had ended up here or perhaps even who he was. He got on his feet, still marveling at the miraculous world around him and started to stroll around. Kimene could hear the mellow sound of water flowing as it ran through its designated path. The kind wind was rustling the leaves of the trees and played with the grass, creating a soft concert. But in addition to these natural sounds one would expect to hear, a different kind of and a little mystifying noise made its way to Kimene's ears. It was like a chime of wind chimes, delicate and gentle. Kimene couldn't tell where it was coming from at first, but eventually as he continued to listen, he figured out that it was coming from some of the flowers. Upon this understanding, he ceased his quest for finding other beings for a moment and just observed the strange flowers. He liked flowers. Maybe that was why he found these ones so pleasant. And there were so many different kinds of flowers, like some had gold dust sparkling and dancing above them and some even emitted a little bit of glow. This delighted Kimene greatly, now he felt even more that he was inside of a fairy tale, just like the ones his mother used to tell him. Wait… His mother? Kimene suddenly felt bewildered. Somehow, through the fog in his mind that was shrouding his memories, he could reach fragments that were related to his mother. It was an odd sensation, getting back a piece of his life like that. But there were still many puzzle pieces missing. Perhaps he could find them if he looked around a bit more. Kimene got on the move again, still feeling a bit baffled, and accompanied with the need to learn more about himself. However, the chime of flowers filled him with a sensation that everything was well. This place seemed like a sanctuary of some sort. But no matter how wonderful it was, Kimene couldn't shed the desire to find someone else. Even if this was a paradise, it would be an awfully lonely one. He wandered around for some time, but the only beings he saw were butterflies that enjoyed the nectar of the gorgeous flowers. It was still nice to see there were some critters here. Soon after spotting the butterflies, Kimene also noticed a tree with fruits. He did feel a bit of hunger, so he decided to pick one. He stepped towards the tree and reached for one of the fruits, grasping it tightly. He picked it up and examined it a little bit. It resembled a yellow apple and its surface was smooth and flawless. Kimene took a bite and focused on the fruit's flavor. Oddly, it tasted more like a peach than apple, but it was still pleasant and sweet. Kimene consumed it happily and picked up a couple more, putting them inside his bag. He resumed his exploration in this beautiful place, feeling a bit more content now that he had found something tasty to eat. He put a mental note on where the tree was, but it was likely that he could find more of those elsewhere. Kimene's attention was completely stolen by a sudden golden light that was shot right into the sky, just a little further ahead of him. For a brief second he watched how it kept climbing higher and higher until it faded away completely. But, he was curious to see what had caused it in the first place and he began to move to the direction where the light had come from, behind a line of trees. Upon further inspection, Kimene noticed that the trees had grown in a weird formation here, they formed a circle. The light had probably originated from the center of this circle, but right now, there was nothing noteworthy, just a patch of crimson flowers. Though it was a little strange, considering how everything in here was blue. Then Kimene's sensitive ears picked up a sound nearby; something was coming towards him, rustling the vegetation near the circle of trees. Kimene was curiously staring at the direction where the sound was coming, until finally, somebody appeared from behind the trees. He wasn't quite sure what this person was, he looked like a feline but with dragon-like characteristics. His fur was mostly red with black stripes decorating it, but there were bits with light brown. But what Kimene found the most striking about his appearance was the stunningly blue eyes. However, his looks aside, Kimene was plagued by a feeling that he knew this person, but he couldn't reach his memories of him, not just yet. But he was happy to finally meet someone, it didn't matter whether they were acquaintances or not. “Hello there!” Kimene said cheerfully and raised his hand in a greeting manner. “I'm Kimene. Who might you be?” The feline dragon was staring at him in a similar way as how Kimene had just observed him. It seemed like he too was getting the sensation that he knew Kimene, but wasn't sure how. “I'm Amaru”, he answered as he took a few steps closer, turning his head slowly to look at the sky. “I followed the golden light…” “Oh, me too!” Kimene exclaimed and shifted his gaze upwards as well. “I wonder what it was.” “Huh. Just one more oddity this place has to offer.” Amaru then looked at Kimene again. “Are you… from these parts?” “No”, Kimene answered and shook his head slightly. “I just woke up here a while ago, all my memories gone.” He tilted his head a little bit. “Don't tell me your story is the same.” “Well, unfortunately it is”, Amaru said. “Oh…” Kimene was pondering something for a brief moment. “Maybe we should stick together, what do you say?” “Fine by me”, Amaru answered. “Great!” Kimene was happy to have some company. “Let's look around a little.” They picked a random direction and infiltrated through the vegetation to proceed. All the blueness around felt mesmerizing and tranquil as they wandered around this strange land. A serene feeling had conquered Kimene's soul, meanwhile Amaru, he had a seed of doubt inside. Kimene was happily strolling and investigating his surroundings, but Amaru couldn't shed a feeling that something was wrong here. Very, very wrong. But since he had lost his memories too, he couldn't quite understand this nagging feeling. It was frustrating. They came upon a patch of flowers again that were glowing in light blue color and they chimed their song. Kimene was the first one to stop and listen. He tilted his head from side to side, in a tune that Amaru couldn't perceive. Of course, he could hear the pleasant chime of the flowers, but it seemed like Kimene was more captivated by them than he was. “Do you like flowers, Amaru?” Kimene asked. “I think so”, Amaru replied. “But don't you think… that there's something off about these ones?” “Hmm…” Kimene was thinking again for a little while. “I don't know. They're beautiful. This whole place is beautiful and feels like a sanctuary.” “Can't deny that”, Amaru said quietly. “But it's like I can sense things… And something definitely is wrong here.” “Maybe you should just let yourself relax a bit more”, Kimene said and turned to face him, a smile decorating his face. “This place doesn't seem hostile. What if we took a break here? Perhaps resting will make you feel more comfortable.” Kimene gently captured Amaru's hand and looked him in the eyes. A small gesture of tenderness, but with strong consequences. A vortex of sensations suddenly surged through their bodies. There definitely was a bond between them, they could sense it now more clearly. It was like their hearts were beating as one, that their souls were entangled tightly. Insides filled with warm and strong emotions which they had forgotten for a moment, but now they were trying to come back, breaking through the shroud that lingered in their minds because of something they didn't remember happening. And still, their shared memories refused to be seen, something was causing them to run away. But at least now they were sure that there was a bond between them, something so powerful that wasn't shared with just anybody. Kimene felt confused and overwhelmed for a minute because of the spark he had just experienced after touching Amaru's hand. Still he continued to hold it, still he was looking at his stunningly blue eyes. But it all was so strange. How did he know this man? He didn't remember him at all, but why did it feel like this was the most important person in his life? Maybe Amaru's hunch was right… Maybe something truly was wrong with this place. “I want to remember you, but I can't”, Kimene spoke silently, sadness dripping from his words. “I can sense it… You're important somehow.” “I feel the same”, Amaru responded and touched Kimene's cheek tenderly. “But we'll find a way to get our memories back, okay?” “Okay…” A weak smile appeared on Kimene's face and he touched Amaru's hand. “Let's look around more, then”, Amaru said. “Surely there is something helpful we can find.” Hands were then separated, but only to find their meaning back. Kimene and Amaru decided to follow a creek, the water leisurely flowing forward. A silence had fallen in between the duo, for the bewildered feeling still remained. Both were trying to process it, but it was hard when you couldn't remember what those sensations meant. It seemed now that trying to restore their memories was an even more important task than before. There was a crack in the flawless surface. Amaru noticed how some of the flowers they saw on their path were flickering, like they would disappear for a blink of an eye, but then return to their spot like nothing had even happened. It gave a sensation that this was a fabricated reality. Amaru probably shouldn't have been able to see what he did and the flowers knew this, too. They started to chime even more enticingly and spread a fragrance that had soothing properties. It started to take hold of Kimene again, for some reason he was more prone to their intoxicating effects. Amaru looked at him with worry, because he didn't want anything to harm this deer, the feeling was so deeply rooted in his heart that it didn't matter that he couldn't remember Kimene. They had to get out of here, they just had to. Amaru wondered what would happen if he destroyed the flowers. He put this thought in the action as he started to stomp on the closest ones, crushing them completely with his feet. Their chime turned dull and their bright colors faded away. He ravaged every flower he saw and as he did so, he could hear a faint screech traveling to his ears from somewhere far away. For him that was enough proof that this wasn't a paradise, this was a fake. “What are you doing?” Kimene asked after watching Amaru stomping on the plants for a moment. “Something in these flowers… They're harmful to us”, Amaru responded. He damaged the last flower that still remained and was pretty pleased with his work. “Did you hear the scream? Something didn't want me to destroy the flowers.” Kimene shook his head. “I didn't hear anything.” “Well, I did. Clearly what I just did affected this world somehow”, Amaru said. Before they could say anything else, a golden light suddenly appeared from ahead, behind the trees, and rushed towards them. It circled around Kimene and Amaru for a little while, like a comet, before it went back to the direction where it had come from, disappearing from sight once again, leaving Kimene and Amaru to ponder its true nature. “Do you think… that it wants us to follow it?” Kimene asked quietly. “Perhaps. I think it's worthwhile to check out”, Amaru answered. “Come on, let's go.” The duo resumed their journey, except that now they had a little different goal in mind. Whatever the golden light was, it didn't seem malicious. Maybe it was trying to aid them. Maybe it had helped them to find each other when it had first appeared. Amaru had decided to trust in its guidance, especially since he got a different feeling from it. The light didn't possess this veiled oppressive sensation that the rest of this world had. They hoped that the light had gone straight ahead, because following anything was a hard thing to do when there were so many trees and other plants in the way. It was yet another strange thing this place had to offer; it was like vegetation had turned significantly more dense the further Kimene and Amaru were wandering. It felt quite smothering and gave this haunting sensation that the plants didn't want them to go. They wanted to keep them here, forever. It was unclear whether the plants had been growing this tightly from the start or had they just suddenly shifted their roots to create this thick formation. Unfortunately, it started to seem that it was the latter. The plants were like a cage, imprisoning Kimene and Amaru inside. “Amaru, I don't know if we can get further here”, Kimene groaned as he tried to push through a thick bush. “Maybe… maybe we can find another way around”, Amaru said, stopping for a moment, pondering their options. “Maybe if we go back and try some other direction…” He knew that they were pretty much stuck here. Without a proper tool, they had thin chances to get through the walls the plants had built on their way. It was probably only getting worse. With their branches and vines, they would form shackles and prevent them from ever escaping. Such a hopeless picture had been painted. However, miraculously, before Kimene and Amaru were able to lament their fate that much, the golden light appeared to them once more. It pierced through the dense formation of plants like a beacon and stopped in front of Kimene. The deer looked at the orb of light with confusion, especially when it started to circle around his hand. He raised this same hand and saw how golden light particles began to float above it. It was magic. “What the…?” Kimene was staring with wide eyes at his own hand and Amaru had gone silent, too. The golden light had awakened something within Kimene, the gift that had been granted to him when he had been a child. Eventually the orb of light moved aside and disappeared again, but its effect remained. The little particles around Kimene's hand turned green and as he clenched his hand into a fist, a green flame burst out and consumed it. But this didn't hurt Kimene, it was empowering him. He unleashed his newly found might and touched the plants in front of him. They immediately were engulfed with green flames and the fire just kept spreading. Kimene's magical flames destroyed all the obstacles on his and Amaru's path and now that they had the means to counter the smothering forest, they could freely proceed. The screech Amaru had heard earlier rushed into his ears once more, but more sharply, sounding more frustrated than before. Harming the plants apparently was making it angry. That gave Amaru an idea. “Kimene, burn every plant you can, especially flowers and trees”, Amaru said. “Okay, but will you tell me why?” Kimene responded while maintaining his green flames. “I heard the shriek again”, Amaru explained. “Maybe it is the entity that trapped us here and took our memories. If we can lure it out, maybe we can confront it and get out.” “Oh, alright”, Kimene said and did what Amaru had suggested. It was time to burn the paradise. The green fire consumed pretty much everything on their way as they kept going forward. Kimene was bewildered by the power he wielded, but the longer he continued burning the plants, the more familiar his abilities started to feel. It was a skill he had forgotten, but little by little it all was coming back to him. It was part of his core. Eventually, however, casting the fire started to feel really draining and Kimene was getting exhausted. He hadn't expected himself to be able to use magic for a long period of time, but finding out his limits was still a disappointment. He delivered the last few flames from his hand before he had to stop. He felt so weary, like if he had just done physically hard work. He had to catch his breath for a brief moment. “You did well”, Amaru praised as he came by the deer's side and patted him on the back. Kimene didn't get much time to rest when suddenly reality started to shift. He snatched Amaru's hands and grasped them tightly, afraid of what was happening around them. Some purple lights appeared that devoured everything, absolutely everything so Kimene and Amaru were standing in a black nothingness for a second. Then a really bright white light appeared, so bright that Kimene and Amaru had to shield their eyes. When it faded away, they found themselves standing on a blue plain that seemed endless, but as they let their gaze wander around, they couldn't possibly miss the most disturbing aspect of the place. At first it had looked like there were oddly shaped clouds in the sky, but then Kimene and Amaru realized that they weren't clouds. They were pale faces. Sorrow and torment had been carved onto them and they glided through the sky, disappearing and then reappearing. Out of nowhere emerged an entity that stole Kimene and Amaru's full attention. It was a hunched figure, dressed in dark purple robes that were filthy and ragged. Vine-like appendages filled with thorns were sticking out of various parts of the creature's body, moving eerily like snakes. A hood was covering most of the entity's head, but Kimene and Amaru could still see an abhorrent half-rotten face of some predatory beast that was emitting purple saliva. The creature let out a horrible shriek and at that moment Amaru knew that this thing was the one whose screams he had heard earlier. “Ruiners, filthy ruiners!” the creature yelled with a horribly gruff voice. “You won't leave! Ever!” The entity crouched and touched the ground with one of its hands. A few vines with thorns grew immediately from the ground and they rushed towards Kimene and Amaru. They embraced each other tightly as the vines were forming a cage around them. Kimene was still exhausted from using magic, he couldn't possibly do anything to get out of the situation. Amaru didn't know what to do. Maybe there was no other option than to just surrender to your fate. Something dropped from the sky and broke the upper part of the plant cage. It was the golden light again. “No!” the entity screamed. “You can't! Begone!” The golden light made a couple circular movements inside the cage and it managed to destroy the vines; it was like they had got consumed by golden flames. This effect reached all the way to the entity who got stunned by the burst of light. Kimene and Amaru were still holding onto each other, feeling quite astounded by these sudden events. They simply watched at the creature that was on its knees, the power of the golden light still affecting it. But, as Amaru stared at this mysterious entity, a strange but also familiar feeling found its way into his soul. He could feel a tingling sensation in his left hand. He let go of Kimene and started to slowly approach the creature. While doing this, he was unwrapping the bandages on his left arm and hand, revealing that this limb had a blue shimmer in it. Once he was standing in front of the entity, he touched its head with his blue hand, guided by some instinct he could feel within his heart. By the moment Amaru touched the being, a blue light engulfed its whole body. It glowed in the color of the sky for a little while, but then the light started to scatter, breaking down the creature's figure. A wind swept away these pieces until nothing remained, like if the entity had never even existed. Amaru and Kimene were left to wonder what it actually had been. Once the creature disappeared, the surroundings around Kimene and Amaru shifted again. The plain simply faded away slowly, a different reality taking its place. They found themselves in the middle of a forest, but this time, it was a regular one, so it had to be real. There was absolutely nothing out of ordinary and after experiencing the twisted paradise, it was a welcome sight. Kimene and Amaru kept glancing around happily, being just so unbelievably glad to be back in the world they belonged to. It was nighttime and the silvery moon was glowing in the sky; everything was bathing in its light. Seeing it and the stars that accompanied the great pale sphere, it was washing away the horrors of the parallel world. Soon after Kimene and Amaru were back to their own world, their memories were freed as well and they came back with a blast. They finally knew who they were, but most importantly, they remembered each other again and how much the other one meant to them. Kimene and Amaru stared each other in the eyes as the overwhelming love came back to them and they could feel again how every single little memory they had was enhanced by their true feelings. They rushed towards each other and got locked in an embrace, hearts beating as one. They held each other and kissed passionately, being just so incredibly happy that they had survived this horrifying ordeal. Everything would be alright. They had survived. Together. The golden light appeared to them one last time. Kimene and Amaru broke their embrace for a little while to acknowledge its presence. The light circled around them a few times before it stopped in front of them. “Thank you”, Kimene whispered and smiled. Then the light shot itself upwards and Kimene and Amaru watched it go until they couldn't see it anymore. They weren't sure what it had been, but it was thanks to this light that they got out. Under the blessing of the moon, Kimene and Amaru began to walk away. Hopefully their journey would lead them to pleasant experiences next time.Painted In StoneIt was an exceptionally bright summer day that woke Kanin up. Many moons had passed since the last time she was awake, she couldn't really tell the exact time, but it wasn't anything unusual in her case. When the sun was at its highest point in the cloudless sky, the warm and golden rays managed to travel through the holes on the ceiling of the cavern and shine on Kanin's face. As a reptile, she found the warmness of the sun quite enjoyable. She raised her head and looked up, making an observation of the above world. It seemed to be a beautiful day, not only because of the sunlight, Kanin noted that a mellow breeze was rustling the leaves of the trees, all of them possessing stunningly green foliage, some even had grown flowers. Kanin nodded her head approvingly, as if somebody had asked her if today was a fine day. She got onto her feet and stretched her limbs because it had been a while since the last time she had used them. She rustled her colorful feathers a little and she was ready to go. Kanin lived in a cozy cavern; there were a few holes scattered here and there that let in the light of day. But of course, it also gave shelter against rain and wind, making it quite an ideal place to live. But she didn't dwell there alone, her best friend Upai shared the cavern with her. And then there were also the fossils, remnants of the past, that had survived since the ancient times. Among them, there were crystals as well, preserving something miraculous and magical that otherwise would be forgotten. The cavern was quite a mystifying place, but more importantly, it was a home. As she walked around the cavern, Kanin pondered whether Upai was even awake. She kept glancing around, trying to catch a glimpse of her best friend, but didn't see her. It wasn't until Kanin had made her way to the grand entrance of their dwelling when she spotted Upai. So, she had woken up as well. Glad to see her friend again, Kanin started to walk towards her. They were quite different, Kanin and Upai. Kanin was a raptor that had lived since the lost times when dinosaurs inhabited the world. She had a very colorful plumage, making her pretty gorgeous sight. Upai, on the other hand, she was like a salamander, having an affinity with crystals. There were a few of them growing from her body, holding the colors of the rainbow. They had met aeons ago and formed a friendship that had lasted since ancient times. A bond like that, it was a treasure. “Good morning, Upai”, Kanin greeted as she emerged from the cavern. “It's technically not a morning anymore”, Upai pointed out, but maintained a smile on her face. “I think it's morning whenever you wake up and start the day, no matter what time it is”, Kanin explained her logic. “So, you're saying that if you woke up in the middle of the night and you decided to stay up, that's morning to you?” Upai inquired. “Yup.” Kanin sat down next to her friend. “Fine. Whatever you say”, Upai dropped the subject, but still remained amused by her friend's logic. The two friends were silent for a minute, looking at the wonderful panorama in front of them – it had been a while since the last time they had seen it in this glorious state. There was a stunning valley, filled with green since there was a lot of woods. The view was especially beautiful in autumn. But there were a couple colorful patches even in summer because of the flowers that bloomed. All the colors blended in together perfectly, it was like the whole scenery was a work of a talented artist. And who knew, maybe that was the origin story of the valley. It was also a peaceful place, Kanin and Upai had lived there for thousands of years. The wind started to blow slightly more strongly and it carried the smell of flowers which was a delight to Kanin and Upai's sense of smell. The breeze played with Kanin's feathers and rustled them while she would look at the clear summer sky and watch how birds were flying by. It truly was a serene moment. “Do you ever wonder who created all this?” Kanin suddenly asked her friend, her gaze still fixed at the sky. “What do you mean?” Upai asked. “You know what I mean. Like, did someone just snap their fingers and everything came to be? Or maybe an artist with a giant brush painted everything? Or did everything just… started to exist without anyone giving guidance to living beings and the world around us?” “Wow, you're pondering the weird stuff again”, Upai chuckled. “Maybe you've been asleep for too long, your head is getting fuzzy once more.” Even Kanin managed to snicker a little. “Yeah. Maybe.” They sat in silence again for a couple of minutes, just admiring the world around them. Whoever had created all this, they had done splendid work. Then Upai turned to face her friend again. “You know what we should do?” “What?” Kanin asked, looking at Upai with curious eyes. “We should paint!” Upai said; there was a spark of excitement in her eyes. “It's been so long since the last time, I honestly can't even remember.” Kanin seemed to think about this for a brief moment, perhaps trying to recall when was the last time they had done this. Whether she succeeded in this or not, she didn't let her friend know. Instead, she just nodded her head after a while. “You know what, I like that idea, we should definitely do that!” “Great!” Upai exclaimed, seeming even more excited now that she got an approval from Kanin. “But! Let's make this interesting.” “Oh?” Kanin tilted her head a little, being all ears. “I think we should form teams and do a challenge! The team that manages to get more paintings done wins.” “I'm in!” Kanin replied and she got up from her spot. Upai started to slither inside the cavern and Kanin followed her. Upai was glancing around the insides of their home, trying to recall where they had left their artistic tools. “Do you remember where our brushes and paints are?” Upai asked her friend. “I can't quite bring it to my mind, it's been so long.” “I think they're in this section”, Kanin answered and took a turn to the right, heading to a small chamber. And that indeed was where their tools had been stored. Clean brushes just lying around, ready to be used to create something beautiful. And many stone bowls filled with paints of various colors, they were something Kanin and Upai had made together. They had been sealed shut with flat stone covers, which had gathered a layer of dust since they hadn't been touched for a long time. Kanin approached one of their homemade paint containers and opened it, peeking inside. It appeared the paint had been preserved well. “As far as I can see, we have everything ready here”, she informed Upai, who had been checking something else. Upai found a pile of thin stone plates that had nothing in them. They had used these kinds of plates before as their canvases, it was great that there were still quite a few of them left. “Nice, we can begin now”, Upai said and took a batch of the plates, starting to carry them to a more expansive chamber, suitable for working. Meanwhile Kanin had taken it as her task to carry all the bowls of paint to the said chamber. The two friends prepared a little workshop in there; it was spacious and there was plenty of light coming through the holes in the ceiling. Soon everything was ready and they were about to begin painting. However, there was this one thing they had to do first. “Time to awaken our buddies!” Kanin exclaimed excitedly. She rushed around the cavern, touching all the stones that contained fossils. With her touch, they started to come alive; a green glow appeared on their surfaces, waking up the ancient creatures that had slumbered for a long time. Various dinosaurs came forth from the fossils, just as whole as back in time when the world had been ruled by them. They stretched their limbs, shook their heads, trying to get used to moving their bodies again. While Kanin was going around awakening her fossilized friends, Upai was doing something similar as well. Within the crystals that were scattered around the cavern just like the fossils, they hold something alive in them as well. Upai's touch made them glow too, but with different colors, depending on the crystal. A life could be seen pulsating inside the crystals, then the glow would grow even brighter before disappearing. In the place of the crystal would stand a creature similar to Upai, a diverse cast of animals that had crystal growths in their bodies. And just like the dinosaurs, they had been asleep for a long time, so they were doing the same kind of rituals using their bodies after their great rest. Once Kanin and Upai had managed to wake up their friends, they watched happily as their little crowd gathered inside the grand chamber. It was a wholesome moment, old friends meeting again and catching up, talking about what kind of dreams they had been having since the last time they had seen each other. A light chattering filled the cavern, a sound that hadn't been heard within its stone walls for centuries. Kanin and Upai allowed the friends to talk for a while before they caught their attention. “Listen up, everybody!” Kanin yelled loudly so her voice could be heard by everyone in the cavern. The crowd went silent immediately, numerous curious eyes now staring at Kanin and Upai. “We have now gathered here because of a fun little event we thought you would enjoy”, Upai started explaining. “It's a little art challenge! We form two teams and the one that's able to get more paintings done wins!” A chatter burst throughout the crowd again, everyone seemed excited. Upai decided to keep a brief pause before she continued. “It's fossils versus crystals, everybody! Now, if you all are ready, start painting!” After her declaration, the game was on. All the creatures rushed to get their brushes and stone plates Kanin and Upai had prepared for them. Everyone found their own little spot, dipped their brushes in paint and started to create art. Kanin and Upai joined them and so everyone in the cavern was busy with painting. The joy of being able to create and express yourself, the sensation is wondrous. All the creatures were filled with this feeling. Everyone was having so much fun that they ran out of stone plates rather quickly. But it didn't stop them from creating, they just started to paint on the cavern's walls instead, making it more beautiful than it had ever been. The pictures they painted depicted many different things, brought into the canvas with vibrant colors for everyone to see. Some of them were portraits of those who were once dear to them. Some were landscapes of their former homes. And some were simply things they just felt like painting. But they all told a story of some kind and with the power of their brushes, they were able to bring these things to life, in a way. The aspect that this was a game was pretty much forgotten after some time since all the creatures just enjoyed creating art. Since this thing was Upai's idea, she had tried to keep track of who had painted what and how many paintings they had done, but even she had to admit eventually that it didn't really matter and went with the flow. So much joy, so much passion… The cavern became a little art gallery. The creatures would fall asleep again, but whenever they would wake up once more from their slumber, they would be reminded that they had shared an inspiring moment when they all gathered around and created something with great desire.trophyRandom Scribbles Pt. 10I'M A MAD TELEVISION HEAD There were creatures in the darkness, but no one saw them – except for Synthka. People were walking on the streets, bland expressions on their faces, walking wherever they needed to go at such late hours. The town was enveloped by blackness, it was like it was floating in a void; stars had fallen from the sky a long time ago. The many street lamps and neon signs offered their light for the people that were wandering around, but their artificial light was dreary. No one cared at this point, for it was the age of when machines and people were fusing together, so whether something was considered natural or not, it didn't matter. Synthka himself was a prisoner of this ideology. A skinny man, dressed in black as if he was mourning, Synthka was walking while nervously glancing around, the many critters around him watching him. Though, he didn't have eyes, so was he really looking around? Synthka's head had been long gone, replaced by a television. There were many things he didn't acknowledge about himself; for instance, he didn't know if Synthka was even his name, it was just something he had picked up from a monitor when he woke up with his current memories. What had happened to him originally, what was his past life like, he couldn't really tell. He knew he was just a victim of modification, nothing but a playground for madmen. His existence was a torturous one and contemplation of ending it all was not a stranger to his broken mind. So many strange cats, equipped with extra limbs and eyes and mechanical parts, they were infesting the streets wherever Synthka was going. But they weren't the only ones; there were numerous rifts around the town, masses of eyes peeking from them, their gazes fixed on Synthka. He could also see quickly moving creatures, both humanoid and animalistic in appearance, that would disappear from his sight before he could take a better look at them. Nobody paid any attention to them; it was all in Synthka's head. He didn't want to be here, he had to get away. He began running, not caring if he bumped someone in the process, their angry comments wouldn't be heard. There wasn't much choice where to go for a miserable wretch no one cared about. So Synthka headed towards the hole he called home. It was an apartment that had definitely seen better days. It was cramped, there were holes everywhere, wallpaper had come off in many places and there was water damage. But only there Synthka could hide from the overwhelming world. He had no idea if this apartment had belonged to him as there were no items that could reveal any information about who had lived within these walls. Synthka just happened to have a key. There was buzzing inside his head as he stormed into the place. He slammed the door shut and leaned against it for a moment. His heart was beating fast and he was instinctively gasping for air; however, he had no nose, no mouth, so he didn't know how he could breathe. After cooling down for a while, he walked deeper into the dark apartment, to a living space where only a couple of pieces of furniture waited for him, along with a mattress where he slept. Synthka dragged himself to the mattress and sat down, holding his heavy head. Somewhere within that television was the brain of a fragile man. A complex organ, hooked up with wires so carefully put together, it was like a piece of art. Having no face anymore, his identity had been wiped away. And still, everything he would think or feel would be displayed on the screen, robbing him of private thoughts. He was meant to be watched and observed by others. And occasionally, a special broadcast would be displayed on the screen, depriving him even the control of his body that was still made of flesh and allowed him to have some humanity left in him. Sometimes Synthka wondered if he was even a person anymore. But he would always come to the same conclusion: yes, he was. His life was full of suffering. And to suffer, you have to be someone. WE INVITED HIM IN AND NOW HE WON'T LEAVE Hare's memory was a fuzzy one, it was like there was fog in his head that veiled important events from the past two days, preventing him from revisiting what he had seen and experienced. There was just this mess of fleeting moments that kept repeating in his mind, but they appeared rather confusing. He could recall a huge explosion, flinging rubble in the air. Trench full of mud. He had gone down fast; something had hit him in the head. Hard. Most likely he had survived just because his helmet had protected him. This is where his consciousness faded. However, as he momentarily awakened later, it became apparent that he had survived. His comrades had rescued him and brought him into the safety of their bunker. A doctor had examined Hare right away, but miraculously, there wasn't much exterior damage to his body; just some bruising and cuts that weren't deep. However, the doctor had suspected he could probably have a concussion. This hunch proved to be right when Hare started to vomit. He also complained about headaches, so the doctor suggested that he should focus on resting. Hare tried his best to sleep, but struggled with this a little bit as he would keep waking up every now and then. He could fall asleep again after a while, but his dreams were restless. Eventually Hare managed to get into a slightly better condition. He could walk around a little bit, but had to take it easy as he experienced some dizziness. He hadn't recovered enough to go back to the battlefield, so he had to remain in the bunker and to occupy himself, he would do small tasks such as tinkering with various electrical devices and make sure everything was running as smoothly as they could in this little hole. Though, soon Hare would take whatever tasks were available just to get his mind off of something that had started to trouble him after his concussion. One day, by the entrance of the bunker, Hare had seen something… or someone that wasn't there before. Seeing this figure had caused him to question his own sanity. Standing in the shadows, there was a tall black figure, wearing robes that looked ancient. The entity had the head of a raven, a feature that is out of this world. Hare had spent a moment just by staring at this figure. It had stared back at him. Then Hare thought that he was probably just seeing things because of his head injury, especially since nobody else was able to see that thing, his comrades kept passing it numerous times a day, but never acknowledged the being's presence. Hare tried his best to just ignore the thing and just do whatever needed to be done. It became a much harder job to do as the creature started to appear in every corner of the bunker. Mess hall, storage, sleeping quarters, around the hallways… Hare started to see the entity everywhere. Sometimes he saw it following around one of his comrades like an odd shadow. It started to imitate what they were doing, like whenever Hare and his fellows would sit down and drink after day had turned to night, the raven-head was there too, drinking the same wine as them. Hare would glare at the creature every now and then, but he never became intoxicated enough that it would slip from his tongue to tell the others what he was seeing. He really didn't want to be labeled as a madman. Days passed by but the raven-head didn't leave the bunker. Hare had gotten used to its presence as it didn't seem to be malicious, but it was still a great mystery what its purpose was. It had never tried to communicate with him or anybody else. It just was… there. Watching. Mimicking. Until one day, Hare finally got the answer for what was the intention of this strange entity. Two dead soldiers were rushed in. Hare caught a glimpse of them as they were transferred to the infirmary. He also saw the raven-head standing by the bunker's entrance, waiting, as if it knew what was going to happen. Then it did something which Hare couldn't fully comprehend at the time. The entity began to walk beside the convoy and made weird motions with its hand, as if pulling something invisible. Two small and blue spheres rose from the chests of the corpses and the creature quickly snatched them, hiding them inside its robes. Then the creature retreated back into the shadows, leaving Hare to wonder what he had just witnessed. There was a hell outside and more bodies would come. It started to feel like every time a group went out of the bunker, somebody would come back dead. And every time, Hare saw how the raven-head would pull these blue things out of the deceased. Hare still had no explanation for this, but he had once again started to feel odd about the entity. Was it just a coincidence that the death toll was rapidly increasing after it had appeared? Sure, Hare and all his comrades knew it well that they might not return home alive, but it started to feel like this creature was a seriously bad omen to them. As more and more people kept dying, Hare became confident that the raven-head was to blame. Desperation and death prevailed. Less and less men were still alive in the bunker. They had tried to call for reinforcements but they had never appeared. Hare was one of those few survivors. Morale was as low as it could, the men remained somberly quiet. The sounds of artillery haunted them. And the raven-head still lingered around, tormenting Hare. He had had a lot of time to think and he was pretty sure he knew why this creature was here. It was just waiting for them all to die. Then it would harvest their souls. As soon as it had first made its appearance, it had doomed them all. There was no escape from a gruesome demise. ALL THESE BROKEN HEARTS First it's black. Then it's white. And then black again. Then white. This reality around me just kept shifting and changing constantly. Now everything was black and I was stuck in this endless void. But there were stars scattered all around, I was walking on a path made from their dust. It was beautiful and brilliant, reminding me that even in the middle of darkness, there was beauty. The stars were twinkling in such a way that one could find hope and comfort from their light, but for me, it was getting harder and harder to do. I was a sinner, cast away into this dimension I couldn't even understand, just to suffer even more. Along the path of stars, I could occasionally find a heart lying on the ground. Countless people before me had walked on this same path, just seeking for a way out of anguish. And for some, leaving the heart behind was the best choice. Then I would find them and I would take them. Inside my chest was nothing but a black hole, the perfect indicator for others to see where my misery was coming from. I would try each heart I was able to find, put them in my chest and see if they could work. So far, no luck. I knew it well that they were all broken, but I simply held onto hope that maybe I could come across one that would help me feel connected to you again. You took mine and banished it inside a dark world where I never managed to retrieve it. But I thought that maybe… Maybe I could replace it with one that got discarded. I can feel their ache and despair, their sorrow and hatred, all the wicked things they tried their hardest to seal away and all the twisted things they wanted to unleash. There was so much darkness a human heart could carry. And I would feel them too as I switched around with the hearts I had found. Maybe they were tainting me slowly, corrupting me even further. But I simply didn't care. I was driven by desperation, I was chasing the shadow of you. I yearned for your presence, your touch. Even if it takes a million years, I'll continue to search through hearts no one wants anymore, attempting to find one that matches yours. Perhaps it's all futile, because how could a broken heart heal anything? But the truth is, no one throws away unbroken ones. There was nothing else I could do but to keep looking from the abandoned hearts. As the strongest dark emotions a heart can possibly contain keep filling me, I can feel only pity towards these people who carried them. For that reason, I keep all the hearts I have collected. Whatever may the reason behind their abandonment be, these emotions were a mark of humanity. Perhaps I'm a fool here, but I think these pieces they tore off from themselves are still valuable. They were a burden they would rather not hold anymore and I won't judge them for that. But once there was love in them, love and hopes and dreams, all of that just got contaminated with darkness. And I continue to walk in the world of black and white, following the roads of stardust, I keep collecting the hearts like a child collects seashells from the beach. They're unique and beautiful and since nobody else wants them, I will take care of them. Is it my new purpose, to walk through this space gathering hearts that were left to rot in the void? Or am I simply cursed to suffer because of my sins, looking for something that can't be found? I don't know, I don't know anything anymore. At least the twinkling of the stars soothes my soul. I'm most likely damned, but maybe my time here in this dimension won't be constant torment. But everything is shifting and changing and so will I and my sensations. I'm like embedded into this space, so I think I should just get used to it. ONE-WAY ELEVATOR TO HELL Raneshu was sitting behind his desk, writing down the last wishes, regrets, grudges, desires and needs of dead souls, using a fountain pen and a notebook that never ran out of pages. It wasn't really a duty of his, it's just something he enjoyed to do while doing his actual work. With his large pointy ears he could hear well the echoes of the dead, both from hell and when they were just on their way there. There were many paths to hell and only a fraction came through the one where Raneshu was stationed. He was quite an unusual sight in the eyes of humans as he shared the same kind of body as them, but his head belonged to a black dog. But, usually people hardly paid any attention to his looks since they already knew where they were heading. A few lamps were attached to the walls, giving illumination for Raneshu as he was immersed into his writings. The room where he was working resembled a hotel lobby, at least for now. It had changed many times during aeons, but just as humanity progressed, so did hell. There wasn't much in the room aside from Raneshu's desk, the most notable thing being the elevator that was on his right side. Then there were a few things to make the place appear more welcoming, such as paintings hanging on the wall and plants sitting on their pots. Because this entrance wasn't used for people that had to be punished, no, this was the gateway people used when willingly wanting to get to hell. It had been a long time since the last human came this way. But now, Raneshu could hear uncertain steps coming from the corridor ahead of him. He did a quick glance into the complete darkness that shrouded the corridor, not yet seeing who was walking along that path. He focused on writing again, allowing the arrival to come at their own pace. The steps kept coming closer and closer until they reached the room. Raneshu was still writing, not yet paying attention to the person. “Umm…” Even the voice was hesitant. “Is this the way to the underworld?” Raneshu raised his head to look at the arrival. A young man with a pained expression, something that wasn't an unusual guest around here. “Yes”, Raneshu replied and resumed his writing. “Great, I have to go down there”, the young man said, seeming slightly more confident now. “My… the love of my life was taken from me. I have to save him.” Raneshu had heard this countless times before. It was one of the most common reasons why people wanted to descend into hell. What an incredible force the love was, making people do insane things. “I have to give you a warning”, Raneshu said, still keeping his gaze on the notebook. But before he managed to continue further, the young man already got agitated. “I refuse to go back without him! I will get inside and you won't stop me!” Raneshu looked at him again. “I'm not stopping you. I'm simply giving you advice.” “Oh…” The young man calmed down immediately. “What is it, then?” “This elevator here”, Raneshu said and pointed at the device, “it will take you to your destination. However, be warned that it won't take you back. Once you're in hell, you have to find your own way out.” “I will.” So much bravery – or foolishness – behind the man's words, but it was all the same to Raneshu. “Thank you for your advice.” “Good luck to you”, Raneshu said and started to write again. He heard how the young man walked to the elevator and entered it. It took him a brief moment to figure out how it works, but soon Raneshu could distinguish the noise of the clanking machine that headed downwards. After the elevator's sound had faded, he could hear rumbling as the new elevator took its place in the lobby, waiting for the next traveler. Now there was one more soul in hell. It didn't really matter if he had gone there voluntarily. And Raneshu didn't really care about his fate. He was just another lovesick fool that thought they could just enter hell and find the one they loved dearly and manage to return back to the world of mortals just like that. They would rot in hell. But if nothing else, at least they could suffer together. MOCKING GODS A fox, an eagle, a tiger and an ox… These were the sacred and celebrated gods of the little village Kangama. Long time ago they helped the ancestors of Kangama to make the region a habitable place, for back in the day it was a barren and desolate land. The ancestors were refugees that had escaped the disaster of their homeland, eventually ending up in the harsh region where they were barely able to survive. The four gods took pity on them and combined their strength to create a good place to live. They shaped the land, made it fertile, and created a lake and rivers so the earth would never be thirsty again. They made the plants grow and soon the woods dominated the landscape. The region became like a piece of heaven and the ancestors rejoiced, praising the four gods. Generation after generation the respect for the deities prevailed and were celebrated through festivities and offerings. The tale of their good deeds lived on, being passed from parents to their children. The villagers had built a shrine for the gods and there were statues representing each one. It was a holy ground for praying and showing respect. It was clear that the relationship with the people of Kangama and their gods was a strong one, even after so many years had passed. So when the destruction struck the peaceful little village by weaponizing the image of gods, it truly was an act of evil, a cruel joke. The people of Kangama had gone to sleep without worries, but little did they know, their lives were about to be changed forever. The winds had started to howl in an unnatural way, bringing forth dark clouds that would unleash torrent and rattle the sky with thunder. The sounds of the incoming storm woke some up, but they just thought it would pass over night. But, as soon as people started screaming, the rest of the villagers knew something was going on and came out of their homes to find out a reason for the commotion. Buildings were on fire and the flames were abnormally dark. The rain seemed to just strengthen them and the fire kept spreading. However, the thing that horrified the people wasn't the destructive flames themselves, but the reason why they had ignited in the first place. It wasn't something natural like being struck by lightning. No, it was because the four gods were wreaking havoc. But they were tainted, their beautiful and vibrant colors had been turned black and there was just malice in their eyes. The ox and the tiger would maul people that came too close to them while the fox and the eagle would keep spreading chaos. The villagers were sure that these creatures weren't the actual gods for they were known for their benevolence. Somebody or something was just using their images to inflict more pain onto them. But who or why, that was something they never got an answer for. Amidst the great calamity, some people were able to escape, just like their ancestors. But the whole settlement was burnt down and many lives were lost that night, their harrowing screams would forever echo among the ruins of homes. The four beasts were never seen again as they didn't hunt down the survivors. Those who made it out alive didn't want to go back, it was simply too painful and they were afraid. Something evil would definitely linger there, a malicious force had surely been behind this great tragedy. The survivors would probably never get answers for all the questions behind this attack, having no other option but to move forward. Why hadn't the real gods helped them? It was the one question that was burning the most fiercely inside the minds of the villagers. There had been no trace of them, not even when the survivors had prayed for help and guidance from them. They had remained silent and unseen. It made the survivors feel like they had been betrayed by their gods. Some people were confused and grieving, but some started to harbor resentment towards the deities. In the end, they would wander far away from their precious homeland. And along that journey, the farther away they would go, the less and less they would think of the sacred fox, eagle, tiger and ox. Eventually they would fade away from their minds. And what good is a god that no one remembers?My Last SymphonyTruly, a celebration of a grandeur kind, fit for the most magnificent people. Ashmalor's half-hidden face was decorated with a smile of complacency as his gaze wandered among the crowd of fabulous people that had gathered in his grand ballroom. Everyone was wearing a mask, hiding their identities, but perhaps that would just encourage them to enjoy their time in this night's masquerade as they were free from the burden of their usual faces. As far as Ashmalor could see, this seemed to work, for people were drinking champagne, laughing, dancing; simply having a good time. It was part of the fun and thrill, not knowing the true identity of the other as you would approach them. And tomorrow, they will be just shadows of yesterday. Ashmalor saw beauty in that; he was a man with a fine taste. Lord Ashmalor was the host of this small-scale festival and he walked among the people like a proud peacock. He knew his worth as a noble man and those around him recognized this as well, greeting him whenever he would pass by, raise their drinking glasses for him and some would even give a slight bow or curtsy out of respect. Ashmalor enjoyed it all, being very much delighted with the masquerade. Whole ballroom was bathed in warm colors, emitted by marvelous chandeliers, crafted by the most skillful craftsmen there were. Such tones gave the space a lively nuance, which only complimented the overall ambiance of the celebration. A very talented pianist was trying his best to bring the most pleasant notes he could produce with his fingers for the guests to relish, filling the ballroom with his music. He performed well, the fact how delighted the people were to dance to his tunes was a clear proof of that. As an instrumentalist himself, Ashmalor was very impressed with the young pianist's work. The lord couldn't help but notice how much he resembled him in his younger days. He wondered where he had managed to find this fine young man. From the great windows that surrounded the dance hall, Ashmalor had been able to follow the passage of time. When the masquerade had started, the sun had been setting, painting the sky with colors that only the most skilled of artists could imitate. Guests had started to come in when the day was turning into night, as if they were creatures of darkness that would rejoice after the sun went down. Ashmalor hadn't been keeping track of time that carefully afterwards, the celebration had taken his attention almost completely. However, at some point he started to become a little distracted, like something wasn't quite how it should be. He couldn't get rid of the feeling, no matter how much he tried to get immersed with festivities. He had then glanced at the windows, seeing a night sky – just like one would assume. But there was something wrong with it, though he couldn't quite put a finger on what exactly. Once again Ashmalor tried to shrug it off and attempted to enjoy the masquerade. He was holding a glass of champagne as he watched his guests from the side, feeling odd. Then he shifted his gaze at the liquid he was drinking; a sparkling light drink. Absent-mindedly he swirled the champagne in its glass before he took a sip from it. It looked, smelled and tasted like it should, and yet there was something strange about it, too. This bothered Ashmalor greatly. Once the lord had drank his glass empty and placed it on one of the side tables, he decided to find a dance partner for himself – maybe that would get his mind back on track. He took a dive into the stream of people, becoming one with the flow. A lone maiden came on his way, dressed in a yellow gorgeous dress and was wearing the same kind of mask most of the women had; a well-decorated one that hid the upper half of their face. The woman noticed Ashmalor approaching her, immediately realizing what his intentions were. Her lips curved into a smile and she performed a curtsy for the lord. Ashmalor showed his respect for her by giving a slight bow in return, and after this move, they began to dance. It was like their bodies were intertwined by the music, their movements flawless and elegant. The dance of the lord and the unknown woman soon became the center of attention as a lot of guests stopped momentarily what they were doing and watched them. And for a little while, Ashmalor forgot his little predicament. But not for long. His perfect dance with the woman he didn't know suddenly started to get filled with imperfections. It started with little things. The woman in front of him was supposed to be flesh and blood, so why did she all of a sudden start to feel cold to touch? Her lips were moving, she wanted to say something to him, but Ashmalor couldn't hear a single word. When the lord tried to make eye contact with her, there was nothing but blackness staring back at him. This darkness began to spill; Ashmalor witnessed how black tears were dripping and staining the woman's cheeks. Profoundly perplexed by these changes in his dance partner, he eventually let go of her and looked around him. The whole crowd had started to turn just like the woman. Wherever lord Ashmalor would look, there were black eyes staring back at him. He was the host of the masquerade, he was supposed to be the focus of attention, so he didn't really feel bothered by the gazes of blackness. The lips of some of the guests moved slowly, but no words came out of them. And now that he paid attention to it, the piano music had begun to fade as well, veiling the ballroom in silence. Lord Ashmalor couldn't understand what was happening and it seemed like nobody could explain it to him, either. However, he wasn't frightened, just utterly confused. Aimlessly he started to wander among the crowd, all their eyes on him, and he tried to comprehend what was happening. Was this real? Or was this a dream? He attempted to go backwards in his memories, to the moment when the masquerade had started. The beginning… Where was the beginning, though? Ashmalor soon came to the realization that he had a huge memory gap at the place of time when the celebrations had started. Being completely bewildered, he walked to one of the great windows and looked outside – and all the black-eyed guests gazed with him. The sky was black like void, it didn't appear natural at all; the lord wondered how a human eye could even perceive something as dark as how heaven looked at that moment. Even more unreal it became as the small twinkling lights Ashmalor had assumed to be stars began to fall from the black canvas. One by one they dropped and crashed against the world below and watching this unfold gave yet another puzzling sensation for the lord. Wherever the fallen stars landed, they would make a piece of the scenery Ashmalor saw from the window disappear with them. Little by little the town that surrounded his castle vanished from his reality as if it had never even existed. There was just nothingness. Except for one thing. A beautiful moon was still in its place in the sky, even though everything else had fallen. Since the rest of the world was gone, it was only natural that Ashmalor's eyes would seek the moon's presence. Somehow the great silvery sphere looked exceptionally magnificent that night and, in his heart, the lord made a wish for the moon, pleading with it to give him answers so his mind could be at ease. And the brilliant orb, the storyteller of the nights and the guide to those who sought understanding of the many mysteries of the world, it responded to the lord's wish and revealed him the truth. The divine moonlight was like a blessing and Ashmalor closed his eyes. It was the inevitable fate of a mortal man that had now occurred to him. This was his last celebration, the final festivity his grand ballroom would hold. Before his soul would move on, he was allowed to host the masquerade, as a finale of his luxurious life. Ashmalor was grateful for this. He thanked the moon and he thanked the unknown entity who had made it possible for him to enjoy his time just a little bit longer. When Ashmalor opened up his eyes again, he noticed that now the moon was gone as well. In his heart the lord bid the sphere a farewell, for this was possibly the last time they would see each other. He turned his back to the window and met his guests again. The warm colors that had previously dominated the ballroom were now gone. Everything had taken the tones of dark brown and sickly green; those were the colors the lord associated with the passing of a soul. Perhaps they were now getting towards the ending of the celebration of his life. Every single person in the crowd was smiling at lord Ashmalor, even though their eyes were still black and so were their tears. They were here to say their goodbyes and as the lord began to walk among them once more, he wondered if there was a deeper meaning these guests were secretly holding. Maybe behind those masks were all his hopes and dreams, his plans and ambitions, and melodies he wouldn't be able to play. And yet, he felt like he had managed to live a fulfilling life. And for that life, he decided to give one more symphony. The young pianist who had earlier delighted the guests with his music was now gone, taking the only sound of the ballroom with him. However, the piano was still there standing on its designated place. It was such an elegant instrument, being completely black except for masterfully crafted golden adornments. Lord Ashmalor walked to the piano and sat down on the seat in front of it, moving gracefully and in a ceremonial manner. He let his hand wander on the piano's surface a little; it felt so smooth to touch. His guests were waiting patiently for him to begin, standing solemnly around the ballroom. Gently the lord put his fingers on the keys and started to play. The dance hall that had remained completely silent for a while was now getting liveliness back into it through the lord's music. He started to play the same melodies as the young pianist had before vanishing, having a striking similarity in skill. Although his guests couldn't speak and express their admiration through words, they could still hear. And so, as the music began to flow in the ballroom, people started to dance once again, as a compliment for the lord's excellent performance. Lord Ashmalor poured his heart and soul into the music he created with the movements of his fingers, for this was the last time he would be able to play the melodies that someone could hear, even if that someone meant a crowd of shadows that lived in between the realms of the living and dead. But for him, it was enough. He played the most beautiful tunes he had learned during his lifetime, ranging from those he had first heard as a young man to songs he had learned later in life. Music had been his passion ever since he was a little boy, thanks to his father who had shown him the magnificent world of art that lay within the keys of the piano. It was only fitting for Ashmalor to end his time in the world of mortals by a musical performance. When the lord thought that this little farewell concert was approaching its end, he started to play one more song. It was a piece he had composed all by himself, his last symphony for life. And perhaps, this piece of music could act as a perfect medium for his soul to pass onto the afterlife. As the notes lingered in the ballroom's air, his masked guests started to eventually fade away. Never stopping their elegant movements, one by one the people in the dancing hall took more transparent forms until they vanished from sight completely. In the end, only Ashmalor remained, still letting his music fill the ballroom after the last guest had left him. Then he stopped. Ashmalor was surrounded by silence. Slowly he stood up from his seat, holding a single thought close to his heart: he was ready. When he instinctively turned around, he was greeted by a foreign figure, someone he hadn't met before and yet, he felt like he had just reunited with an old friend. He was face to face with a tall entity who had their whole body covered by a black cloak. A completely white mask resembling a face of some sort of canine was the immediate center of attention since it stood out so well from the otherwise black mass. The entity didn't utter a single word, instead, they just offered their black hand for the lord. Ashmalor understood perfectly what this gesture meant and he reached out, taking a gentle hold of the creature's hand. The mysterious being then pulled him in a little before they turned to face the opposite direction, guiding the lord to follow them. As they moved, this dream-like reality around them started to collapse, sinking into the void. The lord felt no fear even as his familiar surroundings became nothingness, he knew the entity would guide him to safety. One must walk the path of darkness before they could bask in the radiance of the nurturing light.The Dark Flower Will BloomA lightning split the dark heaven for a moment, only to disappear as fast as it had appeared. A merciless rain which originated from the black clouds was pouring down and unfortunate were those wretches that had to travel around that night, getting soaked by the cold water. The winds played their part too and harsh were their fangs as they traversed across the land, gnawing at anything that came in their way. The weather conditions surely were abysmal that night, forcing most folks to remain in a shelter, waiting for the storm to pass. However, in a concealed tower, built from black stone, there was a boy who was attempting to tame the storm. He was standing at the very top of the tower, on a circular platform that had no railings or anything else that would ensure the safety of anyone who would make their way to this part of the building. There were just a handful of columns that supported a roof that did give a little bit of shelter from the awful weather. The boy was protected from most of the rain, but this just agitated the winds and they were being even more cruel to the child, grasping his clothes and wanting to pull him down from the tower altogether so he could experience a gruesome end. But the boy ignored their howls and snarls, focusing only on one thing. There was someone else on the platform at that moment. A man was quietly observing the boy's movements, every single motion the child made with his hands and feet. He watched how the boy beckoned to the clouds, bending them to his will. And indeed, he managed to gain control of them. The black masses would take any shape the boy desired and in a short period of time, different kinds of entities were running around the tower, from horses to dogs, from rabbits to even mythical beasts. Never did the boy lose his focus and he controlled his creations like an experienced mage. And after watching the child's performance for a while, a slight smile appeared on the man's face. “Very good, Nokhi”, the man praised the child. “Are you sure this was your first time shaping the storm clouds? To me it seems like you've been doing this for a good while already.” Nokhi released the black clouds from his control and they were quickly swept away by the winds, their shapes mangled and torn apart. The boy turned to face his master and was clearly very pleased with himself. He had a radiant smile on his face as he gave a quick and respectful bow and said: “Thank you, master Jeskel!” “Now, let's go back inside”, Jeskel spoke, gesturing with his black wooden staff towards the set of stairs that were in the middle of the circular platform, leading down to the insides of the tower. The man was the first one to begin the descent, but Nokhi wasn't far behind. The stairs spiraled down for a little while and there were a handful of ghostly blue flames scattered around the walls of this section to emit some sort of illumination. They did contribute in giving an eerie atmosphere for the stairs, especially since they ignited and extinguished themselves depending on the position of Jeskel and Nokhi. In the earlier days, Nokhi had found these flames to be a little unnerving, but nowadays, they didn't bother him at all. Eventually the man and the boy came to a black wooden door, decorated by golden imprints that mimicked various plants. Jeskel made a quick motion with his staff and the door swung open, granting Jeskel and Nokhi an access to their dwelling. Carefully placed candles were keeping away the darkness, along with strong flames that danced in the fireplace. Countless books were piling up in every corner of this place, some of them neatly stored in various bookcases, but quite a lot of tomes that all had something to do with magic were just left lying around in a disorganized manner. Various other objects shared the same fate as books, not really having an assigned place and were just sitting wherever Jeskel or Nokhi had dropped them. This included different kinds of trinkets, skulls of small animals, jars that contained several strange contents ranging from body parts of mysterious beasts to weird liquids. All of these things together created a rather messy environment, but they also made it home for Jeskel and Nokhi. This was their little safe haven, a place where they could be themselves, not persecuted by the outside world. “You should warm up a little before heading to bed”, Jeskel said as he walked towards a desk that was almost completely hidden from view by stacks of books and parchments. He sat down on a chair and left his staff to lean against a wall. The man took a blank parchment and grabbed a quill, dipped it in an inkwell and started to scribble down what had happened that day and to document Nokhi's improvement. Meanwhile the boy was sitting on the floor by the comforting fire, his hands reaching for the flames, yearning for the warmth. After being out in such awful weather, the heat of the fire felt like a great blessing and indeed, Nokhi was grateful for having a warm shelter at that moment. It hadn't always been like this for him. If it wasn't for Jeskel, he would probably be in the streets getting utterly soaked, most likely then getting very ill. He hadn't gotten a great start for life, but he was getting in a better direction. For a moment the room was almost completely silent. The raindrops were heavily striking the windows, the flames were cracking in the fireplace and the quill's scratching on the parchment were the only sounds a human being could hear. At some point, Jeskel got a little distracted by a thought that crossed his mind and he stopped scribbling for a second. He gazed at the boy who was still enjoying the warmth of fire and he thought to himself how Nokhi's messy black hair reminded him of a raven. And just like a bird, the child had managed to soar. Then an idea struck the man's mind. “Nokhi, would you like to learn to fly?” Jeskel asked. Nokhi turned to look at his direction and Jeskel could see excitement sparkling in his eyes. “Really? You really could teach me that?” “Of course”, Jeskel responded, smiling at the boy. “And I think you will learn it in no time.” “Thank you, master Jeskel!” Nokhi's eagerness was something that just warmed Jeskel's soul. He was always ready to learn new things and he was always respectful. The man had found a great apprentice. “Well”, Jeskel said as he dipped his quill into the ink again, “I think you should go to sleep now.” “Yes, master Jeskel”, Nokhi replied and he raised his little body from the floor. The boy headed to his own living space, which was just a corner with a purple curtain serving as a door. It was small, but cozy and Jeskel had let him decorate it however he liked. “Good night, Nokhi”, Jeskel said as he began to scribble again. “Good night, master”, the boy answered and disappeared into his room. The man was left alone to write his thoughts down regarding the boy. He was impressed with his progress, especially when considering Nokhi's young age. The child had seen probably eleven summers. Jeskel himself hadn't been able to do half the things Nokhi already mastered in that age. And the little boy hadn't even known that he was bearing the gift of magic… In Jeskel's mind, it was truly fascinating to observe how the child's abilities kept growing stronger. There was no doubt about it, he could become an extraordinary individual if he continued to study magic. A moment passed by as Jeskel was scribbling his notes. The length of the scattered candles had shortened quite significantly when he was finally done. He put the quill down and stretched his arms a little as his position had been quite stiff. The man scratched his dark brown beard; though some of the hairs had already turned white. Unlike many other men of his age, he wasn't afraid of growing older, he was beyond that. While the ordinary men had to come in terms with their mortality, Jeskel was only thriving. One of the reasons was his apprentice; not even a single second of his time felt wasted as long as he was able to teach someone as special as Nokhi. Jeskel attempted to arrange his messy desk a little bit by stacking all the parchments he had written about his apprentice. They were the perfect record of the two years Jeskel had been teaching magic to the boy. Flipping through them was like diving back into the memories. And what a story these scribbles told… Jeskel placed the parchments as a neat stack on the desk. His gaze wandered to one of the windows and for a brief moment he just stared into the darkness, recalling back his earliest memories with Nokhi. They met each other by pure accident on the streets of a town. The boy hadn't had an easy childhood and it was pretty clear from the way he acted. Nokhi had told that his mother never wanted him and he had no idea who his father was. He had been on his own a couple of years living in the streets, just trying to live to see the next day. Nokhi had become distrustful towards people and arrogant as well. He didn't owe anything to anyone. But just by a mere glance, Jeskel could tell that the child was gifted; it was an instinct which common men didn't have. Of course, when the man had brought forth the idea of him teaching magic to the boy, Nokhi had just laughed at him, thinking that he was messing with him. However, after Jeskel had shown him a few simple tricks using magic and telling him that he could possibly do the same exact things, Nokhi suddenly became interested. Jeskel had then taken him to his tower; a place that was built on the same soil as the town, but it was concealed by magic so ordinary people couldn't see it. Following Nokhi's first visit to Jeskel's tower, the boy grew even more intrigued and soon began his apprenticeship. The crude shell Nokhi had put on in order to survive was shed after some time and he learned to be respectful towards his master. But Jeskel wasn't just a mentor, he had also become the father figure he had never had. The man had given him shelter, food and clean clothes and the boy had told him how grateful he was for that. It seemed like the little boy's life was finally starting. A smile spread on Jeskel's face. Truly, Nokhi was like a rare and spectacular flower, grown from a cursed soil. But despite his origins, one day he would bloom like no other and then the world would surely know his name. He just needed guidance and nurturing and of course, Jeskel saw himself as the right person for that task. The man would be the rain and the sun so the dark flower could flourish. He would make sure that the boy would learn to embrace his inner darkness and remain fearless in front of the black-hearted beings. In the following years, Nokhi would surely become one with the forces the common men misleadingly called wicked, and when he would take the dive into the depths of his dark powers and shatter the fragile border that lingered in between the being's consciousness and the hidden black part of the soul, that would ultimately become the day when the greatest mage in history would emerge from the shadows. And that was the day Jeskel wanted to see and experience. The boy just needed to be guided to the right path. Jeskel would make sure that it would happen. The man stood up. He grabbed his staff and slowly walked across the small living space. Just like Nokhi, he had his own slice of personal space as well, but unlike the boy's little corner, he had an actual room – even though it wasn't spacious, either. It was located right by Nokhi's quarters, the door to Jeskel's room was a couple of meters away from the curtain of the boy's living space. Once the man was by the black wooden door that guarded the access to his room, he could hear faint snoring coming from behind the curtain. The sound of a sleeping child… It was something Jeskel had got used to only recently. Jeskel waved his staff a little and in unison, all the candles got snuffed out and the flames in the fireplace simply vanished. All that was left were curls of smoke dancing in the dark air. The man opened the door to his little residence, then carefully shut it behind him as he didn't want to wake the boy. After all, he was still a little child. He needed his visits to the land of dreams. The time for tainting them with nightmares would come soon enough.trophyEndlesslyThe stars are falling from the sky and I do not know why; are they escaping the blackest void that has spread across the heavens or are they tired of shedding tears to the world below that is now full of misery? The sight of their departure is beautiful nonetheless and when I shift my gaze away from the heavens and look back at you, I can see how the starlight is reflected from your glazed eyes, your body motionless as you wait for the sign that makes our bodies move like puppets controlled by strings. It seems like tonight you do not remember our earliest memories; I can see it from the way you are looking at me. No matter how many times I experience it, it always feels like a stab to the heart. I do not know if it is better this way, I am being torn apart anyway. Either we both retain our memories and are forced to face each other in the battlefield or one of us does not remember the other and thus only sees an enemy that has to be defeated while the other one is suffering from an unbearable heartache no one should ever have to endure. It never gets easier. But this is how our lives are, this is how it has been for a thousand years. Everything around us is dead and still, we remain. The soil under our feet has been lifeless for centuries, completely dry and cracked and nothing can grow from it. There are a few dead trees standing, like dry corpses, their branches like the fingers of the deceased as they desperately reach for the uncaring sky, begging for something, a rain or a sunshine, that would rejuvenate their withered carcasses. But the heavens ignore their silent cries. The trees here are the last ones remaining of a beautiful landscape before the war destroyed and butchered it all. Now they are nothing more but mementos of the days when everything was well. Winds play with their branches, twisting them, clinging onto them like mischievous spirits, not letting their dried-up corpses rest in peace. Tonight, however, the winds are in a different kind of mood. They are blowing across the vast field of nothingness in an ominous way and I can hear them whispering. They want blood, they want misery. I do not know what kind of sadistic glee they will gain from what is about to transpire here, but they will get what they wished for. With the vile winds came legions of soldiers of the past, groups of people I have seen for the past thousand years, but whom I cannot remember anymore. In my eyes, their bodies are translucent and their facial features have been smudged like ink stains. I simply do not recognize who they are anymore. Perhaps that is how they perceive me, maybe I am like a ghost to them, too. We are all supposed to be dead and gone now, and yet, here we are. Legions of ghostly soldiers have gathered behind your back and without looking, I know that I have comrades behind my back as well. We are all standing here, silent and motionless, waiting for the sign. Soon it comes: a blast of an ancient horn rushes throughout the battlefield, reaching every corner. The battle will begin and troops of soldiers who have spent a thousand years fighting the same war over and over again are engaging in a conflict once more, and some of them have forgotten why they even are here and what they are fighting for. But I know that losing your memories completely will not give you salvation. A luxury like a free will is something we do not have. Countless times I have raised my weapon against you and it just keeps getting harder – except on those days when I do not remember you. I do not want to do this anymore! But no matter how much I have begged or demanded this to end, it never does. My body is moving on its own, swinging my weapon, causing pain to you and every time my blade cuts your flesh, it feels like I just got cut, too. I never wanted to be part of this war and neither did you. The ancient mad lords forced us into this; they called it a holy war that would purify the land. But which side was the wicked and which was the righteous? There was no answer to that to begin with, the lords just wanted an excuse to steal the lands from the other one. This never was a holy war; it was a cursed one. We are still here, in the middle of a senseless battle, and where are the lords now? Have they died or just abandoned us, forcing us to repeat the war endlessly, unable to break out of this cycle? Just like our memories, the battlefield itself is flickering. It is unstable, a lot like our minds, and is unable to stay in its current state. Like ripples in time, flashes of various shapes of the field are echoing from the past, not sure which form to take. We can see past battles through the flickering and we are dancing macabrely together with the ghosts of our former selves. We will keep fighting even when our bodies start to break down. When do we stop? I do not know. Maybe when all of it is too much for a mortal mind to take and we get consumed by madness. Maybe when the land tries to reset itself and as a byproduct, so do we. Or maybe when whoever is pulling the strings gets tired. It definitely is not death that grants us a moment of rest and soothes our restless and rotten souls. Ah, how I see death as a friend… However, I have come to the conclusion that the world will die before we do.trophyForgotten RelicsPeople said that there was something strange in the eastern woods. Something that didn't belong to this world, at least not anymore. Most folks who happened to traverse those parts caught an unnerving feeling, like there lingered a presence of something unexplainable. They weren't sure if it was malicious or not, but still, this mysterious presence stirred anxious feelings within people. And usually, everything that happened in the woods were just that, unsettling feelings, but no actual threat. But there had been records of people venturing into those woods, never to be seen again. They would just vanish without a single trace. It wasn't a common occurrence, fortunately, but still enough that all kinds of rumors and stories circulated around the settlements of this region. Maybe there was a monstrous creature that attacked people? Or was there a hideout of people who worshipped an evil god? Or perhaps, a living gate that led to other dimensions was wandering around the woods? Whatever people thought the explanation was, there was one eerie experience that linked all of them. Very faint whispers could be heard, and they have been described as haunting and as if whoever was making those whispers were in great distress. And yet, no one knows what they could mean or what happened in the woods in the first place that it had left behind such hauntings. Since the deal with the strange presence was usually harmless, not many had tried to investigate the matter; it was just treated as a spooky story that people used to playfully frighten each other. And so, year after year, the mystery of the woods remained the same. It was said that the last person who mysteriously disappeared in the woods was a little girl by the name Holliam. She went to the forest all by herself and never came back. It happened thirty years ago, but her parents were so devastated by this incident that nothing was able to bring comfort to their great sorrow and even after all these years, they mourned their missing daughter. Kimene and Amaru heard this story while visiting the little village of Sansere. It was one of the few small settlements where people knew about the mystery of the forest. And of course, hearing about it piqued Kimene's interest and would be perfect material for his book about folklore. He had been traveling with Amaru for quite a while and they had been collecting stories around the world together. They never knew where they would end up next or what kind of tales they would uncover, but that was part of the fun for their adventurous spirits. Even sinister rumors didn't scare them off, so hearing about a place in the woods where people had gone missing wasn't something they would be too scared to check out. In this case, it just fed their curiosity. The two travelers had decided to spend the night in Sansere and head out in the morning. The village had a nice and cozy little inn where they were able to rest. What they had learned during their adventures was that often the smallest settlements turned out to be very hospitable ones and that was true with Sansere as well. When they left the inn in the morning, a few folks were waving at them and wishing for safe journeys as they walked through the village, which did leave a warm feeling inside their hearts. The morning sun was still climbing its way to the sky when Kimene and Amaru disappeared into the world of shadows that just got born by the early light. The air had a fresh scent to it, morning dew still glimmering on the leaves of various plants. It seemed like the day was becoming a pleasant one, perfect for traveling. Days like this one were something both Kimene and Amaru enjoyed wholeheartedly, but often it was the simplest things that can bring joy to one's heart. Kimene and Amaru shared the view that a world is a beautiful and wondrous place and being able to exist in it, living through moments like this was one of the greatest blessings of all. Walking through a lush forest left them with a serene feeling and they were once again left in awe with how the golden sun sustained life all around them. It touched them spiritually, especially Amaru who happened to be a descendant of a shaman, and just sensing the vigor of all living things made them feel content. Neither of them knew how deep into the woods one had to venture before something unexplainable would occur. But it didn't matter that much, however, as they both took pleasure in just wandering around; reaching the destination wasn't always the most important thing. And so their day passed by, eventually turning into night, and so far it had been just an ordinary walk through the woods for them. As the gentle darkness veiled the world around them, Kimene and Amaru laid down in between the roots of a grand tree, embracing each other, sharing the warmth of their bodies. They rested pleasantly through the night and the calm forest slept peacefully with them. At dawn, the golden warm rays of the sun infiltrated through the branches of the trees, shining their life to the woods once more. These first beams of light of the day woke up the two travelers and as if greeting after not seeing each other for a long time, they shared a little kiss. Kimene and Amaru began their day with a brief breakfast and once they were done eating, they continued their journey. The start of this new day was just as pleasant as the previous one, and for some time, everything remained the same, the changeless serenity prevailed. It was approximately at noon when things started to gradually take a turn for something different. Just like usual, it was Amaru who was the first one to notice the subtle changes in the atmosphere, thanks to his connection with the spirit realm. Kimene, on the other hand, had learned to distinguish the moments when his partner would start to perceive things that were unseen by most. “What is it?” Kimene curiously asked while they continued to stroll forward, his eyes now fixed at his partner. “There are faint traces of spirit particles in the air”, Amaru informed his partner. “They aren't just scattered around; they are lingering in the air like a trail to somewhere. I think that if we follow them, we may find something.” The deer nodded. “Maybe they will lead us towards the mystery of the forest.” “Maybe”, Amaru replied. “But they're pretty hard to see, even for me. I have a hunch, though, that they'll become more clear when it's darker.” “I'm sure you can trace them just fine”, Kimene said, giving a look of adoration to his partner. “I'll try my best”, Amaru responded and offered a smile to Kimene. There was a change in the air now that they got their first clue that was taking them closer to the mystery of the woods; it was small evidence that there truly was some secret hidden within the forest. Both Kimene and Amaru felt an excited tension, eager to find out where exactly the spirit particles were leading to. They followed them all day and just like Amaru had guessed, they started to become more visible to him as the sunlight was slowly fading from the world. Kimene couldn't see them even when it was getting darker, but he trusted his partner would be guided by them as if there was a clearly lit path slithering through the woods. As the sun descended from the sky to slumber for the night, allowing the moon to take its turn in the heavens to shine its guiding light to the world, Kimene and Amaru started to experience the one thing they had expected to face when they had got signed up for this journey. It was the fabled whispers. At first, they were very faint, just like local people had told them. Amaru also noted that the whispers seemed to come from the same direction as to where the spirit particles were leading to. It appeared that these two phenomena were linked together. Neither of the travelers could understand what the whispers were exactly saying and they felt a little eerie. But were they a product of something malevolent? It didn't seem to be the case. There was this odd ring to them, it gave a sensation that they were something ancient, something that had existed in this world for far longer than anyone could remember. They were haunting, for sure, but it was like they were a remnant of a presence that was more powerful than any mortals could comprehend, something that naturally stirred the feeling of respect within common folks. This was true for Kimene and Amaru as well and as they continued to walk deeper into the eastern woods, they were enveloped by a solemn sensation, both staying quiet simply out of strange admiration they felt towards whatever resided in these woods. The deeper they went, the louder the whispers became, which seemed to be a sign that they were going in the correct direction. The air was rippling, a presence of something that was beyond their conception was practically ingrained to this part of the woods. At this point, both Kimene and Amaru were aware of the fact that they could be in the middle of a sequence that would make them disappear and they would become just a story to the locals of how they went to the forest, never to be seen again. But despite this, they continued to walk further, driven by their bottomless curiosity and will to learn the secrets of the woods. They kept going, feeling a weird pressure in the air, but none of these odd sensations caused them to back off. They were so close now, they could feel it. Oddly, something else started to resonate in the air along with the whispers. A deep humming voice, like a devoted prayer, could be heard. But it wasn't the only thing that reached Kimene and Amaru's ears, no, they could also hear something that was vastly different from all the other sounds they had been picking up during their latest bit of their journey. It was the singing voice of a girl, but it was free from the otherworldly echo that the rest of the sounds held. It was like it was coming out of the mouth of a mortal. Without exchanging words, Kimene and Amaru briefly looked at each other, both sharing the same thought that things were definitely getting more and more strange the further they ventured. And yet, they continued to keep going forward. Suddenly, they could see a spot ahead of them where there were no trees. Perhaps there was a clearing of some sort? They couldn't really see much of what lies beyond the tree line, because there was something weird, like a blue mist, shrouding the area ahead of them. It didn't have a sinister feeling to it, though, it felt holy if anything. This fact only encouraged Kimene and Amaru to keep going forward, although at this point they both were aware that there was no going back. They couldn't foresee what was waiting for them once they would step out of the shelter of trees, but they wanted to know the source of the voices they had been hearing, as well as finding out the mystery of the woods, so they prepared themselves, hearts beating fast from the tension, and they stepped inside the blue mist. The voices started to have a weird resonance to them once Kimene and Amaru were walking through the mist. They kept glancing around, trying to figure out where they had ended up. But the blueness, it hung around everything, this whole small world was enveloped by it. Kimene and Amaru couldn't see much, they could only follow the sounds and see where they were taking them. The grass beneath their feet was oddly green, it looked so pure, so luxuriant. It was a sign of a presence of something extraordinary, something that held the power of maintaining vigor all around it. This gave a sort of tranquil feeling to Kimene and Amaru and so they continued to traverse forward with no fear in their hearts. Eventually they could see a large dark form manifesting itself in the middle of the mist. Neither of them knew what it could be, but the sounds were coming from its direction. Kimene and Amaru walked towards it, and its form just continued to grow the closer they were getting to it. It seemed to be a tall building of some sort, desperately trying to reach for heaven. As Kimene and Amaru were approaching it, the clearer its features became; it resembled a tower, however, the upper part of it had collapsed and crumbled away a long time ago. Perhaps it had been grandeur back in the day it had been built, but now it was just a shadow of its former glory. And as Kimene and Amaru got closer and its form wasn't veiled by the mist anymore, they noticed how it was made of lavender stone, which was at the same time gorgeous and strange. Numerous divine figures were carved onto the stone and it felt like they were alive, protecting and looking over this place. The building was sacred and left Kimene and Amaru with the feeling of wonder and reverence. There were gaping holes on the walls as they had partly fallen apart. Through one of these wide openings, Kimene and Amaru could see a small figure that was sitting in the middle of the building. Once they were close enough, they could tell that it was a little wolf girl. She was singing – so this was one of the voices Kimene and Amaru had heard. But the humming noise, they couldn't see anyone who could be doing it, the little girl was alone. Or so they thought. The two travelers stepped inside the crumbled building, looking around with awe, noticing the beautiful mosaic on the floor, depicting many colorful entities. Even though the rest of the building had suffered in the hands of time, the floor was still in pristine condition. The little girl was at the center of it all, like an important part of a ceremony of some kind. As soon as she noticed Kimene and Amaru approaching her, her voice faded away and she curiously looked at them. Around the same time, the strange humming stopped as well. “Welcome, travelers.” The sudden disembodied voice resonated in the air and it sounded like the voice of someone ancient, someone who had been here in this plane of existence for far longer than mortal memory could remember. Kimene and Amaru were glancing around, trying to locate the source of the voice, but they saw no one. “Your confusion is understandable. But have no fear, I was not created to harm anyone. My existence has been a lonely one after the first gods left this world and I lay here, utterly forgotten by both deities and common men. Having the presence of a living being around me soothes my soul, and thus, I greet you with joy.” Was it the structure itself that was communicating with them? It seemed like that. “What is this place?” Amaru asked, both his and Kimene's gaze wandering around the building as if trying to pinpoint the exact location of where this sentient structure's soul was. “I am what is left of the old days when gods and mortals frequently held gatherings. This place – in other words, me – is where the gods and mortals used to communicate with each other. But over time, this connection was cut, and relics like me were left abandoned. I can only remain here, forgotten, and lament. Sometimes, a living being would make their way to this sacred ground and they would keep me company. Like this little girl here.” Kimene looked at the girl who had remained quiet after she stopped singing. He had just realized something. “Is your name Holliam?” he asked from the wolf. The girl nodded. “Yes.” Kimene was a little astounded by this. “We heard that you went missing thirty years ago… How is that possible?” “Time passes differently in this sacred ground. And unfortunately, I am incapable of knowing just how fast it has been fleeting. What has felt like a blink of an eye may be as long as mortal life. What feels like a night has passed may be just a short moment. To me, it seems like the girl has been here for just a couple of hours. I am deeply sorry that I have kept you here for so long. Please, travelers, guide her back home.” “We will”, Kimene responded. Though at the same time, he wondered just how much time had passed in their world now. It felt like they had been here just for a moment, but what if months had passed – or maybe even years? It caused a little bit of nervousness in him, but in the end, the only thing they could do was just to go back nonetheless. What a strange place this happened to be, he would definitely write a segment of it for his book. Then he got an idea. He looked up and said: “Uh, honorable entity of the relic? I think I have an idea that will make you less lonely. We just tell your story to the people and maybe more folks will visit you. You won't feel so abandoned and alone any longer.” “You are kind. That would bring me bliss. However, that same promise has been made by different mortals already.” “Well, I don't know what happened to them, but we will guarantee that you'll be known”, Kimene assured. “I trust your word. I wish you a safe journey.” “Come with us, sweetie”, Kimene said to Holliam and gently took a hold of her hand. Kimene, Amaru and Holliam started to slowly walk away from the ancient structure, Amaru at the front since he could follow the same trail left behind the spirit particles which had guided them in the first place. They traversed through the mist and it didn't take them long to reach the tree line. Step by step they were leaving the building farther behind, abandoning it like everything else in this world. But that was only momentary, because as a folklorist, Kimene was sure that he would let the story of this place be known. And perhaps, then the ancient structure didn't have to sing alone ever again.trophyA Filthy AnimalA hunger was ravaging his twisted soul. It was an odd, exceptional kind of hunger which Hollirix hadn't experienced in his previous life at all. No, it was something that had awakened inside him, perhaps as a punishment for his past sins, after he had died and went to hell, only to be sent back to the realm of mortals. Hollirix didn't quite remember what his previous life had been like, though sometimes he was blessed – or cursed – with flashing images of memories that apparently were stuck to his brain. But he was sure that the hunger that was now gnawing at him, wearing him down, was something he had started to suffer from only after he had gained a new body for his soul to dwell. It wasn't the flesh of other critters that he so much craved and it wasn't the pieces of plants that so selflessly offered parts of themselves to feed living beings. His hunger was something from a darker side, though it wasn't the souls he was after, nor was it blood. It was wickedness. Hollirix was ravenous for the evil that resided within other creatures and in some cases, inside some places as well. It would drive him mad and he would do absolutely anything to keep devouring that delicious malice. He would tear anyone apart, slaughter them, spill the blood, just to get his hands on the wicked energy. Why was he like this? He had no answer for that. Maybe whoever was responsible for returning him back to the realm of mortals thought it would be amusing that someone who had committed countless evil deeds in his life would now become a creature that had an insatiable appetite for wickedness. It was a constant state, he would never feel satisfied, he was condemned to keep looking for more malevolence to devour. This hunger was making him wander all around the world in search of people who carried an exceptional amount of malice in their souls – and lucky to Hollirix, the world was full of such people, plaguing the land wherever they made their nest. He would find them, he would kill them, and he would feast. Hollirix had done a lot journeying from place to place after the day when he had been spat out from the mouth of hell, driven by his hunger. His swift legs would carry him from town to town and wherever he would go, he would appear like a creature of bad omen. He had the form of a black fox with red blazing eyes that caused unnerving feelings to strike at anyone's heart who happened to meet their gaze. There was a pair of curved horns on his head and maybe their roots were deep down in his brain, straining his mind. But even without this characteristic, individuals who have died and turned back from hell probably weren't too sane to begin with. Though, in his opinion, he was free, although at the same time, he was restrained by the never-ending hunger, being a slave to this instinct that just continued to infest his head. One day, Hollirix had been lurking around a town that had a port. Sneakily he moved from shadow to shadow, carefully avoiding the light which the street lamps were shedding in order to vanquish the darkness of the night. It was really cold and snowflakes were falling down from the dark sky; the winter had arrived and there was a thin layer of snow veiling the town already. Hollirix couldn't recall if he had ever experienced winter, but he certainly didn't like it now. He surmised that it would only get worse. Traveling on foot to avoid the cold season of this northern region seemed like an option he wasn't too fond of. He figured that maybe he should board a ship that would sail to somewhere with more pleasant temperatures. Hollirix had been creeping around these parts for a while, so he had a clear picture of how to get to the port. He headed there, still as sneakily as he could, moving silently under the cover of darkness and the only sign of his presence were the footprints left on the freshly fallen snow by his paws, but probably people would assume that it had been just a dog that had traversed that path. The port wasn't as busy during the nighttime and most ships were still as if in slumber, their sails down like dark wings, involuntarily gathering snow on their bodies. Most people were indoors where it was warm, but Hollirix noticed that there were still some signs of life around the port. He stalked these few people carefully from the shadows, watching and listening. He thought that he would have to wait until morning before any of the ships would leave the port, but it seemed that he was in luck that night. He could hear a conversation between a sailor and a merchant that they should head out soon, to flee from the cold grasp of winter. This was exactly the opportunity Hollirix had been looking for. His whole focus was on these two men, he followed them from a distance so he could see which ship was theirs. They didn't notice the fox spying on them and eventually they made their way to their ship, generously showing Hollirix which vessel to infiltrate. It was a pretty average ship, nothing grandeur but not terrible, either. It looked like a merchant ship, so there was a big chance that it would travel somewhere in the south. This was the perfect chance for Hollirix. The fox waited patiently for the moment when he would sneak into the ship. Hiding among crates and barrels and ropes, the gaze of his red eyes was nailed at the wide plank sailors used to board the vessel. Hollirix needed only a short moment, just a few seconds when nobody would pay attention to the plank. And eventually, this chance came for the fox, just like he knew it would. He noticed it immediately, there was a short moment when everyone was on board and preparing for the voyage, there was no one near the accessing point. Hollirix sprinted towards the ship, moving as fast as if he were an arrow that had just been shot, and in no time he was on board and blending into the shadows once again. Nobody noticed that they had a stowaway hiding in the ship now, and so it would remain for the whole voyage. Hollirix hid himself deep inside the cargo hold, staying there patiently, out of the sight of people. The journey to different regions had begun and Hollirix was all ready to conquer the new lands beyond the sea. Time was fleeting in an odd manner for Hollirix. There was nothing but darkness surrounding him, he couldn't see how the sun would rise and set, how the night veiled the world or how the distant stars were shining their blessed light to guide the sailors. At times it felt like that time was passing very fast and he could hear the people on board doing their chores, only for them all to go silent like they had been up for just a moment. And then there were those days when he had a feeling that the time had almost completely stopped, crawling forward so painfully slowly. But Hollirix kept waiting. Patience was one of his very few virtues, so he remained concealed in the darkness of the cargo hold, his large pointy ears picking up nearly every sound the sailors made. He barely slept at all, he just waited for the moment when they would reach land once more. Hollirix didn't know how long they had sailed when one day he could sense something strange, something extraordinary, something… exciting. It didn't seem like they had come to the next port yet, they were still in the sea. But Hollirix could already tell they were getting closer to a place which held an enormous amount of dark energy, and not just one kind, there were many different flavors. The sound of how water splashed against the hull as the ship plowed through the waves was somewhat altered, Hollirix could hear very faint screams of agony. They were sailing on dark waters, he surmised. So many people had drowned around these parts, their spirits still lingering and desperately crying for help so they could be released from their perpetual torment. But no ordinary mortal could hear them, just Hollirix. Maybe he could do that because he had been to hell and maybe it was supposed to be one more curse to punish him for his sins. But he didn't have a single compassionate bone in his body, so he didn't care about the fate of those poor souls. Since Hollirix's perception of time was distorted, he wasn't aware of how much time had passed since they had reached the dark waters. But at some point, he could hear how people were making loud noises on the deck and barking orders, more than usual. Heavy footsteps were running around and it sounded like large objects were moved from place to place. Hollirix was listening to these noises with a great interest, because it seemed like they were getting ready to be docked. The fox was eager to see where they had travelled, he could finally leave behind the dark innards of the cargo hold. At this point he wasn't really concerned if somebody could see him, his little voyage on the sea ended here after all. He skittered through the cargo hold swiftly, stopping at the foot of stairs that led to upper levels. He was listening carefully, he wanted to know the exact moment when the ship would get to the pier. The sounds subsided. Maybe they were docked now. Hollirix took this as a sign that they had successfully made it to the port, so he ran the stairs up, all the way until he found himself from the deck he hadn't seen for who knows how long. The world around him was shrouded in blackness, which felt rather welcoming to him. He looked around the deck, seeing people committed to their individual tasks, and none of them had yet noticed his presence. Hollirix shifted his gaze towards the point where he had originally boarded the ship and noticed that the plank was in its place. He could get out now. He didn't waste any time, swiftly sprinting through the deck, earning a couple of surprised shouts when a pair of sailors saw him running out of the ship. But he was gone before they could do anything about it, they just had gained an image of a black fleeting shadow haunting their sleep. Hollirix was back at blending in with the shadows, they greeted him like an old friend even though they were unfamiliar. With his sharp senses he started to observe the new land where he had just arrived. The smells, the sounds and this unexplainable ill feeling that hung in the air… Hollirix was delighted and excited, it seemed he had found a new home. He could sense so much malice in this town, so much evil energy for him to devour. Like a predator he was, he started to sneak around this foreign place, to get himself acquainted with his new hunting ground. The dark time allowed him to get around unnoticed, even though there were street lamps with their feeble lights trying to cast away the darkness since humans were so uncomfortable with it, they were afraid of the darkness because monsters were hiding in there, although more often than not they were the monsters. Most could look in the mirror and not see a single trace of wickedness, but that was just because they were already too familiar with what the monster looked like. Still, the darkness was effective with keeping most of the folks indoors, sleeping and having nightmares or being wide awake, haunted by their sins. Hollirix didn't encounter many people as he strolled through the neatly paved streets, and those few whom he saw were lurkers just like him, moving with shadows and avoiding the light as if it could burst them into flames. Honoring a wordless agreement, they didn't bother each other and just went on their own ways. It had been so long since the last time Hollirix had eaten that it was hard for him to let people go, his everlasting hunger was gnawing at his mind more than usual. His disease-ridden brain was getting overwhelmed with this instinct and even though he had tried to get familiar with the town first before hunting, he had to succumb to his urges because the scent of dread was strong in the air. He unfortunately couldn't die from starvation, though maybe he thought it was a good thing. He could just go on and on without eating, but it would just drive him more mad and deprive him of the control of his own body. He wasn't at that point, yet, but the hunger was getting unbearable. He couldn't focus on exploring the town anymore, and he wondered why this craving had got so strong so suddenly. Maybe it was the strange atmosphere, maybe it wanted him to become just a ravenous beast. Well, he could always get familiar with the town later, he had all the time in the world, after all. But little did Hollirix know, he wasn't the only hunter in the town that night. He was creeping around the darkest corners of the streets as he moved forward in search of a suitable victim. Usually he would go after the most wicked people there were since they, naturally, satisfied his hunger more. That night, however, he felt like that almost anybody would do. Generally all the people held some amount of malice in their souls, so Hollirix could target pretty much anyone he wanted. Even if his next victim wasn't that malevolent, it would still make him feel better. He regretted a little bit that he had let go those few individuals he had met earlier, but in the end, it didn't matter that much; in a place like this, which was filled with wicked energy, he would surely find someone to devour. Hollirix was making his way through the town with a quick pace, he was just a shade or a black stripe that moved so fast he would be gone from the sight of people in a blink of an eye. However, he came to a sudden stop, his form completely revealed by a pallid street lamp and he stood still as if he had been nailed to his place. He had sensed something, something he hadn't encountered ever before, but which still was hauntingly familiar to him. His red eyes were fixed at the darkness in front of him and he could hear the sound of faint footsteps coming closer. A figure appeared from the shadows. A very handsome man, dressed in mostly blue lavish attire was walking along the street like he owned the place; he looked like a noble man and it wasn't the wisest thing for such a man to walk alone at nighttime. But looks can be deceiving. Hollirix could tell he wasn't an ordinary mortal. The elegant man in front of him was almost bursting with wicked energy, it was exciting for the fox, and almost maddening. There was a lot of evil in this man's soul, so much that Hollirix hadn't encountered anything like it during his second life as a fox. His senses were telling him to attack and yet, something was restraining him. He was stuck in a conflict between two desires, unsure what to do, which side to listen to. The mysterious man took a couple of more steps, but then stopped, measuring the black fox with his silvery eyes. Hollirix just stared back at him, trying to understand what was the deal with this man. “What a peculiar little creature you are”, the man spoke suddenly in a surprisingly soft tone. “Oh, my good sir, I am more peculiar than you think”, Hollirix responded, smirking a little bit. “And you are not just a man with a pretty face, either, I can tell.” The man chuckled slightly. “You are correct with that one.” Hollirix continued to look at the man's eyes with a piercing gaze, as if trying to see past the walls of his mind. His energy, it was something he had come across in the past, but he knew that he hadn't met this man before. For a moment Hollirix was trying to put together the pieces of this puzzle in his head, until finally, it dawned on him: the man carried the same evil power as the ancient vile monster known as Rak'kram. But Rak'kram was dead, Hollirix knew that because he had seen the monster's soul guarding the gates of hell; it had been so wicked that it had obtained such a position after its death. Somehow, this man now held the powers of Rak'kram and because of this, Hollirix saw him in a completely new light. Utterly intrigued, Hollirix said: “The power of Rak'kram is coursing in your dark veins, I can see that. But I am curious, how did you gain such a blessing?” “So you know about Rak'kram, huh…” The man looked at the fox suspiciously, even contemptuously. There was a look of disgust in his eyes. “Why would I spill knowledge of myself to a filthy animal like you?” “Ah, such harsh words”, Hollirix answered, shaking his head a little, but looked amused by what the man had just said. “I am simply… fascinated by you. You have a wicked heart. And I am a devourer of wicked entities. It is only natural that I am interested in you.” The man sneered. “Are you telling me that you are going to devour me?” “It is always a possibility, my good sir”, Hollirix replied, smirking. “But it would truly be a shame to extinguish such a brightly burning flame of malice… Beings like you leave a trail of misery behind them. And then there are individuals like me, who harvest that misery.” “In other words, you are just a vulture”, the man said, still looking at the fox like he was a filthy pest. “I shall not spare more of my time for you. Now, excuse me, but I have to go.” Hollirix didn't respond anything, he simply held his gaze at the man as he walked past him. He continued to watch at his receding figure until the darkness consumed him completely. Even after he was gone, the fox continued to stare at the spot where the man had disappeared. But he could still sense him. His scent, it was still lingering in the air and it was strong. It didn't really fade away at all, even though minutes were rapidly passing by and Hollirix still remained on his spot. Maybe it was the power of Rak'kram that was calling him, mocking him, enslaving him. It was like his brain had got adjusted to chase this scent, this evil energy. It was consuming Hollirix's mind, it became his obsession. He was grinning widely. No matter where the man would go, he could track him. He would watch him; he would follow the trail of blood he would leave behind. This man was destined for something grand, Hollirix was sure of it. And when that day would come, Hollirix would be the first witness. The fox moved finally. He went after the man, loyally like a shadow, trotting along the dark streets. He had a hunch that wherever the man was going that night, he could find something to satisfy his hunger simply by following his footsteps. Perhaps the man had been right; he truly was a vulture, a filthy animal.A Man In My Mirror - Chapter 2Chapter 2: Towards the Heaven The sky looked almost like it was in ablaze, painted skillfully by the greatest artist in existence. It was the time of the sunset and as Willett was watching that grand orb of light that brought life into the world simply by existing, he felt like that this was one of the most beautiful sunsets he had ever seen. Was it a sign of something significant, he wasn't sure. The moment felt mellow and his heart was filled with serenity that was somehow able to keep his anxious feelings at bay. Ever since the day when the Emperor of Celestial Beasts had chosen him and left the mark of a dragon on his face, his head had been infested with worrisome thoughts that no one else could understand. Except his friend Dahildi. She always seemed to grasp whatever was troubling his mind, which he was very grateful about. Sometimes Willett wondered how two human beings could have formed such a sturdy bond between each other; he had tried to comprehend it many times throughout the years, but always failed to understand. Often it felt like that he was closer to Dahildi than to any of his family members. She just understood him in a way no one else could. “Man, what a beautiful sunset”, Dahildi spoke as she dreamily stared into the horizon, swaying her legs a little bit. She and Willett were sitting on the edge of one of the castle's walls, side by side, contently watching how the sun was offering the world the last bits of its golden rays before going into slumber for the night. This had been their favorite spot ever since they were children. The magical sight in front of them never failed to amaze them, no matter how much older they were growing. Maybe they would come here to watch the sun set and rise even when they both would be old and wrinkly. Though this idea caused yet another ache to find its way into Willett's heart, because he didn't know what kind of turn his life would get once his apprenticeship in Heaven would be over. It would be painful to get separated from Dahildi, for sure. But he immediately pushed all the bad thoughts to deeper corners of his mind and let himself relax for a moment, being in this moment with Dahildi. “You know, Will…” There was a little bit of hesitation and shyness in her voice; she knew this wasn't a fun topic to talk about and she was aware that it would shatter the tranquility of the moment. “I'm really going to miss you. Like, a lot. You're my best friend, my partner in crime, my bro.” “Yeah…” Willett scratched the back of his head. “I'm going to miss you too, Hildi.” “Do you think we can keep in touch?” Dahildi asked quietly. “I mean, it would suck, like really suck, if you had to stay in Heaven for a decade and never hear anything about us, and we wouldn't know how you're doing.” Willet sighed. “I don't know… But it's surely going to be one of the first things I do, to check if it's possible to stay in contact with you guys.” It had been a little over two weeks since Willett had got his mark. During this time, as he had got over the first shock of being selected, he had started to accept that this was where the flow of life was taking him. It didn't sound as bad that he was going to attend Belstarr Academy as he had had some time to digest this idea. The uncertainty still plagued his mind, however, and probably would continue to do so for a while. It was hard to comprehend that someone like him was chosen. He decided to say it out loud to his friend. “You know, it's so weird that Emperor marked me. I'm just a simple guy with no talent in anything. Out there is plenty of other people who would be more suitable to go Belstarr Academy.” “Oh, Will…” Dahildi shook her head. “You're so dumb, for real. I wish you could see yourself the way I do. You're amazing and you have a big heart. You're making the world a better place simply by existing and honestly, I think that once you get your magical abilities, the world will be even more grateful that you're in it. I believe, from the bottom of my heart, that the Emperor saw all the potential hiding within you. You may think now that you're not good at anything particular, but who knows, maybe you're destined to become a great mage! Trust me, Will, I think Belstarr Academy will do good for you.” “Wow…” That was all Willett managed to get out of his mouth. Dahildi had done it again, making him feel better about himself. “Maybe you're right. Thanks, Hildi.” Dahildi wrapped her arm around him and partly hugged him. “You're welcome, buddy.” A wide smile spread on Willett's face. “I'm glad you're part of my life.” “Hey, you're the one who invited me to it!” Dahildi exclaimed and ruffled his already messy hair. Dahildi's family came from a faraway place, searching for a better place to live. Drought and famine had forced them out of their homeland and eventually they had found their way to Swarrendel. They didn't intend to stay long, but they kept postponing their departure until they one day realized that they should as well make Swarrendel their new home. It was a small quiet place, which they found appealing. Dahildi and Willett had been little children at that time, neither of them had seen ten summers yet. Coincidentally, they had met on the streets of Swarrendel when Dahildi had gone out to search for other children to play with. She had then encountered Willett who had been hanging out with a small group of other kids, and of course, they had invited her to play with them. They had been having so much fun that they continued to play with each other day after day and this really had helped Dahildi to get acquainted with her new hometown. She and Willett grew exceptionally fond of each other over time and they began to hang around more, just the two of them, and their friendship just kept flourishing over the years. Eventually the friendship with other children of Swarrendel faded away as they grew up, but the bond between Willett and Dahildi never faltered. From the bottom of his heart, Willett hoped that their friendship would survive even his apprenticeship in Heaven. Though, now that he was thinking about it, he was sure it would last; it was silly to even think otherwise. It had been proved time and time again throughout the years that their bond was stronger than anything else he knew. Willett wrapped his arm around Dahildi as well and together they remained there, sitting side by side on the wall, staring at the beautiful sky. They didn't speak anything for a while, they simply enjoyed their shared moment together, because it was uncertain when they could be doing this again. Would he see the same sun in Heaven, Willett wondered at that moment. In any case, he would find a place where to gaze at that golden orb and hope that Dahildi would do the same at the same exact time, and perhaps, they could feel connected that way. Maybe he wouldn't feel alone in a strange place if they could do that. Days were slowly passing by, but everything seemed to stay normal, like Willett hadn't even experienced anything that had changed his life for the next ten years. His everyday life continued to flow as usual, he still served princess Rysara and spent time with Dahildi and his family. Strangers on the streets of Swarrendel weren't giving him that much looks anymore because of the mark of the dragon, either, they had got accustomed to seeing his face. Occasionally people were still curiously looking at him, but the amount had decreased significantly. Everything appeared so ordinary that it was strange. Willett wasn't sure what to think about it. But he allowed himself to enjoy his regular life, because he knew that it wouldn't last for long. He wasn't knowledgeable about the process of how he would get to Heaven or when. It was giving him a little bit of more anxiety, because not being aware of what you're supposed to do was something he considered dreadful. Nobody could help to ease his mind, either. Swarrendel was a simple settlement filled with simple and humble folks who weren't well-informed with matters other than their own expertise. It was likely that no one from Swarrendel had been chosen by the Emperor before Willett, so naturally, no one knew what it was like when you got the chance to see the land of Celestial Beasts. No one could help Willett get prepared for what was about to come. He had no choice but to live in uncertainty. But things have the tendency to turn out alright in a way or another, and so it happened one night that Willett got some peace for his anxious mind. He had gone to bed after a long day just like usual, and soon after his head had hit the pillow he drifted to sleep. His subconscious mind had conjured up a strange dream sequence, but it was nothing out of ordinary. But at some point during the night, something else replaced his weird chaotic dreams, something that felt like a dream, but definitely wasn't. He could see a pure white rabbit-like creature, surrounded by purple haze, and somehow it felt like this was a window to another place in existence, it wasn't fabricated by his subconsciousness, no, it felt like he was wide awake and experiencing this moment for real. Then the rabbit started to speak to him with a beautiful and resonant voice: “Greetings, Willett. I am here to let you know that soon you will be transported to Heaven since you have been chosen by our Emperor to attend in Belstarr Academy. Exactly one week from now on, in the afternoon, head to the center of Swarrendel. You will get to ascend Heaven with one of us. We will look forward seeing you and we will offer you guidance once you reach the grounds of our academy. Goodbye, for now.” For the rest of the night, Willett continued to see his regular dreams that made no sense at all. When he woke up the next morning, he had forgotten all about his weird adventures in the dreamland. But the words of the rabbit had stuck to his head, like they had been carved into his brain, and thus being impossible to just wash away by awaken consciousness, the fate regular dreams had to face. Willett scratched his head a little bit, repeating the words he had received last night in his head. Somehow, the rabbit appearing to him while he was sleeping made the deal with being chosen to Belstarr Academy more real. Now that he knew he would be leaving Earth behind in a week, he could feel an uncomfortable lump in his stomach; partly it was because soon he had to say goodbye to his family and Dahildi, and partly it was this strange anticipation he had started to feel as his curiosity towards Heaven had grown. Willett got out of his bed, stretching his limbs a little bit. He glanced towards the window in his room, noting that it was a cloudy day. Maybe it will rain later. He started to get prepared for the day; washed his face, put more suitable clothes on, and then headed out of his room, taking the stairs to reach the lower floor of his home. He had some news to tell his family. It was common that his family had gathered in the kitchen area before him and this day wasn't an exception. There they were, all three of them, eating breakfast and chattering cheerfully. As Willett's family noticed him coming down the stairs, his mother Hanalera got up from her seat in order to pour some hot tea for him. Meanwhile Willett made his way to the table and sat down to join the family's breakfast. “Here you go, dear”, his mother said as she placed a cup full of hot tea in front of him. She also gave him a slice of bread with some cheese; the bread was freshly baked, Willett noticed and enjoyed this little joy of life. “Thanks, mom”, Willett said and started eating. He decided that he would let everyone finish their breakfast before bringing up the news he had in mind. He remained quiet while his parents were discussing something about a threat of bandits that have been terrorizing the roads near a neighboring town, pondering whether they had a reason to be worried. Willett was only half listening to their talk, finishing eating his bread while his parents continued to have this conversation about the same topic, and occasionally he would sip his tea as he waited for the perfect opportunity to talk about the message he had got from Celestial Beasts in his dream. Mioran was being her annoying self and was rocking her seat, though she stopped doing that once their father snapped at her. Then she just got settled with just humming something out of tune and swayed her legs, occasionally kicking Willett who tried his best to not pay attention to his sister's irritating behavior. Eventually it seemed like his parents were done with their conversation. Hanalera had started to clean the table when Willett decided that now was the time. “Um, mom, dad…” Then he glanced at his sister. “Mioran. I have something important to tell you.” “Yes, dear?” Hanalera said, still immersed in her task. Willett took a deep breath. He had to say it now. “I know now when I'll be leaving.” It felt strange to say those words aloud. It was like they didn't belong to his mouth to begin with. Hanalera stopped what she was doing and now the eyes of all of Willett's family members were on him. It was almost like his words had frozen time. His father Ranoswan was the first one to find his voice. “Oh? That is… good to hear. When will that be?” “In a week. I… I got a message of some sort in my dream. A Celestial Beast told me that I'll be fetched by one of them in a week.” Everyone remained silent again, Willett's family trying to digest the information they had just received. Of course they had been aware that this would happen eventually, but sometimes, even if you've been having time to prepare for something, it still manages to hit your face. Now that they knew when he'll be leaving, it somehow made the situation feel more true, that their beloved Willett was really about to depart Earth and they probably wouldn't see each other for a long time. But Willett's parents were also aware that although their son would be gone from home for a long period of time, this was also a happy thing to happen. Their faces got decorated with joyful and warm smiles as they looked at their son, being genuinely proud of him. And in that moment, their smiles were something Willett really needed and he smiled back. Mioran wasn't really comprehending the ongoing situation – maybe she was too young for that – and just resumed being an annoyance with her chair. But Willett had a hunch that once he would leave, she would miss him too, probably annoying their parents with questions about where her big brother was and when he would come home. Oh, how he loved his family. He would truly miss them in Heaven. The following week felt strange. At first, everything seemed like nothing was out of ordinary, Willett's life just continued like usual. He hadn't really internalized that he would leave it all behind in a week. But nonetheless, he tried his best to spend as much time as possible with his family and Dahildi, since who knows when they would be allowed to do that again. The time seemed to march forward slowly, each day feeling longer than the last one. And as the days passed by, a lump made of nervousness kept growing in Willett's stomach. It probably was normal, he had tried to reason with himself, and that other people attending the academy would feel the same way as he did. So he had tried his best to ignore it and just enjoy his last days on Earth, shoving aside any negative emotions. Then the inevitable came: the day of his departure. The dreaded day when everything would change. It was afternoon when Willett was anxiously standing at the center of his hometown. His whole family had gathered there, as well as Dahildi. Willett's eyes wandered all around that part of Swarrendel, as if he tried to memorize every little detail. He gazed at the beautiful fountain that decorated the very center of the town, the streets paved with stone that were a little uneven in some places and being like that made them perfect in an imperfect way, and all the houses that were cozy little homes for ordinary families like his one. He really started to feel sentimental at that moment and he took deep breaths, just to breathe in that clean air of his home. The minutes were passing, but nothing was happening yet, which only made Willett feel more anxious. Prolonging this just caused more misery to him. “Look!” Mioran then suddenly exclaimed and pointed her finger at the sky. “In the air! Something is coming!” Everyone's attention shifted at the sky, to look at the direction where Mioran was pointing. Something was indeed coming. It looked like a dark being with a long body, but it was impossible to tell from a distance what it actually was. It was flying effortlessly and with a high speed and it was clear that it was coming towards Swarrendel. Nobody said anything as everyone was focused on trying to identify the flying creature. But as it came closer, eventually Willett's eyes managed to distinguish what the being was. It was a dragon, covered in dark scales that were shimmering with the light of the afternoon sun, making it seem like rainbows were dancing on those scales. It had a long serpent-like body and light blue mane and tufts in some places of its body and it carried antlers on its head. Willett realized that this dragon resembled a lot like the legendary Emperor of Celestial Beasts, however, this individual wasn't quite as magnificent – if Willett remembered correctly, for he had seen a picture of the Emperor in a book a long time ago. But still, this dragon was gorgeous as well and perhaps the most incredible thing that had ever made its way to the humble settlement of Swarrendel. The Celestial Beast was lowering its altitude as its flight was nearing end. When it was gliding above the houses of Swarrendel, it gained quite a lot of curious and bewildered looks from the people, which wasn't surprising, considering that they had never witnessed anything like this in their lives. A stream of people followed the dragon to the town center, wanting to take a better look at this mysterious creature. Soon there was a crowd of people gathered at the center and Willett and his group weren't the only ones standing there anymore. The dragon made a few twists and turns in the air elegantly, then descending on the ground very softly. The folks who were at the center at that moment gasped in delight and whispered something between each other. The dragon didn't seem bothered by this by any means. It just shifted its gaze towards Willett, and he noticed it had very bright green eyes and as it stared at him, he got a feeling that the Celestial Beast was seeing something inside him, something he – or any other human – couldn't see. “You must be Willett”, the dragon spoke, its voice sounding something a most beautiful maiden would have. “As you know, I am here to take you to Heaven. My name is Adelvia. It is a pleasure to meet you.” Willett felt extremely nervous. This was it. This was the moment when he would leave everything familiar and what he loved behind, jumping to the uncertain future which he had no idea what it would be like. He gulped a little. “Can I… Can I leave my goodbyes?” Adelvia nodded, tenderness sparkling in those green eyes. “Of course.” Willett turned around to face his family and Dahildi. He spread his arms as widely as he could and stepped towards those people he loved more than anything else in this world. He and his family and his best friend gathered into a big pile of hugs, holding Willett tightly at the center. He hoped that the love he felt towards them during this short-lived gesture would flow into their hearts and they could hold it close and remember how much he cared about them, even though he would be far away. “I love you all so much”, he said with a quiet voice, but the words were strong. “I'm going to miss you all. Yes, even you, Mioran.” “And we all love and miss you too, sweetie”, Hanalera said and squeezed her son tightly. Then she put her hands on his shoulders, smiling gently. “Please, take care of yourself, okay?” Willett nodded slightly, and he knew that his tears weren't far behind. “I will, mom.” As his mother retreated a little bit, Dahildi then stepped forward and playfully punched Willett to his arm. “I'm sure you'll be fine. But still, promise me that you will come back as a great mage, okay bro?” “You bet”, Willett responded. “You'll be the first one to know.” “That's another promise you have to keep”, Dahildi said, laughing a little bit. “But seriously, I wish you all the good luck there is!” Next Willett turned to face his father. He was wearing a smile on his face as well, but Willett could see some sadness hiding in his eyes. He gave a few pats to Willett's back and said: “I love you, son. Don't forget that. If you're ever having a tough time, just think about us. We'll be here for you.” “Thanks, dad”, Willett spoke quietly. “I love you too.” The last one left was Mioran. But at that moment, she seemed more interested in Adelvia, perhaps thinking could she pet the dragon. Mioran wasn't really paying attention to the emotional situation going on, she just stared with big curious eyes at the Celestial Beast. Of course she would be more interested in a strange creature that had just come out of the sky rather than focus on the boring farewells her family was having. But that's just how she was… It really warmed Willett's heart and his smile grew wider as he looked at his little sister. When he would see her the next time, she would be an adult woman… It was a strange thought. “Take care, Mio”, Willett said to her and ruffled her hair. “Look after mom and dad for me, okay?” “Yeah, yeah”, Mioran replied, pretty much brushing aside what he had said, for she was still more interested in the dragon. Willett shook his head a little bit. Surely she would miss him when he was gone. Willett turned around to face Adelvia. He had said his goodbyes, there was no reason to prolong this anymore. He stepped closer to the Celestial Beast, at the same time stepping away from his loved ones. “Do not worry, I will not let you fall”, Adelvia reassured him. “Just grasp my antlers.” A little hesitantly and awkwardly Willett climbed onto the Celestial Beasts back and with stiff hands he took a hold of Adelvia's antlers, just like he had been instructed. He had no idea what flying would feel like – most people didn't know that, anyway – but while he wasn't particularly afraid of heights, he still felt terrified at that moment. “Ready to go?” Adelvia asked him. “Y-yeah”, Willett stuttered a little bit. “Here we go.” Adelvia leapt forward slightly, and glided above Willett's family and Dahildi, then the dragon turned around and started to fly in the opposite direction instead. Willett dared to peek over his shoulder and saw that his family and Dahildi were waving at him. However, they weren't the only ones; some other folks of Swarrendel were waving their hands as well. It gave Willett a bit of an odd, but pleasant feeling. He felt how Adelvia was starting to build more speed and he set his gaze forward and was clinging onto the Celestial Beast like a stubborn burdock. He was on his way to Belstarr Academy. He would soon see what Heaven was like. But the tears he had held back earlier started to stain his face. He was flying towards his future, but for that, he had to leave his loved ones behind. However the gentle wind caressed his cheeks, wiping the tears away. Because he knew that in his heart, he could always hold them close to him, no matter how far away he would be.Raise Your Brushes!Somewhere beyond the bounds of a human mind exists a land of imagination. It's easy to access, and yet, there are many who have never entered its miraculous lands. Only the masters of creation can dwell inside this realm, and to a lot of people it is better than their home world. It brings happiness and being part of it tends to give a sense of belonging to somewhere, something that's not necessarily available to them in the home world. This land is where everything people have imagined will come to life and each has their own story to tell. It's a place where inspiration flows in the air endlessly, blowing through the realm like a tender breeze, from mountains to forests, from deserts to settlements and from seas to stars. Our minds are connected here and passion for creation is burning inside our hearts. It's up to us to fill the void with ideas and share them with each other so we can enjoy our time here even more. Let the brushes be guided by our imagination, let them form words and paint pictures that we desperately want to get out of our minds so they could maybe spark inspiration within others. It's the season of the bright sun and how it smiles for us in the sky. But it's also the time for a very extraordinary event in the land of imagination. It's something that occurs once in a year and it excites the creators and the thrill and inspiration can almost be felt in the air. I am just a bystander here, but with utmost curiosity I will watch from the side how others will join the fun and bring delight feelings to each other. This moment has been awaited for a while and finally its time has come. I am walking away from a small settlement. I can feel the excited tension in the air, even when I began to stroll towards the white sand beach. The wind is blowing, scattering joyful messages wherever there is somebody to hear them and as I feel it touch my skin and play with my hair, I get an impression that it's thrilled as well. It has blown aside all the clouds in the sky and although it isn't late yet, an ocean of stars is hanging above the world, holding a deep color of purple and all the twinkling stars are shining brighter than ever. It's a clear sign that something wonderful is going to happen. The soft green grass beneath my feet is billowing in the wind and I think they are just as ready to witness something remarkable to happen as I am. Eventually I make it to the beach, the grass underneath my feet turning into sand, and my footprints are leaving marks on it as I keep getting closer to the body of water. The waves are playfully crashing against the shore and I know that they are going to have their part in this event. I can see some birds, all of them having a stunning plumage – somebody has truly done a magnificent job creating them – as if they are waiting for something grandeur to occur as well. They are singing with beautiful voices and the winds sing with them. Other people have gathered at the beach as well. Excited murmuring, laughter and cheerful chattering are filling the air. I think it's quite magical how an event like this would bring such a large number of people together, just to make each other happy. Sometimes we forget how lovely people – even strangers – can be. Everyone and everything is waiting – and we're all ready. Then the long-waited magic starts to happen. I can see the change in water occurring first. The seafoam in the gorgeous green water which the waves are gently pushing towards the shore is starting to look for a different form, to make an entity. Slowly but majestically the water begins to rise together with the seafoam, embracing each other and it seems like they're sculpting a statue. However, this creation is very much alive and even before it has managed to make its form complete, it's moving around, swaying from side to side. And soon it has taken the desired shape, revealing a form of a humanoid lady, having gentle facial features, carefully molded by water and seafoam. She looked at the purple sky above us, waiting for something else to happen, because one guest of honor hadn't appeared yet. But we didn't have to wait for long for her appearance. A few of the brilliant stars that were sparkling like diamonds fell from their place as shooting stars. A cloud of stardust started to gather around, swirling like a whirlpool in heaven. And just like the seafoam earlier, it was seeking for a different form, to manifest itself onto this world that had waited for her appearance. And somewhere from the vortex of sparkling stardust emerged another entity, gliding in the sky and bits of stardust would sprinkle from her dress as she moved. Now that they both are here, it officially marks the beginning of this event. The both entities, the one who came from seafoam and the one who came from stardust, they both raised their brushes to the air, signaling to the gathered crowd to follow their example. And so they did, countless artists raised their own brushes to the air as well and magical energy would light up their tools of creation. Some brushes started to glow in green and some in purple light. It was an indicator of how some of the people would feel pulled to the sea, and others for the stars. The tension in the air had probably intensified after the revelation of the two entities, but soon they were gone, the one in the sky turning into stardust and the one in the sea became just seafoam again. But they left behind inspiration and joy of creation and these sensations would stay for a while and guide the brushes of artists. Everyone would then scatter around and go to wherever they wanted; maybe in their little dens where they would do their magic or maybe to some relaxing place where they can feel at ease for first before engaging in the game they have wanted to partake in. I'm just lingering around, following my own individual path, but at the same time, I keep a watchful and curious eye on what the others around me are doing. And oh, I can see so much enjoyment all around me! I can see how people are breathing life into various creatures that originally came from the mind of a fellow creator. They are filling this realm of imagination with beings that can run through the vast plains, wander in the mysterious forests, explore the deepest and most secret depths of the sea, soar in the skies and dance among the clouds and hide in the darkest of shadows, not necessarily having good intentions in mind. The cast of characters is huge and during this time of the year, this place is their stage, because they are the true stars of this show. And somehow our world of imagination feels more vibrant now. The colors around us, they're so bright, it's like they've been painted to better accommodate the creatures of our minds. It's beautiful, even magical. I enjoy my strolls throughout the realm wholeheartedly and everywhere I look I can see pieces of magnificent art. It doesn't matter which side you are on – whether you draw your inspiration from the foam of the sea or from the dust of stars – for the pure enjoyment of gifting your fellow creators with what you have made for them is a delightful thing. The game is fun, but the most important part is how you can bring tiny bits of happiness. So let your brushes paint on the canvas with joy! May the seafoam or stardust be your ink which will grant you the ability to conjure up beautiful works of art. And your passion for art that resides deep in your heart, let it show and keep creating so you can make someone smile today. That itself is a win. I hope from the bottom of my heart that your inspiration will flourish and it will last throughout the entire month when brushes work hard, not just for their own enjoyment, but to bring happiness for everyone.trophyWhere The Heroes SleepEllen woke up as usual; well rested and ready for her duty. She got her body up and swung her thin legs over the edge of her bed and stretched all four of her arms. Yawning a little bit, she then got on her feet and walked across her cozy small home to a stand that had a bowl of water placed on it. She washed her fairy-like face and moistened a few parts of her green body as well; water felt so nice and refreshing on her body that resembled a plant. While she was invigorating herself, she could hear the quiet squeaking of the mice coming from some dark corner of her home. They were hungry, she assumed. And as soon as she was finished, she stepped towards a table that was standing next to a small window. She had a block of cheese waiting on the table and she cut a few pieces from it for her little friends. Ellen crouched down and four mice skittered across the floor towards her and none of them had eyes. She offered the pieces of cheese for them and the little rodents accepted them happily. Ellen had no idea where these mice had come from or the magical block of cheese that would replenish itself every now and then, but she was happy that the little critters had somehow managed to sneak into this dimension. After Ellen had fed her small companions, she stood up again and gave a quick glance at the window. It was offering the same view as always, an endless meadow filled with sunflowers basking in the sun that never rested. Then Ellen let her gaze wander around her home for a brief moment, for she enjoyed admiring her little treasures before heading out. If a human had seen this collection of various objects hanging on the walls and from the ceiling, they probably would think that it was just a bunch of trash that had no value. But to Ellen, they were more valuable than the riches humans felt greedy about. To Ellen, these pieces of treasures – whether it was a stuffed animal, a comb, a flute or a pocket mirror – they presented a life of somebody, they held individual stories within them and carried such sentimental value that no money could ever possibly achieve. They were glimpses of untold tales and that was why Ellen would pick up these items whenever she would find one, so these stories wouldn't be completely forgotten because at least one person would cherish them. It was time for Ellen to head out and do her duty. With her light steps she walked to the door and as soon as she opened it, a flood of warm light infiltrated inside. She stepped outside and closed the door behind her, leaving temporarily her mice friends and the collection of treasures. Her little cabin was located in the middle of a sunflower field that seemed endless. No matter which direction she would look, the sea of flowers would reach all the way to the distant horizon. There were no trees, no other buildings… nothing. It was just her and the sunflowers. And above this endless field was a red sky, a sky that had witnessed so much death and destruction that it had dyed it crimson. On some days it would be blood red as the grudge of spirits would rise higher, but sometimes it had a lighter color, just like that day. Now it was pleasantly orange; it seemed that the spirits were in a good mood today. That was a good sign. Ellen took her first steps to walk among the flowers and started to patrol the field, just like every other day. Of course, she couldn't really tell if a day had passed or not. The sky was always red or orange and the sun would never set, it would continuously shine and bring warmth to the flowers that reached for the sky, but were condemned to stay on the ground. Sometimes it felt like that time had completely stopped in this dimension, but occasionally Ellen would meet some lost soul that had accidentally traveled to this place, and that would serve as a reminder that time was fleeting even here. Every now and then she would also find little objects, like the ones that she had put on display in her cabin, as they would spontaneously appear from other realities to this one. The manifestation of these treasures was a hint that time was marching forward even if it sometimes seemed that it was standing still. One could think that Ellen was a lonely individual, her only friends being the mice in the cabin and the only interactions with other sentient creatures were with the ones who had accidentally traveled to her dimension. But that wasn't exactly true. The sunflowers here weren't just plants, they were souls of the dead that had just taken a different form, not by choice but because that was the will of gods. They were war heroes, martyrs and other people who had sacrificed themselves for the greater good. Originally this dimension was created for those who had fallen in an ancient war that wiped out an entire civilization. But later on, other brave souls were able to bloom in this place as well, coming from many different worlds. Here, they can rest in peace in the form of a sunflower that will never wither away and will be blessed and nourished by a sun that will soothe them infinitely. Ellen will take care of the resting souls; this duty has been bestowed to her since ancient times. Although the souls are mostly slumbering in their comfortable eternal sleep, sometimes they will get disturbed. As Ellen was slowly walking among the flowers, she spotted one that required her attention. In their normal state the sunflowers appeared as regular plants, but when they start to get unstable, a silvery swirl would appear in the air on top of them and from the center of the flower, the face which they had while alive would emerge and attempt to leave their floral form. Often it was because in their dreams, they could see something that makes them want to go back to their home world, such as seeing their loved ones in great distress or that a massive destruction had struck their land and they want to help get things back in order. This particular soul flower had seen that his beloved husband had fallen ill, and so severe was the sickness that it was threatening his life. Of course this soul wanted to go and help him, not really being aware of the fact that he was dead – he had come to this dimension just recently. Ellen came to the flower and gently took a hold of it, caressing it tenderly as if it was her child. She started to whisper words of an ancient language no mortal remembered, and although her words were quiet, they held great power in them. And in a short moment, the soul had calmed down and its form got reduced back to an ordinary sunflower. Ellen knew that his husband would join him soon and then they could bloom together side by side for all eternity. As a very old being that had dwelled in this dimension since its creation, Ellen knew the story of every soul that had come here for their eternal rest. She could look at any sunflower and then she would be immediately able to tell what their life was like. To most who had visited the endless field, all the flowers looked exactly the same, but Ellen was capable of distinguishing them from each other. It was an important part of her work, because if a shepherd of souls can't tell that each is unique, what kind of caretaker would that be? Some of these souls had been here for thousands of years, which means that most of them had been forgotten by time in their home worlds, for the mortal memory was unfortunately a short one. But here was somebody who could remember all their grand deeds and achievements and their life, and Ellen would never forget such things, even if the souls themselves were unable to remember. Ellen was whistling a soothing song which she had learned from one of the souls as she continued to stroll among the sunflowers. It summoned a gentle breeze that tenderly rocked the flowers and Ellen was certain that she could hear faint singing as the souls joined in her song. It warmed her heart a little. But then she could perceive a different kind of sound, something that didn't really belong to these fields; a sound of a bell. Curious to find out what was the cause of the unfamiliar noise, she stopped whistling and headed to the direction where the chime was coming from. She found a little owl that seemed completely bewildered – she was just another dimension traveler that had accidentally entered this plane of existence, Ellen assumed. She had a bell hanging from her necklace, so now Ellen knew where the sound had been coming from. The owl was carrying a backpack and she had this mysterious shimmer glowing in her pure feathers which Ellen really admired. “Oh, hello there!” Ellen chirped in a friendly manner and smiled at the owl. “It has been a while since the last time someone visited here. May I get your name?” Still perplexed, the owl looked around before answering. “I, um… I'm Mia. It seems that my calculations went a bit wrong… Where am I?” “This place has no name”, Ellen replied. “This dimension is the resting place of fallen heroes. I'm Ellen, the one who takes care of the souls that end up here.” Ellen tilted her head a little. “You're not the first one who enters this dimension by accident. And you're definitely not going to be the last, either.” Mia nodded repeatedly as she was listening to Ellen's words. Then she looked around some more, however this time she didn't seem as lost and was admiring her surroundings instead. “This feels like a nice place”, Mia commented. “It's pleasantly warm and the sky is beautiful and I sense serenity which I haven't felt ever before.” She probably wanted to take a better look and got on her wings, rising up to the air above the flowers and fluttered on that height for a little while, letting her gaze wander around the unfamiliar world. Ellen followed for a moment how Mia was enjoying the view, but eventually she opened her mouth to speak again: “Well, Mia, I can help you get out of this place. At least I assume that you don't want to linger here?” “I'm in no rush”, Mia responded and then shifted the gaze of her big eyes at Ellen. “I'd like to know more about this world! If I can have a moment with you, that is.” “Of course, I don't mind!” Even though Ellen wasn't exactly a lonely person, she really enjoyed it whenever she could spend time with somebody, so she was happy that Mia wanted to stay for a while. “Sorry if I'm being too nosy here”, Mia apologized, “but I'm very curious about different dimensions. In fact, I'm making a book that covers the subject! I could write a chapter about this place.” “Then I'll give you all the information you want to hear”, Ellen said and then she pointed in the direction of her cabin. “See that cabin over there? That's my home. May I invite you to come over? We can discuss things over a cup of tea.” “Sounds good to me”, Mia consented. Ellen started to walk towards the cabin and Mia followed by fluttering around her. Even though it looked like there was quite a lot of distance, it didn't take them for long to reach the building, which baffled Mia a little bit. But crossing long distances with ease was something Ellen was capable of doing, it was a very useful ability to have for someone who had to take care of an endless sunflower field. Once they were standing by the cabin, Mia inspected its simple form with curious eyes. “Looks cozy”, she commented. “Thank you”, Ellen answered and opened the door to her humble little home. Mia had decided to land – it would be rude to fly around someone's home, after all – and she was struck with awe upon the first glimpse she got of Ellen's home. The treasures she had collected were precious in her eyes as well and Ellen was pleased with her reaction. They weren't pieces of trash to her, either. “Please, take a seat”, Ellen gestured at the table while she made her way to a small stove. Mia hopped on one of the chairs that was standing next to the table and her big curious eyes examined everything around her; the insides of the cabin and the view she could see from the window. Meanwhile Ellen was preparing tea and soon Mia could hear the whistling of the kettle. Shortly Ellen came to the table with two cups of hot drink and placed them on the table. “Here you go”, Ellen said and then sat down on a chair. “Thank you”, Mia thanked and noted what a wonderful scent the tea had, it was very sweet. “Now”, Ellen spoke and leaned on the table with two of her arms, smiling at her guest, “what do you want to know?” Mia had dug from her backpack a notebook, a quill and an inkwell, and she was ready to take some notes. “Tell me everything.” So Ellen did. She told about the ancient war that took place in a different world and how gods created this one for the souls of the fallen to rest. That was also when the gods created Ellen and gave her the duty to look after the souls. Then Ellen told that later on, the sunflower field wasn't exclusively just for those who fought in the ancient war and it became the resting place of other heroes as well, all coming from different worlds. But Ellen's duty didn't change, it never did. She talked about how she would wander around the field every day to take care of the soul flowers and how she knew the life story of every single one of them. She also mentioned that sometimes she would find items that belonged to some of the resting souls and that was why she had put them on display in her cabin, so they wouldn't get lost. And at last, Ellen told a little bit more about herself, that even though she loved to be in here, sometimes she dreamed of visiting other dimensions as well. “Hmm, that is a great dream to have”, Mia said as their conversation ended and she put her writing tools back in her backpack. “I think you should pursue it someday! Personally, I love to explore different worlds and discover everything about them!” “Yes, maybe one day…” Ellen spoke a little absent-mindedly and drank the last drops of her tea. “But I don't know how the souls would be doing if I left them.” “I'm sure you'll figure it out someday!” Mia exclaimed cheerfully. “Maybe not now or anytime soon, but you know, one day. Meanwhile… I think I could help you out a little.” “Oh?” Ellen stared at her very curiously. “What do you mean?” “If you really want to know more about other worlds, I can bring them to you!” Mia chirped. “Not literally, of course, but I'm a dimensional traveler and it's my passion to gather information about all the places I visit! I can come to you every now and then and show you where I've been! That way you'll get familiar with other planes of existence.” “That would be wonderful!” Ellen was happy about this suggestion; she didn't know had she ever been this glad about something. All the other beings that had visited the sunflower fields didn't stay for long and never intended to come back. But Mia was different. “Well, I have to go now”, Mia said and she hopped down to the floor from her chair. “Thank you for the tea and for introducing your world to me! I really appreciate it.” “You're welcome”, Ellen said and smiled and stood up. Mia was once again searching for something from her backpack and soon she brought out some sort of weird device; it was a metal square with two antennas and a bunch of buttons. She pressed some of the buttons and the device started to hum a little, the antennas sparked and soon they shot forward beams of blue light. They merged together in the air and as they did so, they started to form an oval-shaped swirling portal. All of this was so strange and new to Ellen and she watched this play intently. “Goodbye, Ellen!” Mia said as she glanced at her one last time. “I'll visit you soon!” “Bye!” Ellen replied and waved at the little owl. Then Mia hopped into the portal and it slowly shrunk, soon fading away. Mia was gone and Ellen was alone again – well almost, but then she heard the familiar squeaks coming from one of the corners of her cabin. But Ellen wasn't sad, she would look forward to Mia's next visit. It seemed like that after all this time, after thousands of years, she had finally made a friend. The thought brought a smile on Ellen's face.Let The Flames Of Wrath DieThe bar was full that night, packed with the presence of both humans and demons. It wasn't surprising since the work week was over, so the people allowed themselves to have a drink with their buddies and relax. All sorts of chattering filled the air, loud and quiet, cheerful and restrained, drunken and sober. Somewhere a radio was trying to get itself heard by playing mellow music, but almost no one paid any attention to it. A rather musty scent was lingering in the air and the smoke from cigarettes joined it, not really improving the quality of the air. The lights had been sprinkled around the bar in a very jumbled fashion; while some areas were well lit, there were also very dim corners which the shady people tended to prefer. One of such people was Sin Vulpes. He was sitting alone in a table that was placed to one of the farthest corners from the door and was partly hidden from sight by a column that was standing near. It was his favorite table in this specific bar because he could sit there in peace. He was smoking a cigarette, thus contributing in making the air more stale. A half-full glass of whiskey was resting on the table in front of him; he had been leisurely enjoying his drink. It was his second one. That night he had come to the bar just to relax like so many others and that night he was an ordinary man among them. Sin Vulpes had been sitting in his dark corner for a good while already and he had seen how people had been coming and going as a quite steady flow over the course of time. Every time he heard the door creak open, he would take a quick glance at its direction; he wanted to stay aware of his surroundings even though he was there taking it easy, it simply was a habit he had learned as a mercenary. He hadn't anticipated that he would see a familiar face in the bar that night, but at some point when the door opened again, he noticed a man with an angelic face coming in. And Sin Vulpes wondered, what were the odds that this man, Ivory, would step inside the same bar where he was at that moment? It was a strange coincidence. But Sin Vulpes felt indifferent as he watched how Ivory walked through the bar to the counter to get a drink. Ivory had just grabbed a bottle of beer when his gaze wandered to the dim corner table where Sin Vulpes was sitting. Their eyes met and for once Sin Vulpes didn't look away like he usually did with this man; he could feel a weird throb inside of him, something he didn't remember experiencing before. He could only wonder what it was. But Ivory, who always seemed happy to see him, grew a smile on his face and he walked from the counter towards Sin Vulpes' table. Without asking for permission to join him, Ivory just sat down on the chair that was in the opposite direction from where Sin Vulpes was sitting. “Didn't know you were here!” Ivory exclaimed happily. “Small world, huh? But good to see you! How have you been doing?” Sin Vulpes inhaled smoke from his cigarette and blew it to the bar's musty air. “Just fine. Been quiet at work lately.” Ivory was one of those people who knew what Sin Vulpes was doing. He could kill and torture people and still, Ivory was fond of him, wanted to be around him. But why, Sin Vulpes didn't know, especially because he had tried to push him away so many times. Perhaps Ivory could see past that monster, perhaps he saw a person behind all those layers of a cold and ruthless man. He was a persistent one, Sin Vulpes had to admit that. “Well, the good thing is that at least you'll get to relax a little bit”, Ivory said and shrugged, then took a swig from his beer. “How about you?” Sin Vulpes asked and right after the words had left his mouth, he wondered why he was suddenly trying to strike a conversation with this man. “What's going on in your life?” “Eh, nothing much”, Ivory admitted. “Though there's been a weird demand for my artwork, so I've been painting a lot. I don't mind that, of course, I enjoy working and it's nice to get so much money.” “I see.” A silence fell between them for a moment. They just listened to the jumble of noises the other people in the bar were making and enjoyed their drinks. At some point Sin Vulpes extinguished his cigarette by pressing it against the ashtray in front of him, smoke still rising from it. Then he just focused on emptying his glass of whiskey. Suddenly Ivory broke their silence: “You know, I was trying to find some company here for the night, but then I saw you… And I just… It's been a while since the last time we met, so I was genuinely happy to see you.” Ivory was twirling his drink a little, his gaze down. “If you don't mind… Would you like to hang out with me for a bit? Not for long, of course, just a moment.” He looked so strangely lonely all of a sudden. Ivory was a very social person, it wasn't hard for him at all to find company, whether he was aiming to sleep with them or not. Sin Vulpes felt a sting in his cold heart of stone, being completely bewildered; why was he having such sensations now? He didn't care about anyone, but for a reason he didn't understand, he wanted to be with Ivory for a while, fulfilling his wish. “Sure, I have a moment”, Sin Vulpes answered and it was like his lips had moved on their own, not caring about his will. “Thank you”, Ivory said quietly and a tender smile appeared on his angelic face once more. Sin Vulpes' right hand had been resting on the table and now Ivory moved his hand on top of it. Sin Vulpes didn't reject this gesture like he usually would; Ivory had made many attempts to show affection towards him in the past, but now Sin Vulpes let him have this moment. With his steel grey eyes, Sin Vulpes looked right at Ivory, trying to understand why he was feeling so soft all of a sudden. But no matter how hard he tried to ponder about it, he couldn't grasp the answer. There just was something about Ivory that felt soothing somehow… Has he always been like this? Or hadn't Sin Vulpes just noticed it before? As if it would magically clear his head, Sin Vulpes gulped the last bits of his whiskey voraciously. He moved his hand that had been resting beneath Ivory's own and he stood up and said: “I'll go get a refill. I'll be back.” Ivory just nodded as an answer and drank some of his beer. He wasn't left alone for long because Sin Vulpes was soon back with more whiskey. As soon as he sat down, their eyes met again – and he didn't look away this time, either. There was something sparkling in Ivory's lavender eyes… Warmth? Kindness? Understanding? Maybe even love? Such things were unfamiliar to Sin Vulpes, his world consisted of violence and death. Ivory knew this and yet, he could still look at him with such tenderness in his eyes. Sin Vulpes probably wouldn't ever comprehend that. And there it was again, that strange throb inside his chest… Was it a sign of his heart of stone getting fractured, maybe because something in there wanted to bloom? Could he… Could he have a future together with this man? That didn't sound bad, although it felt odd; he had never been in a serious relationship and even if he did, he would have never thought to be with another man. It seemed like Ivory had managed to sneak into his heart after all. Sin Vulpes broke their eye contact and then focused on just drinking. Such ridiculous thoughts… Maybe it was just the whiskey that had risen to his head. “Oh, I like this song!” Ivory suddenly exclaimed and partly turned around to listen to the song that had started to play from the radio. Sin Vulpes didn't care about that, but was happy that his train of thoughts momentarily crashed. Ivory tapped his foot a little to the rhythm of the song and also bobbed his head slightly. He really appeared to enjoy the music. Meanwhile Sin Vulpes had emptied his glass once again. For a brief moment he pondered whether he should go get another one, but decided that he had been drinking enough – he didn't like to get drunk while out in the public. He started to long for fresh air and he got on his feet again. “Where are you going?” Ivory asked curiously as he watched his movements. “Out”, Sin Vulpes simply blurted out while trying to navigate his way out of the dark corner. “You can come with me if you want.” He hadn't meant to say those last words, they just came out of his mouth on their own. Nonetheless, Ivory seemed to get happy because of them and he quickly emptied his bottle of beer. Swiftly he stood up and hurried to catch up with Sin Vulpes and together they left the musty bar and all the people in it. It was the month of the dead, so the weather was cold, but it felt even more chilly after Sin Vulpes and Ivory had just stepped out of the warmth of the building; especially Ivory was shivering noticeably. Winter was coming and as a sign of this, a few tiny snowflakes were falling from the black sky, but they were too feeble to form a cover of snow just yet and would melt the next day. It was the miserable time of the year when everything was dark and withered and in need of snow to conceal this ugliness. But the whiteness would come, eventually, the world just had to wait. Sin Vulpes started to walk away from the bar, taking the lead and Ivory followed him, not far behind. As they were going forward, Sin Vulpes decided to light another cigarette to smoke while they walked. He was leaving behind puffs of smoke as he strolled through the wet streets and they pestered Ivory's nose a little, but he had accepted a long time ago this nasty habit Sin Vulpes had. The fresh outdoor air seemed to clear Sin Vulpes' head, but the strange thoughts still continued to spin around his mind and he couldn't push them aside, they wanted to be heard now, not later. All he could think about was Ivory and how he wanted to be with him. But part of him was still resisting this idea, he had always been a lone wolf and wanted to stay as one. This led to a conflict inside of him as two different desires fought against each other. Ivory had no idea what kind of mayhem was taking place in Sin Vulpes' mind as they continued to walk together through the streets of Olden Shadow Town. Sin Vulpes had always felt strong hatred inside of him, he had carried it as long as he could remember. He couldn't recall where its roots were anymore, but it had always been a part of him, burning strongly inside his soul. But somehow, Ivory's presence seemed to tame those flames, giving a more serene feeling. Why was that, Sin Vulpes had no idea. Did he want to have more of that soothing feeling in his life? Or would he rather choose wrath that had no origin? Suddenly Sin Vulpes stopped and Ivory almost bumped into him. He dropped his cigarette and stomped on it while Ivory was wondering why they were now just standing on the street all of a sudden. “Sin? Is something wrong?” Ivory inquired quietly. But the other man just stayed still and silent for a while. Ivory was about to open his mouth again when Sin Vulpes turned around to face him. There was this strange look in his eyes, something Ivory hadn't seen before. “You have always cared for me, haven't you?” Sin Vulpes muttered with a low voice. Ivory was a little confused by these words, but provided an answer anyway: “Yes… Ever since I saw you for the first time, I have cared about you. You delivered an impression no other person has ever given me. There is something special about you, I have always known that. You are a masterpiece, Sin.” And immediately after he had stopped talking, Sin Vulpes had come closer to him and gently pressed his lips against Ivory's own. This really surprised Ivory, he hadn't expected something like this to happen at all, but he answered to the other man's kiss, closing his eyes and hoping that the moment would last forever. It was their first kiss, something he had yearned for so long, and somehow it made this more special that Sin Vulpes had been the one who initiated it. At that moment, Ivory could burst from happiness. Eventually Sin Vulpes broke their kiss, but still looked intently at Ivory's eyes. “I'm glad you never gave up on me”, Sin Vulpes said softly. Ivory couldn't stop from smiling. “I'll never take no for an answer from a guy like you.” Sin Vulpes sneered a little bit and shook his head. But soon his eyes were fixed at Ivory again. “Would you like to show your place to me?” “Oh, I've wanted to do that for a long time”, Ivory chuckled and his smile grew even wider. “I'll take you there.” Ivory reached for his hand and Sin Vulpes didn't deny from him this small indication of affection. Holding hands, walking side by side they began their short journey to Ivory's house. And at the same time, they also took their first steps in a shared life, because finally, Sin Vulpes had surrendered and accepted Ivory's love.A Man In My Mirror - Chapter 1Chapter 1: Mark of a dragon When the gentle rays of the sun infiltrated through the window and shone right at Willett's face, even in his sleepy state he noticed that something was different. Slowly he raised his body from his comfy bed to sit and he stared blankly in front of him, though his eyes weren't fixed on anything at that moment. He was still very drowsy so his train of thought wasn't quite swift yet, but he still tried to pinpoint what exactly he was feeling. It was like something was swirling inside of him, giving him this odd, energetic and warm sensation. Willett had never felt anything even remotely like this feeling. Although he was tired, his insides were bursting with energy. He lifted his hand to touch his chest. Even his heartbeat felt somewhat more vigorous now. All of this was so strange. He threw his blanket aside and swung his legs to the edge of his bed and heaved his body up and as he did so, he noticed that his body also felt lighter than usual. He walked across his small but now very luminous room, the floor creaking a little as he made his way to the stand where a small bowl of water was waiting for him. Once he reached it, he scooped up a little of that water and washed his face. He repeated this movement few times and when he was done, he looked at himself in the mirror that was hanging from the wall in front of him. That was when he noticed it. He had a black mark on his face. Its fine curlicues ran over his left eye. Surprised, Willett blinked his eyes a couple of times, wondering if he was just seeing things. But no, the mark didn't go anywhere. Then he attempted to scrape it in case it was a prank by his little sister, Mioran. He washed his face again in case it was just some smear Mioran had done, but when he looked back in the mirror, the mark still remained there. It hadn't faded even slightly. Willett fumbled his pale blond and messy hair in a confused state, until realization finally hit him and he stared at his own reflection with wide eyes. It was the mark of a dragon! Of course, why it hadn't occurred to him sooner? His strange feeling and the mark, it made sense now, sort of. Willett was utterly bewildered by it, he couldn't believe that this would happen to him. He hadn't even been aware that this year Emperor of Celestial Beasts would fly around the Earth and choose the next people that would be taken to Belstarr Academy in Heaven to study magic. And he would be one of those few people. He, a simple servant. He would become a mage and bring magic to Earth. The idea of this was so wild and far-fetched that Willett couldn't really digest it. How could this be possible? He had always thought to be just an ordinary person, living an ordinary life. And now this happened. He shook his head in disbelief. A mixed chaos of emotions was raging inside of him. Mostly he was confused, but also proud, excited, even a little scared and insecure. Being selected by Emperor was one of the greatest blessings possible. He should wear his mark with pride. But he was afraid of what kind of responsibilities he would have to now carry on his shoulders. Willett tried to calm himself by reasoning that the Celestial Beasts would surely guide him. But what if he still failed somehow and would become a disappointment to all? This was too much to bear alone at that moment. Willett decided to head to downstairs. He walked to the door of his little room with light steps, feeling a bit tense, because, how would his parents react? He took a hold of the door handle as soon as he reached it and opened the door, slipping out of his room. He came to small space where it was possible to access two other rooms – the bedrooms of Mioran and their parents – and stairs that led down to lower floor. Willett made his way to those stairs and began his descend. He could hear the chattering noises of his family as he came down to a spacious room. And as he reached the bottom of the stairs, he noted that his parents and little sister were at the table eating breakfast. Willett's mother, Hanalera, was buzzing around the space that served as their kitchen and from the corner of her eye she noticed his presence and said: “Oh good, you're here. I was about to come wake you up. Come, eat some breakfast.” The young man walked to the table that had four seats, just enough for their little family. He sat down next to an empty seat that was reserved for his mother and took a slice of bread, also cutting a tiny chunk of cheese on top of it and began to nibble his simple meal while his mother gave him a cup of tea. He had barely had time to take one bite from his bread when Mioran fixed her gaze on him and dropped her slice of bread she had been eating and pointed at Willett's face. “Mom, dad!” she yelled excitedly. “Will has a mark of a dragon!” Their father, Ranoswan, scowled a little at his daughter's sudden shouting. “What are you talking abo- “ He shut his mouth suddenly, staring at Willett's face with wide eyes. Willett felt a little awkward as he hadn't been sure how to tell his family about the mark. He sighed in his head; of course he should have known that it would be his little sister that would bring it up first. Hanalera stepped next to Willett and took a gentle hold of his head and turned it in order to examine it. She stared at the black mark, even tried to smear it off, but of course it wouldn't smudge. “Oh my…” she muttered as she let go of Willett. “This is very much unexpected… My boy…” She tumbled down on the chair, shaking her head. Nobody said anything for a while, which made Willett feel even more awkward. Everybody knew about the contract that had been made between king Opucrunon and Emperor of Celestial Beasts over four hundred years ago. Earth had been enjoying the magic it had gained from this contract and mages were very respected people. And as far as common folk knew, things were now fine in Heaven as well. Still Heaven and Earth had been continuing to connect their young ones in Belstarr Academy even though there wasn't a practical need for it anymore. But it was true that ever since Belstarr Academy had been founded, the relationship between Heaven and Earth had only got closer, even more as time passed on. Hanalera recovered from her shock quickly and joy seemed to fill her heart. She captured Willett in a tight embrace out of pure pride and happiness. “My boy is going to be a mage!” she was exclaiming while squeezing her son. That was when Ranoswan seemed to get over his state of shock as well and he was smiling happily, having a bit more toned-down reaction than his wife. Mioran was almost bouncing on her seat like an excited bunny and almost made her chair topple down. Willett let himself relax after he escaped his mother's embrace. It should have been obvious that his family would be proud and happy for him, but for a reason even he didn't know, he had felt a little anxious. Perhaps he had been afraid that his family would think that he was abandoning them? He had no idea how people usually reacted to when their loved one was chosen by Emperor of Celestial Beasts, he didn't know a single person who had got the mark of a dragon. “I'm glad you are happy about this”, Willett said while resuming to eat his breakfast. Has anyone ever refused to attend Belstarr Academy? He didn't know. But surely there would be other people like him, those who were a little nervous about the whole thing. He was willing to go, of course, this was an opportunity of a life time. But he wasn't really feeling confident and an idea of failure lingered on top of his mind. “Of course we are”, Hanalera responded and placed her hand on Willett's shoulder. “This is such an honor!” “This is truly marvelous”, Ranoswan commented. “I can hardly believe that this is really happening… You are so lucky, being chosen by Emperor. I bet he saw hidden talents in you.” Willett shrugged a little and kept eating. Mioran couldn't stay still and was still bouncing on her chair and asked: “When are you leaving?” Willett looked confused for a while. “I… I don't know.” “You don't have to worry about that”, Hanalera spoke softly. “I'm sure we'll know when the time is right. Now, eat your food, you have to leave soon.” The whole family enjoyed their simple meal, their topics now focusing on more every-day matters such as weather, what chores Hanalera and Mioran would be doing and how Hanalera was concerned about the illness of one of their neighbors. After they had finished eating, Willett and Ranoswan stood up from the table and began to make their leave. All the family members wished each other a good day before Willett and his father stepped out of their cozy little home. A warm summer morning welcomed them as they found themselves standing in a small paved street. Other people from their own houses had started to gather and getting ready for the brand-new day, heading to do whatever errands they had to run. The sky was light blue and clear and there wasn't even a single cloud drifting across. The morning sun was brightly shining its golden light, waking up the world below. Willett and his father started to walk along the street, heading to the direction of the main street that would lead to the castle where they worked as servants. They lived in a relatively small town known as Swarrendel. It wasn't grand or luxurious, but it was a comfortable home for many people and it was one of those types of places where everyone knew everyone. The folks were generally hard-working, mellow and helpful and so it was pleasant to be around most people. Swarrendel wasn't a wealthy place, but people managed, which kept the residents happy. And when Willett and his father made their way to the busier main street, Willett learned one more thing about Swarrendel: the people were also very curious. While walking towards the castle, he lost count how many passer-byes had stopped to stare at his face after they had caught a glimpse of the mark of a dragon. They didn't approach him, but they were whispering with their accompanies and followed with their eyes his movements. Willett felt a little awkward and wondered: had there ever been a chosen one in Swarrendel before him? He hadn't ever heard of one. And because people were looking at him with great interest, he started to feel that the answer was no. The main street was getting increasingly busy as Willett and his father were moving forward. Swarrendel was waking up after the long night and bit by bit the town became more lively. Willett and Ranoswan bypassed many shops such as bakery, a butcher's shop and a place where you could buy herbs that worked on many different ailments. Willett also noted that a merchant caravan from the south had arrived to Swarrendel to delight townsfolk with their exotic wares. The young man got curious looks even from these foreign people, although Willett was sure that they had seen marks before, and most likely even full-fledged mages. He tried to ignore the stares, but deep down, he became even more anxious. The people didn't mean any harm, he knew that, but the constant staring was making him uncomfortable. Willett felt a little relieved when he finally entered the courtyard of the castle, getting away from the mass of people that had gathered on the main street as the sun was rising. He parted ways with his father and as fast as he could he slipped inside the castle through one of the smaller doors around the courtyard that gave access to the building. He found himself in a dim corridor and leaned against a cold stone wall for a while, a sigh escaping from his mouth. Then he got a grip of himself and began his work day, hoping that people would mostly leave him alone. The castle of Swarrendel wasn't very big or grandeur like the one of the great kingdom of Salvargren, for example. It was modest just like the town surrounding it. The area around Swarrendel was its own little patch of kingdom, ruled by the king Wulfcas and queen Elivin. They also had two offspring that both were well on their journey to adulthood: princess Rysara and prince Nathald. The royal family was known for being compassionate rulers and so they had earned the respect of the people of Swarrendel. There weren't many of those who thought ill about the royal family. Willett, in fact, was somewhat close with princess Rysara since he was one of her servants together with a young woman called Dahildi. They had served the princess for years, ever since they were adolescents and had grown quite close to each other. It was Willett's first task of the day to find Dahildi. She was known to be a bit of a sleepyhead, but she was conscientious worker once she would get in the zone. But that morning Willett didn't have to even get close to servant's quarters when the familiar figure walked towards him, yawning and rubbing her eyes. “Did you just wake up?” Willett asked while smiling at the young woman. “Yeah, yeah…” Dahildi muttered in a slightly irritated tone. “Don't you mock me, I'm still in time for work.” She yawned again and for the first time that day she looked at Willett. Her mouth stayed open as she stared at her friend's face just like everyone else had done during that morning. The young man wasn't surprised. “Will, you absolute motherfucker”, Dahildi gasped and shoved her hand on the young man's face and began to fumble it. “Is that the mark of a dragon?!” “Yeah, it is”, Willett answered and shrugged. “I have gained a lot of attention this morning, people stared at my face the whole time I was coming here.” “Well, you are a handsome devil, but still, this is incredible!” Dahildi's energy level seemed to bounce up right at that moment, her sleepiness was like washed away. “I'm so happy for you!” Eventually she stopped squishing Willett's face and left it alone. The young man nodded at the direction where they would be able to get to the kitchen and together they headed towards it in order to fetch breakfast for princess Rysara. Dahildi's excitement hadn't faded at all. “You're going to get experience what Heaven is like! That's so cool!” “Yeah, I guess I'm a lucky guy”, Willett responded. A group of three other servants passed by, but they were so preoccupied by their conversation that they didn't pay any attention to Willett and Dahildi, which meant that they hadn't noticed the mark of a dragon. Willett was glad for this and hoped that interactions with other people around the castle would be like this one. Soon they arrived to the kitchen. There was one cook working hard over the stove and was too busy to chatter with Willett and Dahildi, they only greeted each other. The young woman snatched some bread to eat quickly while Willett gathered together a meal for princess Rysara. He collected oatmeal, bread, tea and fresh apples that had been cut to slices on a tray and then he and Dahildi, who had managed to finish her bread, started to make their way to Rysara's room. It was located on top of one of the towers so they had a bit of ascending to do, but they did this every morning, so it was routine for them. Lots of people were buzzing around the lower level of the castle, preparing for the new day and Willett even caught a glimpse of his father, but as they headed to the tower, encountering other people significantly decreased. Willett and Dahildi climbed the spiraling stairs and got to upper part of the tower fairly quickly. There was one guard standing by the door to the princess' room; he looked so young and insecure and Willett noted that he hadn't seen this young man before, he must be new, this probably was his first day here as a guard. The young man looked at them, wondering if they were allowed to enter Rysara's room, but eventually came to the conclusion that the duo were servants and gave them permission to go in. Dahildi, whose hands were free, knocked on the wooden door loudly. “Your Highness, it's time to wake up”, she said while she carefully opened the door slightly ajar. “We have breakfast for you.” Then she pushed the door open so she and Willett could enter. Dahildi headed to the great windows in order to sweep the red silky curtains aside so the light of the bright morning sun would get in. In her decorative bed, princess Rysara raised her body to sit and she stretched her arms while yawning. Her long and black gorgeous hair flowed on her back, but it looked like it needed some brushing. That was exactly what Dahildi was about to do. She grabbed a beautiful hair brush from a nightstand next to Rysara's bed, sat down behind the princess and began to brush her hair. Meanwhile, Willett brought the breakfast tray to the princess and placed it on the bed in front of her; it had little legs attached to it so it would be comfortable to use even in a soft platform like the bed. “Thank you, Willett”, princess Rysara said and started to eat. The young man bowed to her and took few steps backwards to stand at a respectful distance away from her. Then he just waited as the princess was enjoying her meal and Dahildi was making her hair look more beautiful than what it already was. As soon as Rysara had finished eating, Willett stepped forward again to take the tray with empty dishes so he could bring it back to kitchen. While he was leaning in reaching for the tray, princess looked at him and noticed the black mark on his face. “You have the mark of a dragon!” she exclaimed, surprised. “Um… yes, your Highness”, Willett replied, feeling a little awkward as he wasn't sure how to respond correctly to someone like princess about this matter. He just took the tray and began to walk towards the door. “Well, I'm surely going to miss you, Willett”, Rysara said, her eyes fixed on the windows as Dahildi continued to brush her hair. The words of the princess really struck the young man. He didn't respond, he just left the room with silence. He passed by the young guard again and headed to the stairs. While descending, his thoughts were locked on the little terrifying fact that he was leaving his whole life behind in order to become someone else. Usually the apprenticeship in Heaven lasted about ten years. That was a long time to be away from the loved ones. During such period, people would surely grow and become someone different. And people were the ones that made the world, so how changed Earth would turn out to be once he would be able to come back? Would he belong to that world anymore? This made Willett quite afraid. His life had taken a drastic turn and he had no control over it. He could only go with the tide.A Man In My Mirror - ProloguePrologue It was the coldest winter night so far in the kingdom of Salvargren. The sky was utterly black, there was no sign of moon or stars, but it felt gentle somehow, it was like a delicate blanket had been wrapped around Salvargren, resembling how a mother would swaddle her child. Large snowflakes were falling from the darkness, dancing in the air before landing on the ground or buildings. The whole town was resting under the layer of whiteness and it was actually pretty pleasant sight, straight from a fairytale. Some little children were staring out of the windows, mesmerized by the dance of snowflakes in the light of the street lamps and they would fall asleep while watching this silent play, and then their parents would carry them to their warm beds and send them to the dreamlands with a goodnight kiss. All in all, people were about to go to sleep and rest in order to face the next day. No one could anticipate that tonight, something very extraordinary would happen. Tonight, the future of the world would change. The town had got founded around the great hill that rose from the ground. And on this hill, the magnificent castle of Salvargren was built. Usually it would stand tall and dark, but the snow had given it a nice white coat that made it look different. It was like it was a huge creature that had fallen into hibernation. But the life inside the castle was busy as always, even during this late hour. Defying the cold and darkness, there was a lone figure walking up the hill towards the castle. A hunched old man, dressed in a dark blue hooded robe that had decorated gold, silver and purple patterns embroidered on the sleeves and lower edge of garment; a sign of his high status. The hood hid his face furrowed by wrinkles, only his long silvery beard was visible. He was grasping a gnarled white staff that helped him to walk and it left small round marks on the freshly fallen snow along with the old man's footprints. Slowly he made his way to the grand gates of the castle that were open and welcoming as always and a sudden gust of wind billowed his robe. Usually two guards would stand by the gates, just in case of an emergency, but today the weather was too cold and they had retreated into the depths of the castle. No one was greeting the man as he passed the gates and proceeded into the courtyard. The area looked fairly empty, the castle walls surrounded the courtyard all around and only in the middle of it all there was a small garden, which was sleeping under the snow at this time of the year. Pure white blanket had buried all the beautiful flowers, only the single mighty tree that stood tall at the very center of the garden was visible. This garden was waiting for the spring so it could bloom once more, but for now, it would slumber. The old man bypassed the center, heading to the great red double doors that would give him access to the insides of the castle. His lonely figure waddled across the courtyard and when he was at the doors, he raised his staff briefly, and this caused the doors to swing open by his soundless command and he entered the castle, leaving the cold and snow behind him. The doors slammed shut as soon as he had managed to take few steps further into the castle. There were three clear possible directions to go: left, straight ahead, right. The old man chose the middle one, and continued to walk further inside, following a red carpet that stretched into the belly of the castle and seemed to disappear into the darkness ahead and it muffled the sound of his steps. Occasionally narrow pathways would connect with the hallway, forming a complicated layout in which a couple of people would surely get lost. Candles that offered a gentle light on those who would stride along this great hallway illuminated his journey, they flickered and the dance of small flames created playful shadows on the darkest corners of the hallway. The old man did encounter a couple of people who were dressed in simple green clothing; the attire of servants. They bowed to him as he passed by and he nodded his head as a sign that he had noted their courtesy. The servants had stopped their chores just to watch how the old man was walking towards the throne room and despite the light of candles, he disappeared from their sight as he kept proceeding further. They resumed their work as soon as they had lost the glimpse of him. The old man was once again facing double doors. This time they were black and had complex golden inlays that formed vine-like patterns around two foxes. Just like he had done previously, he repeated his trick with the staff and the doors opened up for him. They were the entrance to the heart of the castle: the throne room. He stepped inside and found himself from a spacious room. Black tiles served as a floor and the light stone walls surrounded the area. The red carpet of the hallway didn't reach the room and was replaced with a blue one that ran through the room. Few sets of relatively narrow windows that were taller than two men combined gave more spacious look to the room. Many tall golden candelabras were standing near the walls to offer some illumination and the lit candles in them spread a sweet scent of honey that lingered in the air. And finally, at the far end of the room, a golden throne with a red seat, the great symbol of power, was waiting for the king. It was decorated with amethysts, sapphires and rubies, and the gold was gleaming in the light of the candles. The old man slowly made his way to the lonely throne and as soon as he had managed to get to it, he sat down, and a sigh escaped from his mouth as his journey was now finally over and he could rest his old bones. He was king Opucrunon, the ruler of the great kingdom of Salvargren. Time passed by as he was sitting alone in silence. The throne room remained empty and there was a good reason for it. The old king was waiting for a very special guest, someone he had last seen over a hundred years ago. Just like back then, Opucrunon had received a message in his dream. Emperor of Celestial Beasts wanted to meet him. And just like before, the old king wasn't sure why Emperor desired to have an audience with him. Previously, however, the world had been in turmoil, so it had made sense that Emperor had contacted him. Invaders from another world, dubbed as Nightstrikers, declared a war against all living things. They came out of nowhere and it never became clear why they were so hostile against everything and just had the desire to destroy life. Back then, humans weren't really aware of the existence of Celestial Beasts, but because of the invasion of Nightstrikers, Celestial Beasts made themselves known. That was when the world of humans started to be called Earth and the world of Celestial Beasts became known as Heaven. Earth and Heaven united their forces and crushed their common enemy, driving it out of their world. An age of peace bloomed once more and the humans and Celestial Beasts lived quietly in their own realms. But now things were different. Nothing was threatening Earth, as far as king Opucrunon knew, but was there some trouble in Heaven? While waiting for Emperor to arrive, he was trying to figure out what possibly could be the reason for Emperor's visit. But no matter how hard he tried to ponder this matter; in the end he knew that he could only guess. He wasn't sure when exactly the ruler of Celestial Beasts was coming. While waiting for him, the old king began to cast different kinds of magical spheres; a big red one, a tiny blue one and an average green one. Nobody knew this, but he enjoyed to play around with magic like this whenever he wanted to relax a bit. It was his little secret. Opucrunon waved his white staff around with smooth movements and the spheres were flying in the air, bouncing from invisible walls and making faint hissing sound as they moved around. The old king continued entertaining himself and kept his private magic show going for a good while. But at some point a sudden, immensely bright flash of light outside stole his attention. Since the sky was black, this abrupt phenomenon easily caught the interest of the old king and he had turned his head towards the nearest window in order to watch what was going on outside. The cause for the light was a blue lightning that slithered from the heaven and shattered the dark clouds. Strange thing was, this lightning lingered in the sky for a while, it didn't behave like lightnings usually do. Then it was gone, vanishing just as suddenly as it had appeared. The sky was utterly black again. But Opucrunon could see that something was flying with a high speed towards the castle. Its pale figure was easy to spot as it was outlined against the dark canvas of the sky. Opucrunon knew exactly what the being was. It was Emperor of Celestial Beasts. The old king noticed that one of the windows began to change. Suddenly its surface became like liquid, gleaming in the colors of a rainbow. It had turned into a gateway, he realized. And soon it was put in use as Emperor flew through it with ease, and Opucrunon could swear that he saw Emperor's body shrinking. The window changed back into an ordinary one as soon as the great beast had managed to move past it. Now that the Celestial Beast was inside, its size grew a little back to its normal proportions. The old king stared at his guest intently and a smile appeared on his face. The ruler of Celestial Beasts was a magnificent dragon. He had a long snake-like body, covered in pure white scales that were shimmering in the light of the candles. Around his head he had a silvery mane, like the one of a lion, and this same silvery fur had spread also to his back where it ran across his whole body like the ridges of a castle's walls, all the way to his tail where the fur formed a tuft. A little bit of this silvery fur could also be found from his four feet. On his head he was wearing a pair of dark antlers that were like a crown. He had two whiskers attached to his muzzle and they were waving around gracefully. His dark claws were scraping the tiles of the floor as he walked a little bit closer to Opucrunon. His gentle light blue eyes were fixed at the old king and Opucrunon could see the leniency and wisdom of this mighty beast in them. After few more steps, Emperor stopped and lowered his majestic head. It was his way of showing respect to Opucrunon. “Welcome to my castle”, Opucrunon declared and spread his arms in a welcoming way. “It is good to see you again after all these years.” “Greetings”, the Celestial Beast said with his strangely tolling voice, it was almost like a sound of bells. “I sincerely hope you have been in good health. I see that you are doing well with your magical abilities.” The old king ended his little magic show by waving his staff one more time, causing the spheres to stop and fade away. “Yes, I have learned a trick or two during these years”, Opucrunon answered, chuckling a little bit, while Emperor nodded in agreement. King Opucrunon was the first human ever to gain magical abilities. He had also lived longer than anyone, being well over hundred years old now. It was all thanks to the connection he had made together with Emperor back in the day when Nightstrikers invaded. It was like their souls had entangled, giving both of them a powerful, unexplainable sensation. They could still feel it even after all these years of separation. The old king stroked his long silvery beard. “May I inquire what is the reason for you to grace Earth with your presence tonight?” Emperor got straight to the point: “Our situation in Heaven is not good. We are still dealing with the aftermath of Nightstrikers invasion. We lost many of our friends, too many. Because of this, it has been hard to keep things in order in our land.” Emperor paused for a moment. King Opucrunon remained silent, waiting for his guest to continue. He did wonder, however, what could possibly be going on in Heaven. Celestial Beasts were almost immortal beings; they could be killed but they didn't really age after reaching certain point. That was pretty much everything the old king knew about those mysterious creatures. The old king was very curious about what Emperor was going to tell him. The dragon continued soon. “We are in dire need of mature Celestial Beasts and their powers. It would take a long while before our younglings would be able to aid us. This is where we need the help from Earth.” “How could we possibly assist you?” Opucrunon asked. Emperor raised his head and seemed like he was staring into distance. “When we constructed our connection over a hundred years ago when Nightstrikers invaded, I felt that my powers increased slightly. I have been pondering this matter and I believe that when a Celestial Beast and a human link their souls, while humans get a longer lifespan, Celestial Beast's growth will quicken.” “So, you want that this kind of connection would be established between more humans and Celestial Beasts”, Opucrunon guessed. The dragon lowered his head again and his blue eyes were gleaming as his gaze fixed on the old king once again. “Exactly. I am here to propose you a contract. I wish that I can choose a group of your younglings and take them to Heaven where they will form a companionship with young Celestial Beasts. Our generals will teach them how to control magic. This benefits both parties as you will gain magic users and our younglings will reach their full potential sooner.” The old king was thoughtful for a brief moment, although he couldn't come up with any disadvantages concerning Emperor's suggested contract. But he wasn't responsible of the whole Earth, even though Salvargren was one of the greatest kingdoms that existed. However, king Opucrunon was a well-respected man, in his own domain and even in other far-away lands. Leaders of other nations would probably agree with his decision. Besides, ever since the Celestial Beasts showed themselves to the humans, dwellers of Earth had been interested and fascinated by magic. This was a perfect opportunity for humans to get hold of magical abilities and find out what kind of benefits it would grant to Earth. And of course, if the Celestial Beasts were really facing trouble right now, it simply was the right thing to do to help them, since if they hadn't fought by the side of humans, Earth would be now immensely different place, dominated by darkness, misery and despair. After a short moment of silence, king Opucrunon said: “I will accept this contract. I believe it will be tremendously useful for both parties.” Emperor raised his majestic head again and it looked like he was smiling and seemed to be very pleased by the old king's decision. “I am grateful for your kindness. However, there is one more thing I would like to add.” “What is it?” Opucrunon asked. “As a pledge that we will bring your younglings back to Earth, I will leave my tongue in your hands”, Emperor responded. This was unexpected and astounded the old king. Emperor was giving him the greatest weapon there was. He had seen it with his own two eyes how destructive Emperor's Song of Judgement Day had been; it had been so powerful that the ruler of Celestial Beasts had earned everyone's respect. Emperor's powers were mostly manifested through his singing, so if he gave up his tongue, he wouldn't be able to sing anymore and thus, would lose most of his powers. Opucrunon was astonished for a second. “If you are sure about this… Then do what you must.” The dragon nodded. “It seems we both agree with these terms. I think it is time to seal the contract.” He lifted his head so high that his snout was almost touching the ceiling. Opucrunon could feel how an enormous amount of magical energy began to circle around Emperor; he was getting prepared for something grandeur. Then the old king saw how something blue, like finest powder, was sparkling around the dragon. The sight was marvelous. Right before his eyes, forces that were beyond human comprehension were at play. Opucrunon felt privileged to be able to witness this moment. So he watched, watched how something unparalleled folded in front of him. Gradually the magic that surrounded Emperor became stronger and stronger and the old king could feel it in his old body as well. Suddenly the dragon looked down again, his eyes locked on the king one more time. Then he commanded: “Once my song is over, cut off my tongue.” The old king nodded, staring at the mighty beast with admiration. Then Emperor raised his head and began to sing with a miraculous voice. His song echoed in the throne room, then the windows opened by the power of his song and it infiltrated to the outside world as well. At that moment, everyone in Heaven and Earth knew what had been agreed upon. It was the moment that changed the world.The Shadow Of Reaper - Chapter 2Chapter 2: Fox mask Swamp of the Wraiths was exactly what you would think of upon hearing its name. This vast area was filled with Wraiths and undead beings, and its murky waters had swallowed many unfortunate travelers that had gone astray during their journey. An oppressive mist was always lingering in the air, it almost felt like a living thing that would invade inside anyone who had dared to stay in the swamp, causing fear and anxiety for no apparent reason, while it would strengthen the fiends and undead warriors that roamed around the area. Although the swamp was a hostile place, the road from Archosaur to Dreamweaver Port went through it so a lot of travelers would make their way across these parts. In fact, it was relatively safe to travel, as long as you stayed on the road. The courageous soldiers in Whetstone Keep, the small shelter in the swamp, would patrol the area and do their best to make it as safe as they could for travelers. This alone was an honorable job, but they were also keeping their eyes on the infamous Wraithgate, an abyss where the Wraiths had originally come from to invade Perfect World. It hadn't been active for a long time and the soldiers wanted to keep it that way. There had been attempts to activate it, but so far they have failed, much to the satisfaction of the people in Whetstone Keep. But you can never be too careful with Wraiths, so they have continued observing Wraithgate. That day, the mist around Swamp of the Wraiths felt overwhelming, more than usual. It was thick, like a burden, weighing down on the shoulders of the people in Whetstone Keep. Cries of fiends could be heard, but the mist prevented anyone from seeing them. The only thing visible were the eerie pale green lights that were dancing in the air; no one was sure what they were but a lot of people thought that they were restless souls of those who had gone lost in the swamp and never managed to find their way out. They were an unnerving sight for sure, but most people did get used to them after a while since they were harmless. Along with these lights, glimpses of ancient skeletons of huge creatures could be seen as well. Nobody knew for how long they have rested in the mud of the swamp, but they can also be a little unsettling sight. Sometimes your eyes could deceive you into thinking that they have moved a slightly, or that their empty eye sockets were gleaming a little. And that day, it was exactly what some of the soldiers in Whetstone Keep were seeing, wondering if it was a sign of something extraordinary. However they just ended up shaking their heads to such thoughts and continued doing their tasks. One of the warriors that were now stationed at Whetstone Keep was a Nightshade called Mirskyn. Previously, he had been in Dreamweaver Port aiding with the sudden burst of monster population there, but then he had heard about some suspicious Wraith activity in the swamp, so he had traveled to Whetstone Keep to lend his helping hand. Currently he was the only Nightshade at the keep, so his appearance was slightly conspicuous; he was dressed in a white long coat, trousers and shoes and there was beautiful golden embroidery on the coat, as well as black wool on the shoulders. He had golden eyes that looked mysterious and his long hair was typical to his race: it was mostly violet, but would fade to white at the hair ends, also having few braids. He also had a goatee that was braided as well. All in all he looked sleek and graceful and someone who wouldn't falter easily. Mirskyn was discussing about the current situation in the swamp with a Human who was simply called Wraith Hunter, an individual who dedicated his life to watch over the swamp. He was a mysterious looking man with his dark red hair, dark eyes and black attire. Half of his face was hidden behind a black mask. He was carrying his sword on his back, where it was ready to be used, yearning for the blood of the Wraiths. Wraith Hunter informed Mirskyn that Wraiths had been restless lately, causing trouble more than usual to the people traveling through the swamp. But what had triggered this behavior, he didn't know, but it was like somebody had poked an ants' nest. The situation was still fairly new one, but Wraith Hunter was worried that it would last for a long time. He had already sent a messenger to Archosaur, requesting help to deal with Wraiths, just in case. Mirskyn had made few patrol duties around the swamp since he had arrived to Whetstone Keep and had the conversation with Wraith Hunter regarding the recent events. He had encountered Wraiths and undead warriors that they were controlling now, and indeed, it felt like they were threatened by something. It was strange, what could possibly cause that? Mirskyn had no answers, but he tried to investigate the matter as well as he could. That day he had walked into the mist again, all alone, but he felt no fear. He had his scythe with him; its blade was like made of ice, it was his magical instrument which he used to command the elements of water and metal. Having your weapon at hand was a wise thing to do since you never knew what you would encounter while strolling around the swamp. Even at that moment Mirskyn could hear cries of some fiends, although they were partly muffled by the heavy mist. He couldn't see any of those creatures, but they couldn't possibly see him, either, so the situation was even. But Mirskyn tried to keep his senses sharp as he preferred that if he came across Wraiths, it would be better if he noticed them first and could make the opening move. Mirskyn had been patrolling around the border of Swamp of the Wraiths and Ridge of the Dreaming Cloud where the change in terrain was startlingly sudden; first you were in the gloomy swamp, but then you would find yourself from a lush forest, coming from a hostile place to somewhere more welcoming. Sometimes, however, Wraiths would ambush travelers around this border as they could hide among the vegetation and shadows. There was not even a single trace of Wraiths at that time when Mirskyn checked the area. But instead, he sensed the presence of something else. It was a presence of a friend. Mirskyn stopped his going and smiled to himself. He let few seconds to pass by before he turned around to face a dark figure who had suddenly appeared behind him. This person was a master of stealth, but Mirskyn had learned to sense his presence. It was a Tideborn man, though the only evidence of that was his fin-like ears. Usually Tideborns had a blue or purple skin, but this individual had slightly brown one. His attire was mostly black, his very long coat and trousers and boots had some white linings on them and there was a little bit of gold lining as well in his coat, along with golden stripes on his chest. A little bit of gold was also on the hood that hid his eyes and strands of his blond hair flowed from under the hood. It was Rhynx, the assassin and Mirskyn's comrade. “Good to see you again”, Mirskyn spoke softly, still smiling. “We haven't seen each other… oh, it must have been over a month? Time sure flies, doesn't it?” “It seems life has kept us busy”, Rhynx simply replied. Mirskyn nodded in approval. “True, true. Now, would you like to walk with me? I'm on a round, actually.” Rhynx shrugged. “If you prefer that. I have something to tell you.” “Oh?” Mirskyn raised an eyebrow as he began to walk together with the Tideborn. The men were silent for a while as they infiltrated some deeper parts of Swamp of the Wraiths. It was like they were searching for a place where to exchange words that were meant to be heard by their ears only. Though, it's not like there were many curious ones in the swamp that would hear conversations, especially on a day like this when the haze was exceptionally thick. But the men continued to walk for a while, before Mirskyn finally broke the silence. “So, you were looking for me, I assume?” he said. “Yes. I have a word from the Elder of Archosaur”, Rhynx replied. “Interesting. What does he want?” Mirskyn asked curiously. “Apparently some psychic had seen a vision that really worried him”, Rhynx began to explain. “And whatever the psychic saw, the Nightshades are linked to it somehow. The Elder wants to discuss this matter with you.” “Why me specifically? Even now, he could talk about it with any other Nightshade.” The Tideborn shrugged. “Elder trusts you. Maybe he finds this case important enough that not just any Nightshade would do.” It was true. Mirskyn had earned remarkable reputation since he had slain many powerful Wraiths all by himself. This sure had caught the attention of important people, such as the Elder and general Summer. Mirskyn enjoyed their full trust and had become a valuable member of Allied Forces. He was a skillful warrior and thus an inspiring icon to many new recruits. Mirskyn looked thoughtful for a while. “I suppose I have to answer the Elder's call.” Before they could carry their conversation any further, suddenly Rhynx made a motion with his hand to signal the Nightshade to stop. So Mirskyn did. He had learned to trust his friend's sharp senses and it was clear that Rhynx had spotted something peculiar. For a brief moment the men stared into the swirls of thick mist, Mirskyn having his scythe ready and Rhynx had taken his daggers out. Whatever was coming out of the mist, they were ready for it. They could hear some faint rustling ahead. The men took few silent steps closer and then they saw it. It was like the mist had stepped aside from the way of this figure. There, gracefully gliding above the swamp's murky water, was a strange person. He was dressed in light blue robes that had many layers and it looked like that his clothes were almost one with the water as he was gliding above it. He had a long black hair that flowed behind him just as gracefully as his clothes. His face was hidden behind a white fox mask which had red patterns painted in it. His movements were elegant and his whole essence exuded mystical power which caused Mirskyn and Rhynx to be on their guard. Who was this person? Was he an enemy? And above all, had he an affiliation with Wraiths? At first it seemed like he wasn't even aware of the presence of the two men. But then, he slowly turned his head to their direction and stayed hovering above the water. Both sides were eyeing each other intently, trying to figure out to strength of each other. “Worms. Lowly worms”, the man muttered to himself and Mirskyn and Rhynx were barely able to hear his words. And just like that, he glided away, soon disappearing from sight as he kept going deeper into the swamp. Rhynx and Mirskyn were left behind, wondering who this individual was. They let their weapons down but still kept their eyes on the direction where the mysterious person had vanished. This encounter had given Mirskyn a strange feeling. There had been something really odd about the masked man's presence. It had looked like the man was searching for something. Mirskyn couldn't help but think that was there a connection between that person and the bizarre Wraith activity? He frowned as he was thinking about this. Maybe he really should have a word with the Elder of Archosaur. With silence, Mirskyn and Rhynx began to make their way to Whetstone Keep, both deep in their own thoughts. Mirskyn wanted to talk to Wraith Hunter and sought him out immediately after they entered the wood-walled small patch of safe haven in the swamp. Mostly he just wanted to inform him that he was heading to Archosaur. He did mention to him about the encounter with the suspicious masked man and told Wraith Hunter to be careful while on a patrol around the swamp, and, if possible, keep an eye on him. Wraith Hunter promised to do so. Mirskyn decided to rest in Whetstone Keep before the journey to Archosaur, and so would Rhynx who had expressed his desire to go with him. It was hard to tell in the swamp which time of the day it was since a slight darkness always lingered in the area, but they decided to leave approximately at dawn. When the two men woke up, even though they couldn't be sure if it was morning, they began their travel to the grand city of Archosaur. They followed the road to south, heading to Ridge of the Dreaming Cloud. And so they left behind the hostile swamp area and were welcomed by the verdant forest, feeling a little bit of relief for getting out of such place with oppressive atmosphere. But they couldn't possibly predict that their journey would turn out to be everything else but uneventful.The Shadow Of Reaper - Chapter 1Chapter 1: Threat in the horizon Archosaur was the grandest city in all over Perfect World. Within its great walls a bustling city life flourished. It had impressive architecture which would leave you with awe by the moment you reached its gates. Remarkable statues would guard the western and northern gates, a grand stone bridge crossed the river in south and in the east there was a harbor, where you could sail to Emerald Dragon Gulf and deeper into Endless Sea. At the center of Archosaur, four enormous statues were standing, they represented the images of gods in this world. And with them, there were four dragon statues as well, guarding a mysterious light that shined at the very core of the city, where it would shoot upwards right in the heavens. These were the few wonders of Archosaur that many would find absolutely stunning. From the crowded west district with many vendors to the east district with the prosperous port, and from the quiet north district to the south where a military of Allied Forces operated, the city had a little bit of something for everyone. It wasn't surprising that this is where the six races would meet and thus, there were many different individuals making a living here. A lot of young warriors would come here and get recruited to the army in order to aid in the battle against the Wraiths; creatures that weren't quite living, but not dead, either, their sole objective being that they want to corrupt the world. So, a lot of new warriors are needed to fight this evil and Archosaur was a great place for them to start. Although there had been a lot of schemes by Wraiths to launch an attack at the great city, life in Archosaur was actually quite peaceful. Whatever your expertise was, tailor, apothecary, merchant, craftsman, blacksmith, seamstress, there would always be someone needing your services. Archosaur offered many opportunities for a lot of people, so it was no wonder that the city had grown into this grand place it nowadays was. On this particular day, the life in the city was busy as usual. The weather was nice, it was warm and sunny and there was a slight breeze blowing through the streets of Archosaur. It was afternoon and a bunch of people were strolling through the city, minding their own business. It really seemed like an ordinary day. But, bad things are often concealed from the eyes of majority, and on this day, one person was carrying worries that concerned the whole world. A young Tideborn maiden was walking along the main street in the east district of the city. She had short blond hair and blue eyes, and she was wearing a gorgeous light blue bodice, skirt, bracers and heels that had snowflakes imprinted on them, and perhaps this whole attire was a sign of vanity. Her blue skin was shimmering in the light of the sun. A couple of people did secretly glance at her as they passed by, but the maiden didn't pay attention to anyone. She had something urgent to do. With a rather quick pace she was heading to the residence of the Elder. Elder, a wise old man, was a highly respected Human. He was well aware of the happenings around Archosaur, and even about some events around other corners of Perfect World. Often people would come to him to consult about various things. Due to his old age, he had a lot of life experience and wisdom, which often turned out to be a valuable thing. The Tideborn maiden eventually reached the place where the Elder lived and saw that he was outside. He was dressed in a brownish robe with some yellow embroidery in it that resembled flowers and he was slightly leaning on his cane. His white hair was tied to a bun and his just as white long beard was tidy. At that moment, the old man was having a conversation with a young Human warrior, a blademaster, judging by his heavy armor. The Tideborn remained a few meters away from them, waiting, allowing them to finish their business in peace, although she felt a little impatient. Just a little moment later, the men had done their talking and the blademaster turned around and began to walk away. The Elder had noticed the Tideborn that was waiting for an opportunity to talk with him and the old man waved a little at the maiden's direction. “Tsuyuem!” The Elder was excellent at remembering names and faces of many different individuals. “Good to see you! How are you doing?” “I'm fine, thank you, sir”, Tsuyuem answered, making a little bow to show her respected to this man. “I have something urgent to tell you, if I can have a moment with you.” The old man frowned as he saw concern in the Tideborn's blue eyes. He knew Tsuyuem as someone who liked to boast and show her strength, not usually worrying at all. There had to be something really worrisome things going on if she appeared troubled like this. “Come in, come in”, the Elder invited her, walking inside the building so they could discuss the matter in private. The Tideborn followed behind and soon they disappeared from sight of the crowd. They came to a large room that had a low table at the center and few pillows surrounding it. The old man signed the maiden to take a seat, while he began to prepare some tea after discarding his cane near the entrance. Tsuyuem sat on one of the pillows and followed with her gaze what the Elder was doing. She remained silent, out of politeness. The sweet scent of tea soon filled the air and the old man brought the pot and two cups to the table. He poured some of the tea to a cup he then gave to the Tideborn. “Here you go”, he said. “Thank you, sir”, Tsuyuem thanked. The Elder poured some tea for himself as well, left the pot at the center of the table and sat on a pillow opposite the maiden. He held the cup between his hands, letting the steam from the hot liquid fill his nostrils. Tsuyuem took a little sip from her tea, but then stayed still and quiet. A bit impatiently, she waited for the old man to start the conversation. After a short moment, the Elder shifted his gaze at the Tideborn. “Now, what did you want to talk about?” The maiden took a deep breath, preparing herself. “I had a vision. A horrible vision.” The old man recalled that psychics like Tsuyuem could see the future. This was an odd ability that some of the Tideborns could have. However, it was rather rare thing to occur and their visions often weren't clear which made them hard to understand. It also depended a lot in how powerful the psychic was – the stronger they were, the more likely they could see a glimpse of what's to come. There was a very low chance for weaker psychics to get these visions. Tsuyuem definitely wasn't weak, but not the mightiest psychic, either. It was possible for her to see future. The Elder knew this and wanted to learn more. “Tell me about it”, the old man requested. The Tideborn took another sip from her tea before beginning her tale. “I saw golden eyes”, she started to unfold her story. “They were filled with madness, burning with desire to destroy and enslave. It is an ancient evil that has been imprisoned for thousands of years. But where and what it is exactly, I don't know. But it will break free, if it hasn't already.” “Does it have something to do with Wraiths?” the Elder asked, interrupting the Tideborn's story for a bit. “I don't think so”, she replied, shaking her head. The old man nodded and said: “Please, continue.” So Tsuyuem did. “The power of seven vengeful ones will awaken a golden beast which will scorch the land with its blue flames. Masters of the five elements will serve the golden eyes and they will spread death and destruction in their name. Unfortunately, I don't know what these mean…” “Hmm.” The Elder looked really serious for a moment and seemed like he had sunk deep into his thoughts. “It feels like we have a new powerful enemy to deal with. That is rather worrisome, indeed… Did you see anything else?” The Tideborn nodded a little bit. “Yes, there's one more thing. I also saw the fall of the mighty Dawnglory. The city was in flames. Now, I'm not sure about this, but the fact that I specifically saw the destruction of Dawnglory is a little odd. Why this specific city? So, I think that this whole matter has something to do with the Nightshades.” Dawnglory was the capital city of the Nightshade race. It mainly consists of airships and is quite a magnificent sight. The city was unique one, for there wasn't any other like that in Perfect World. “The Nightshades, huh…” The Elder had gently put his tea cup on the table and was stroking his long white beard. It was like he was attempting to put the pieces of vague information together like a puzzle. Tsuyuem remained silent while the old man was focusing on his thinking, and took sips from her tea occasionally until her cup was empty. She placed it on the table and stared at the old man with her blue eyes. The quiet moments passed by as the Elder was dwelling inside his mind. The Tideborn started to get a little annoyed, however, for she wasn't really patient person. But she knew that it would be extremely rude to disturb the old man, so she just had to stay put and settle for her role as a watcher. She really had to restrain herself from doing annoying movements like tapping her leg with her fingers. Staying still and silent took a lot effort from her. But finally, the painful quiet moments were done as the Elder raised his head a little as it had been down a bit, and spoke for the first time in a while: “Do I remember correctly that a group of Tideborns just came to Archosaur trough the south gate?” Tsuyuem tilted her head slightly. “I think that they indeed passed the gate a little while ago. They came to assist with the increased monster population around the outskirts of Archosaur.” “Do you know if Rhynx was among them?” the Elder asked. “Yes, I believe he was one of those that arrived to the city”, the Tideborn replied. “Good.” The old man stroked his beard once again. “Could you please seek him and tell him that I want to have a word with him?” “Of course, sir”, Tsuyuem answered. She stood up slowly and when she was back to her feet again, she gave another respectful bow to the Elder. “I will go and find Rhynx immediately. Thank you for your time.” The Tideborn began to walk away to the door and the Elder did stand up as well. The old man followed the maiden to the entrance of his home, but stopped at the door. He observed how Tsuyuem joined the crowd of people that were walking along the main street and even though she didn't walk particularly fast, she soon disappeared from the old man's sight. But still, the Elder stood at the door, watching at the people who would pass by, deep in his thoughts. Eventually the gaze of the old man would shift to the sunny sky. It was odd how peaceful and beautiful a world filled with evil could appear to be. The Elder had cared for the Perfect World for so many decades and years of carrying worries had granted him many wrinkles. And now, it seemed like that what he had just heard from Tsuyuem, the awareness of a new threat had given him few more of them. The worries would just never end during his life. The Elder snapped out of his thoughts and decided to return inside his home. There was a specific man that he wanted to consult about the visions of the Tideborn maiden. If the things that she had seen were somehow connected to the Nightshade race, it was best to ask one of them if they knew what the visions meant. The old man was pretty sure where this man was located at the moment, but it was rather far away. He needed someone swift to deliver a message to that person, and luckily, right in that moment in Archosaur, there was a man who could perform this task with excellence: Rhynx the assassin.The Wizard's Cat - Chapter 11Chapter 11: Beginning of the mayhem Nobody moved. Nicolas and his little group could only stare with fearful eyes at the snow-white creature in front of them. Paleface was blocking their path, being well aware of this fact and she glared at the little group, measuring them with her blazing eyes. There was practically no emotion in her gaze, so it was hard to tell what she was thinking, which was typical of her kind. For a very brief moment her stare wandered to the group of sleeping Nightfolks, but soon her eyes were fixed again at Nicolas, Black Cat, Cedric and lord Alexander's son. No words were exchanged, there was only tension in the air. Each passing second felt like several minutes and everybody remained stationary like ice statues – until Paleface decided to move, which only increased the tension in the air. She took a hold of her great battle axe she carried on her back, grasping its handle and slowly pulled the weapon out. Paleface kept her weapon ready and its sharp blade that had seen many battles was ready to spill more blood that it yearned; it was its sole purpose. It almost looked like she had fire in her eyes as she kept her glance tightly in the small group that had dared to intervene with her plans. Nicolas and his companions were afraid to move, because they all knew that Paleface would be able to swing her axe faster than anyone could act against her. Nicolas could feel the dread filling his heart, he had never been this terrified in his life. It was like a cold iron hand, grasping his heart so forcefully that he felt like it was freezing his blood. Frantically he was going through their options in his mind, but the more he was thinking about it, the more hopeless their situation seemed. There was no way Cedric could have enough time to put Paleface to sleep, she would probably cut his head off before he would manage to pluck the right strings. But what else could they do? They didn't have weapons – though it did come to his mind that they could steal weapons from the sleeping Nightfolks. But they were no warriors; Paleface could easily mow them down. Another dead end. While Nicolas was going through several scenarios in his mind – most of them ending in disaster – Paleface broke the tense silence: “Give the boy to me. Now.” After her demand, the lord's son hid behind Cedric and peeked fearfully from this hiding spot. Paleface gave them a minute to do what she had commanded, staring at the boy without blinking an eye. Since nothing happened after a short moment, she spoke again: “Your lives mean nothing to me. Give me the boy or I will cut you to pieces.” Her tone was serious and threatening. There was no doubt that she would be able to fulfill her threat. She took one step closer to the group and they correspondingly took a step backwards. Bit by bit the space started to feel significantly smaller than what it was a while ago. Nicolas couldn't take his eyes off of the great axe. He desperately wanted to run away, escape its bloodthirsty blade, but he knew that he couldn't possibly do that. But the panic kept growing, taking root inside his mind and he couldn't think properly anymore. Then he could hear a voice, barely audible than a whisper, and it came from Black Cat's mouth: “Use your magic, Nicolas.” Magic? He wanted for him to use magic? He didn't even know how it worked! All he could think about was running away. And unfortunately, Paleface had heard those silent words as well. Her fiery gaze got nailed at Nicolas and she stared at him intently, even thoughtfully. She stayed terrifyingly quiet for a moment, but then she spoke, though mostly muttering to herself: “So you're the wizard that I need…” Paleface was a quick thinker, like a good leader should. She took another step closer to the group, forcing them to back off even more – they all were painfully aware that this situation wouldn't last for long, especially because Paleface looked like she was ready to strike at any second. She was still staring at Nicolas, it almost felt like that she had forgotten the presence of the rest of the group. “You, wizard”, she addressed her words at Nicolas, “you are coming with me, along with the boy.” Nicolas was frozen with fear, he couldn't move an inch, everything he saw were the blazing eyes that wanted to scorch him entirely. He barely heard the shrill whimper that left the lord's son's mouth. It was almost like he had switched realities and was now trapped in a place where only dread resided. It didn't help at all what Paleface said next: “Get moving or I will cut you to pieces. I don't need your limbs.” She took one more step closer, but this time the young wizard wasn't able to move. His amber eyes were filled with horror, horrible visions running inside his mind. Then Paleface made one more step closer, but Nicolas couldn't move, he was captivated by the flames in her eyes. Slowly and menacingly Paleface took a couple of more steps forward, and from the subtle movements you could tell that she was ready to swing her axe, allowing it to taste young flesh and blood. She raised her weapon. One thought managed to cross the fog of terror in the mind of Nicolas: he would die now. This was the end. But something broke the spell of the blazing eyes and Nicolas could see a small black figure leaping towards Paleface: Black Cat. However, his size grew and his fur began to fade and soon he had taken the form of a young man with a black hair. His bushy tail didn't go anywhere though, and Nicolas noticed that his ears weren't the ones of a human, they belonged to some furry critter. Small bones that had been tied to the shreds of his vest were clattering as he moved smoothly. Bravely he plunged in front of their group and in a blink of an eye he created a magical bright shield with hues of blue and purple dancing in its core. Paleface's axe hit against it, causing sparks to fly around those two. Nicolas snapped out of his world of terror and was now staring at the clash of Black Cat and Paleface with wide eyes. There was still fear in his heart, but it kept decreasing as he watched how two completely different forces were fighting against each other. Paleface kept swinging her axe, but the magical shield Black Cat had made didn't show any signs of breaking. This only fueled Paleface's wrath and she attempted to crush the defense of the young man, but just like his shield, there was no indication of him getting tired. Sparks continued to fly in every direction as Paleface was relentlessly pounding against the protective spell. Nicolas, Cedric and the lord's son were watching in awe at this spectacular scene in front of them. Then Black Cat started to prepare for something else. The little group behind him could see how he was focusing his energy, but the Nightfolk leader wasn't aware of this as she couldn't see past through the shield. Spheres of golden glow began to gather at Black Cat's hands, creating even a bigger orb of light. Once it had charged long enough, Black Cat released its energy and a really bright explosion followed it. So blinding was the light of the burst that Nicolas couldn't look at it and covered his eyes with his arm – Cedric and the lord's son probably doing the same gesture. Once the light had faded, Nicolas could see what had just happened. Paleface had collapsed on the floor. It seemed like she was still alive, just unconscious at the moment. It wasn't surprising that after such incredible force had hit her that she would be knocked out. From her body, Nicolas' gaze shifted at the winner of this match. Black Cat had been standing back at the rest of the group and had remained in that position for a while. But finally he turned around and Nicolas could get a better look at him, seeing him for the first time in human form. Nicolas had to admit that Black Cat had very handsome facial features. He had a slightly narrow face and a bit of a beard on his chin. He still had the same deep blue eyes as in his cat form and his messy hair was just as black as his fur had been. Nicolas didn't know what he had expected Black Cat to look like in a human form, but he certainly hadn't anticipated for him to look that handsome. For a brief moment their gazes met and the two young men stared at each other. And Nicolas wondered, why did Black Cat always stay in the form of a cat? But before he managed to ask that question out loud, Black Cat had already started to turn into a cat again; his figure shrunk in size and his clothes and skin changed into a black fur. In a matter of a couple of seconds, he was now standing at his spot as a cat once more. “We should get moving”, Black Cat said as his transformation was complete. “She won't stay unconscious forever. We need to get the kid back to his father.” “I agree”, Cedric responded and started to already take steps towards the stairs. He partly glanced behind him where the lord's son had been hiding and asked him: “Can you show us the way to your father's room?” The little boy had recovered from his fright and was now just as enthusiastic as he had been when the group had set him free. He was already bouncing towards the stairs while he exclaimed: “Yeah, he's in one of the towers! I'll show you the way!” He was very energetic and also probably very excited to see his father again after such a long time and had begun to rush down the stairs so Nicolas, Black Cat and Cedric had to quicken their pace so they could follow his fast going. They were descending the stairs until they came back to the bottom floor where they had come from. In this labyrinth of corridors, the lord's son kept hurrying forward and the castle still seemed to slumber as their little group didn't encounter other living beings. Until they finally did. The group stopped on their tracks as soon as they noticed some movement in the shadows and they got tense immediately. However, they could let out a sigh of relief when it turned out that it was just a human guard, one of lord Alexander's men. The armored man came to a halt as well as he saw them and was then eyeing their little group curiously. But as soon as he realized who was leading them, his eyes widened from surprise. “Young master Kendrick!” he said and bowed down a little to the boy. “How good to see you safe and healthy! Did these people help you get out of the tower?” The boy nodded. “Yeah, we're going to my dad's room!” “Let me escort you there”, the guard suggested and smiled gently. “Okay!” Kendrick exclaimed on behalf of the whole group, however, no one had anything against this idea, actually, it felt more safe that they had a soldier with them in case they would run into trouble with Nightfolks. “Just follow me”, the guard said and turned around, heading to the darkness. The little group went after him, Kendrick at the front. It didn't take them long to get back to the great double doors which Nicolas had admired just a while ago. They still weren't going through them as the guard kept walking past the doors. Then they found themselves from yet another corridor which branched into many different passages and this section seemed very much identical with the one they had just traversed. And just like previously, the group was walking through the corridor by staying on the same path, but made a couple of turns here and there, and then found themselves from the root of another set of stairs. The guard began to climb them and so the group followed him. “Lord Alexander's bedroom is located on the highest tower”, the guard said. “So, be prepared for climbing.” Soon the group realized that the guard wasn't joking. The spiraling stairs just kept going higher and higher, passing many windows that revealed it was still dark outside. There were a few points in this journey to the lord's room when Nicolas thought that they should be almost at their destination, only to be proven that wasn't the case. At one instant the young wizard had pondered were the stairs endless, but right after this thought had entered his mind, they finally reached the highest platform. Everyone was panting more or less, but Kendrick seemed to have infinite energy and he quickly dashed towards the door of the only room there was, not bothering to knock as he did so. He wrenched the door open and hurried inside, disappearing from the group's sight for a brief moment. Nicolas, Black Cat, Cedric and the guard made it to the door just in time to witness a sweet reunion of father and son. “Dad!” Kendrick had shouted as he ran towards lord Alexander who had been doing something by the fireplace until he had been interrupted. “Kendrick!” Lord Alexander spread his arms and welcomed his son wholeheartedly, closing him in a tight hug. “I have missed you so much!” “I've missed you too, dad!” Kendrick replied while returning the tightest hug he could possibly do. The little group stayed at the door, spectating at their happy moment. It was so sweet to see them like this, loving each other. In that moment Nicolas, Black Cat and Cedric knew that rescuing the lord's son had been the right thing to do. They were all wearing smiles on their faces as they continued to watch the touching reunion. After some time lord Alexander raised his head to look at the group. He still looked tired, but his desperation had faded away, replaced by joy he probably hadn't felt in a long time. “You did it! You saved my son! Thank you so much!” Then he gave another tight hug to his son. But soon he released him and he looked at the guard. “Gather as many men as you can, Colton”, Alexander said. “Let's drive Nightfolks out of our town.” The guard gave a respectful bow to the lord. “Yes, sir.” And with that, the guard rushed to fulfill the lord's order. His heavy footsteps soon faded away and Alexander looked at Nicolas, Black Cat and Cedric. He let out a heavy sigh and shook his head. “It's unfortunate that things have come to this”, lord Alexander stated. “Skygold Town used to have a good relationship with the Nightfolks. But Paleface… she has changed everything.” “Do you know what her goal is?” Black Cat suddenly asked. Lord Alexander was mildly surprised to hear him speaking, he probably hadn't expected him to be able to talk. But he got over it soon and said: “She is preparing an attack against other Nightfolks. It's a sad story, really… She just wants to be acknowledged as a great warrior by the others. She has been discriminated against because of her fur color, white is considered as a color of weakness among her kind. It seems like she has had to prove her worth throughout her whole life because of it. Yes… she told me this just a while ago.” A recent memory of Paleface surfaced into Nicolas' mind. That tall and muscular body, the might she had when she was swinging her great axe… How could anyone think that she was weak? Nicolas couldn't understand that at all, but then again, he didn't know much about Nightfolks – or about Paleface. But after hearing lord Alexander's words, he felt sort of sad for the Nightfolk leader. “So… what's going to happen now?” Nicolas asked. “We will break the formations of the Nightfolks”, Alexander responded. “And hopefully force them out of the town. I truly wish that things will get normal again soon.” He smiled at the little group. “You have helped tremendously with freeing Skygold Town from the clutches of the Nightfolks. I promise that you will be rewarded, but not right now.” Lord Alexander walked to a small round table which had beautiful carvings on its sides. There was a tiny golden bell resting on it, but the lord picked it up and shook it, causing it to chime with a pleasing sound. Nicolas was also seeing a faint puff of blue dust coming out of it, but he wasn't sure if he had truly seen something. “Let me offer you a place to stay tonight. It's the least I can do”, lord Alexander said. “Thank you for your kindness”, Cedric said. “We appreciate it.” After a short moment, they could hear light footsteps coming from the stairs and soon a young man dressed in the simple servant's clothing appeared. He hurried to the lord's room and bowed down, ready to take orders from Alexander. “Take these men to the guest room”, the lord commanded. “Yes, sir”, the servant said. He was ready to leave and lead the little group, but before they managed to get going, Cedric stepped towards the lord and said: “I have a little word of advice, if you would be kind and listen.” Alexander made a gesture with his hand, encouraging the bard to say whatever was on his mind. “I'm all ears.” “We encountered Paleface when rescuing your son”, Cedric said. “And we… well, she was knocked out. She probably is very angry whenever she wakes up. I suggest that you protect yourself and your son from her wrath.” The lord nodded. “Thank you for telling me this. I'll send a few men to guard your room, since it's possible she will target you as well. Don't worry, I'll deal with her.” Then Nicolas, Black Cat and Cedric began to follow the servant, leaving the lord alone with his son. They started to descend the stairs, but didn't go all the way down. The servant guided them to one of the floors that felt like it was one of the middle ones. It was better lit than the bottom floor and seemed more spacious. The little group passed many windows and Nicolas noted that the sky had started to lighten; the dawn was about to come. They had been up all night, no wonder that he felt tired. Soon they found themselves walking on a well-lit hallway. It seemed quite homey and apparently this was their destination as the servant opened one of the many doors that could be accessed from this corridor. He held the door open for the little group and bowed down to them as they entered the room. “You can stay here. I wish you a good night”, he said and closed the door after them. His hurried receding steps was an indication that he had left them alone. Curiously Nicolas glanced around the guest room. It was quite a cozy place, there were five beds in total and there was a fireplace, even though there was no fire burning in it at that moment. The place was nicely furnished with small tables, chairs and cabinets. A huge window gave a fine view over Skygold Town, though since it was still dark, there wasn't much to see. “What a nice room”, Cedric said, mostly to himself as he let his gaze wander around the room, then he sat down on the edge of one of the beds. “Yeah, it's pretty cozy”, Nicolas admitted. He yawned and chose to take the bed that was closest to the window. Once he was by its side, he took off most of his clothes, leaving only his pants on. Then he decided to lay down, pulling the blanket over him, and he enjoyed how soft and comfortable his bed was. It had been a while since he had slept on a bed this pleasant. He closed his eyes, not really paying attention to what Black Cat and Cedric were doing. “Well, good night”, Nicolas managed to mumble to the other two. “Good night”, Black Cat and Cedric said in unison. This had been such a long night. It felt like days had passed… Nicolas had been captured by Nightfolks, then heard an awful confession from Edgar, but had soon been rescued by Black Cat and Cedric, only to get requested by lord Alexander to save his son… And then he met Paleface… It did bother him, though, the deal with the Nightfolk leader. She had been so fearsome, the way she had looked at him. She wanted him for some reason, but he still didn't know why. He could feel chills run down his spine as he remembered how Paleface had threatened to cut off his limbs. What if she would come to look for him while he's asleep? The thought gave him anxiety for the rest of the night, even though he tried to reassure himself that lord Alexander had planned to station some guards by their room. But Nicolas was so tired after this exhausting day that it didn't take long for him to fall asleep. And in his dreams, his worries conjured up nightmares about blazing eyes and a mighty axe that was thirsty for his blood.Velhon kissa - Luku 11Luku 11: Sekasorron alku Kukaan ei liikkunut. Nicolas ja hänen pieni ryhmänsä saattoivat vain tuijottaa pelonsekaisin silmin edessään olevaa lumivalkoista olentoa. Kalpeanaama sulki heidän tiensä, ollen täysin tietoinen tästä seikasta ja hän katsoi pientä ryhmää, mittaillen heitä hehkuvilla silmillään. Hänen katseessaan ei ollut käytännössä mitään tunteita, joten oli vaikea sanoa mitä hän ajatteli, mikä oli hänen lajilleen tyypillistä. Hyvin lyhyen hetken hänen katseensa vaelsi nukkuvaan Yönväen ryhmään, mutta pian hänen katseensa kiinnittyi jälleen Nicolakseen, Mustaan Kissaan, Cedriciin ja lordi Alexanderin poikaan. Sanoja ei vaihdettu, ilmassa oli vain jännitystä. Jokainen kuluva sekunti tuntui usealta minuutilta ja kaikki pysyivät paikallaan kuin jääpatsaat – kunnes Kalpeanaama päätti liikkua, mikä vain lisäsi jännitettä ilmassa. Hän tarttui selässään kantamaansa suureen taistelukirveeseensä, otti otteen sen kahvasta ja veti aseen hitaasti ulos. Kalpeanaama piti aseensa valmiina ja sen terävä terä, joka oli nähnyt monia taisteluita, oli valmis vuodattamaan lisää verta jota se kaipasi; se oli sen ainoa tarkoitus. Näytti melkein siltä, että hänen silmissään oli tulta kun hän piti katseensa tiukasti pienessä ryhmässä, joka oli uskaltanut puuttua hänen suunnitelmiinsa. Nicolas ja hänen toverinsa pelkäsivät liikkua, koska he kaikki tiesivät, että Kalpeanaama pystyisi heilauttamaan kirvestään nopeammin kuin kukaan ehtisi toimia häntä vastaan. Nicolas tunsi kauhun täyttävän sydämensä, hän ei ollut koskaan ollut näin kauhuissaan elämänsä aikana. Se oli kuin kylmä rautakäsi, joka tarttui hänen sydämeensä niin voimakkaasti, että hänestä tuntui kuin se jäädyttäisi hänen verensä. Kiihkeästi hän kävi läpi heidän vaihtoehtojaan mielessään, mutta mitä enemmän hän ajatteli sitä, sitä toivottomammalta heidän tilanteensa näytti. Cedricillä ei todellakaan voinut olla tarpeeksi aikaa nukuttaa Kalpeanaama, hän luultavasti leikkaisi hänen päänsä irti ennen kuin hän kykenisi näppäilemään oikeita kieliä. Mutta mitä muuta he voisivat tehdä? Heillä ei ollut aseita – vaikka hänelle tulikin mieleen, että he voisivat varastaa aseet nukkuvalta Yönväeltä. Mutta he eivät olleet sotureita; Kalpeanaama voisi helposti niittää heidät. Jälleen yksi umpikuja. Kun Nicolas kävi mielessään läpi useita skenaarioita – useimmat niistä päättyen katastrofiin – Kalpeanaama rikkoi jännittyneen hiljaisuuden: ”Antakaa poika minulle. Nyt.” Hänen vaatimuksensa jälkeen, lordin poika piiloutui Cedricin taakse ja kurkisti pelokkaasti tästä piilopaikasta. Kalpeanaama antoi heille hetken tehdä mitä oli käskenyt, tuijottaen poikaa silmää räpäyttämättä. Koska mitään ei tapahtunut tovin kuluttua, hän puhui uudelleen: ”Elämänne eivät merkitse minulle mitään. Antakaa minulle poika tai minä hakkaan teidät palasiksi.” Hänen äänensävynsä oli vakava ja uhkaava. Ei ollut epäilystäkään siitä, että hän pystyisi toteuttamaan uhkauksensa. Hän otti askeleen lähemmäs ryhmää ja he vastaavasti ottivat askeleen taaksepäin. Vähitellen tila alkoi tuntua huomattavasti pienemmältä kuin mitä se oli ollut hetki sitten. Nicolas ei voinut irrottaa katsettaan mahtavasta kirveestä. Hän halusi epätoivoisesti juosta karkuun, paeta sen verenhimoista terää, mutta tiesi, ettei kykenisi tekemään sitä. Mutta paniikki kasvoi, juurtuen hänen mieleensä, eikä hän voinut enää ajatella kunnolla. Sitten hän kuuli äänen, tuskin kuiskausta kuuluvampi, ja se kuului Mustan Kissan suusta: ”Käytä magiaasi, Nicolas.” Magiaa? Hän halusi hänen käyttävän taikuutta? Ei hän edes tiennyt kuinka se toimii! Hän ei voinut ajatella muuta kuin pakoon juoksemista. Ja valitettavasti Kalpeanaama oli myös kuullut nuo hiljaiset sanat. Hänen tulinen katseensa nauliutui Nicolakseen ja hän tuijotti tätä tiiviisti, jopa mietteliäästi. Hän oli hetken pelottavan hiljaa, mutta sitten hän puhui, vaikkakin enimmäkseen mutisten itselleen: ”Joten sinä olet se velho, jonka tarvitsen…” Kalpeanaama oli nopea ajattelija, kuten hyvän johtajan kuuluikin. Hän otti jälleen askeleen lähemmäksi ryhmää, pakottaen heidät perääntymään entistä enemmän – he kaikki olivat tuskallisen tietoisia siitä, että tämä tilanne ei kestäisi kauan, etenkin koska Kalpeanaama näytti siltä, että hän oli valmis iskemään hetkenä minä hyvänsä. Hän tuijotti edelleen Nicolasta, tuntui melkein kuin hän olisi unohtanut muun ryhmän läsnäolon. ”Sinä, velho”, hän osoitti sanansa Nicolakselle, ”sinä tulet mukaani pojan kanssa.” Nicolas oli jämähtänyt pelosta, hän ei pystynyt liikkumaan lainkaan, kaikki mitä hän näki olivat hehkuvat silmät, jotka halusivat polttaa hänet kokonaan. Hän tuskin kuuli kimeää vikinää joka pääsi lordin pojan suusta. Oli melkein kuin hän olisi vaihtanut todellisuutta ja oli nyt loukussa paikassa, jossa oli sijaa vain pelolle. Se, mitä Kalpeanaama sanoi seuraavaksi, ei auttanut yhtään: ”Alahan liikkua tai hakkaan sinut palasiksi. En tarvitse raajojasi.” Hän otti vielä askeleen lähemmäs, mutta tällä kertaa nuori velho ei pystynyt liikkumaan. Hänen meripihkanruskeat silmänsä olivat täyttyneet kauhusta, kamalien visioiden poukkoillen hänen mielessään. Sitten Kalpeanaama astui vielä yhden askeleen lähemmäksi, mutta Nicolas ei voinut liikkua, liekit Kalpeanaaman silmissä olivat vanginneet hänet. Hitaasti ja uhkaavasti Kalpeanaama otti vielä pari askelta eteenpäin, ja hienovaraisista liikkeistä saattoi päätellä, että hän oli valmis heilauttamaan kirvestään, antaen sen maistaa nuorta lihaa ja verta. Hän kohotti aseensa. Yksi ajatus onnistui läpäisemään kauhun sumun Nicolaksen mielessä: hän kuolisi nyt. Tämä oli loppu. Mutta jokin rikkoi leimuavien silmien lumouksen ja Nicolas näki pienen mustan hahmon loikkaavan kohti Kalpeanaamaa: Mustan Kissan. Kuitenkin, hänen kokonsa kasvoi ja turkkinsa alkoi kadota ja pian hän oli ottanut nuoren miehen hahmon, jolla oli mustat hiukset. Hänen tuuhea häntänsä ei kuitenkaan mennyt minnekään, ja Nicolas huomasi, että hänen korvansa eivät olleet ihmisen korvat, vaan kuuluivat jollekin karvaiselle otukselle. Pienet luut, jotka oli sidottu hänen liivinsä kaistaleisiin kalisivat hänen liikkuessa sulavasti. Rohkeasti hän syöksyi heidän ryhmänsä eteen ja loi silmänräpäyksessä maagisen kirkkaan kilven, jonka ytimessä tanssivat sinisen ja violetin sävyt. Kalpeanaaman kirves osui sitä vasten ja sai kipinät lentämään noiden kahden ympärillä. Nicolas havahtui pelon maailmastaan ja tuijotti nyt Mustan Kissan ja Kalpeanaaman yhteenottoa laajennein silmin. Hänen sydämessään oli edelleen pelkoa, mutta se väheni kun hän katseli kuinka kaksi täysin erilaista voimaa taisteli toisiaan vastaan. Kalpeanaama jatkoi kirveensä heiluttamista, mutta Mustan Kissan luoma maaginen kilpi ei osoittanut minkäänlaisia rikkoutumisen merkkejä. Tämä vain ruokki Kalpeanaaman vihaa ja hän yritti murskata nuoren miehen puolustuksen, mutta aivan kuten hänen kilpensä, merkkejä hänen väsymisestään ei ollut lainkaan. Kipinät lensivät edelleen joka suuntaan Kalpeanaaman hakatessa hellittämättä suojaavaa loitsua vastaan. Nicolas, Cedric ja lordin poika katselivat ällistyneenä tätä vaikuttavaa kohtausta edessään. Sitten Musta Kissa alkoi valmistautua johonkin muuhun. Pieni ryhmä hänen takanaan näki kuinka hän keskitti energiansa, mutta Yönväen johtaja ei ollut tietoinen tästä, koska hän ei nähnyt kilven lävitse. Kultaisena hehkuvia palloja alkoi kerääntyä Mustan Kissan käsien luokse, luoden entistä suuremman valopallon. Kun se oli latautunut tarpeeksi kauan, Musta Kissa vapautti sen energian ja todella kirkas räjähdys seurasi sitä. Purkauksen valo oli niin sokaiseva, että Nicolas ei voinut katsoa sitä ja peitti silmänsä käsivarrellaan – Cedric ja lordin poika luultavasti tekivät saman eleen. Kun valo oli himmennyt, Nicolas näki mitä oli juuri tapahtunut. Kalpeanaama oli luhistunut lattialle. Näytti siltä, että hän oli vielä elossa, vain tajuttomana sillä hetkellä. Ei ollut yllättävää että sen jälkeen kun niin uskomaton voima oli osunut häneen, hänet oli täysin tyrmätty. Nicolaksen katse siirtyi hänen kehostaan tämän ottelun voittajaan. Musta Kissa oli seissyt selkä muuhun ryhmään päin ja pysynyt siinä asennossa jonkin aikaa. Mutta lopulta hän kääntyi ympäri ja Nicolas pystyi katsomaan häntä tarkemmin, nähden hänet ensimmäistä kertaa ihmisen hahmossa. Nicolas joutui myöntämään että Mustalla Kissalla oli erittäin komeat kasvonpiirteet. Hänellä oli hieman kapeat kasvot ja pikkuisen partaa leuassa. Hänellä oli edelleen samat syvänsiniset silmät kuin kissan hahmossa ja hänen sotkuiset hiuksensa olivat yhtä mustat kuin hänen turkkinsakin. Nicolas ei tiennyt, miltä hän oli odottanut Mustan Kissan näyttävän ihmismuodossa, mutta hän ei todellakaan ollut odottanut hänen näyttävän niin komealta. Hetkeksi heidän katseensa kohtasivat ja kaksi nuorta miestä tuijottivat toisiaan. Ja Nicolas ihmetteli, miksi Musta Kissa pysyi aina kissan hahmossa? Mutta ennen kuin hän onnistui esittämään tämän kysymyksen ääneen, Musta Kissa oli jo alkanut muuttua jälleen kissaksi; hänen kehonsa kutistui ja hänen vaatteensa ja ihonsa muuttuivat mustaksi turkiksi. Muutamassa sekunnissa hän seisoi paikallaan jälleen kissana. ”Meidän pitäisi lähteä liikkeelle”, Musta Kissa sanoi kun hänen muodonmuutoksensa oli valmis. ”Hän ei pysy tajuttomana ikuisesti. Meidän on saatava lapsi takaisin isänsä luo.” ”Olen samaa mieltä”, Cedric vastasi ja alkoi jo astua portaita kohti. Hän katsoi osittain taakseen, missä lordin poika oli piileskellyt ja kysyi häneltä: ”Voitko näyttää meille tien isäsi huoneeseen?” Pikkupoika oli toipunut pelostaan ja oli nyt yhtä innostunut kuin silloin, kun ryhmä oli vapauttanut hänet. Hän pomppi jo portaita kohti samalla kun huudahti: ”Joo, hän on yhdessä torneista! Minä näytän tien!” Hän oli erittäin energinen ja luultavasti myös hyvin innoissaan nähdessään isänsä jälleen niin pitkän ajan jälkeen ja oli jo alkanut kiiruhtaa portaita alas, joten Nicolas, Musta Kissa ja Cedric joutuivat nopeuttamaan vauhtiaan, jotta voisivat seurata hänen nopeaa menoaan. He laskeutuivat portaita alas, kunnes tulivat takaisin alimpaan kerrokseen, josta he olivat tulleet. Tässä käytävien labyrintissa lordin poika kiiruhti eteenpäin ja linna vaikutti edelleen uinuvan, koska heidän pieni ryhmänsä ei kohdannut muita eläviä olentoja. Kunnes he lopulta kohtasivat. Ryhmä pysähtyi paikoilleen heti, kun he huomasivat liikettä varjoissa ja he jännittyivät välittömästi. He saattoivat kuitenkin huokaista helpotuksesta, kun kävi ilmi, että kyseessä oli vain ihmisvartija, yksi lordi Alexanderin miehistä. Haarniskoitu mies pysähtyi myöskin kun hän näki heidät ja silmäili sitten heidän pientä ryhmäänsä uteliaana. Mutta heti kun hän tajusi kuka heitä johti, hänen silmänsä laajenivat hämmästyksestä. ”Nuori herra Kendrick!” hän sanoi ja kumarsi hieman pojalle. ”Kuinka upeaa nähdä sinut turvassa ja terveenä! Auttoivatko nämä ihmiset sinua pääsemään pois tornista?” Poika nyökkäsi. ”Joo, olemme menossa isäni huoneeseen!” ”Sallikaa minun saattaa teidät sinne”, vartija ehdotti ja hymyili lempeästi. ”Okei!” Kendrick huudahti koko ryhmän puolesta, mutta kenelläkään ei ollut mitään tätä ajatusta vastaan, itse asiassa tuntui turvallisemmalta, että heillä oli mukanaan sotilas siltä varalta, jos he joutuisivat hankaluuksiin Yönväen kanssa. ”Seuratkaa vain minua”, vartija sanoi ja kääntyi ympäri, suunnaten pimeyteen. Pieni ryhmä meni hänen peräänsä, Kendrick etummaisena. Ei kestänyt kauaa päästä takaisin upeiden pariovien luo, joita Nicolas oli ihaillut hetki sitten. He eivät vieläkään menneet niistä läpi vartijan jatkaessa kävelyään ovien ohi. Sitten he löysivät itsensä jälleen toisesta käytävästä, joka haarautui moniin eri taipaleisiin ja tämä osuus vaikutti hyvin samankaltaiselta sen kanssa josta he olivat juuri kulkeneet. Ja aivan kuten aiemminkin, ryhmä kulki käytävän läpi pysyen samalla polulla, mutta teki pari käännöstä siellä täällä ja sitten löysivät itsensä toisten portaiden juurelta. Vartija alkoi kiivetä niitä ja niin ryhmä seurasi häntä. ”Lordi Alexanderin makuuhuone sijaitsee korkeimmassa tornissa”, vartija sanoi. ”Olkaa siis valmiita kiipeämään.” Pian ryhmä ymmärsi, että vartija ei vitsaillut. Kierteilevät portaat vain nousivat yhä korkeammalle, ohittaen monia ikkunoita, jotka paljastivat, että ulkona oli vielä pimeää. Tällä matkalla lordin huoneeseen oli muutamia kohtia, kun Nicolas oli ajatellut, että heidän pitäisi olla melkein perillä, vain osoittautuen ettei asia ollutkaan niin. Yhden kotvasen nuori velho oli pohtinut, olivatko portaat loputtomat, mutta heti kun tämä ajatus oli tullut hänen mieleensä, he saavuttivat lopulta korkeimman tasanteen. Kaikki huohottivat enemmän tai vähemmän, mutta Kendrickillä vaikutti olevan äärettömästi energiaa ja hän ryntäsi nopeasti kohti ainokaista huoneen ovea joka tuolla oli, vaivautumatta koputtamaan. Hän tempaisi oven auki ja kiiruhti sisään, kadoten hetkeksi ryhmän näkyvistä. Nicolas, Musta Kissa, Cedric ja vartija pääsivät ovelle juuri ajoissa todistaakseen isän ja pojan suloista jälleennäkemistä. ”Isä!” Kendrick oli huutanut juostessaan kohti lordi Alexanderia, joka oli tehnyt jotain takkatulen ääressä, kunnes hänet oli keskeytetty. ”Kendrick!” Lordi Alexander levitti kätensä ja toivotti poikansa tervetulleeksi täysin sydämin, sulkien hänet tiukkaan halaukseen. ”Olen ikävöinyt sinua niin paljon!” ”Minullakin on ollut ikävä sinua, isä!” Kendrick vastasi samalla kun iski takaisin tiukimman halauksen, jonka hän kykeni antamaan. Pieni ryhmä jäi ovelle, seuraten heidän onnellista hetkeään. Oli niin ihanaa nähdä heidät sillä tavalla, rakastamassa toisiaan. Sillä hetkellä Nicolas, Musta Kissa ja Cedric tiesivät, että lordin pojan pelastaminen oli ollut oikein. Heillä kaikilla oli hymy kasvoillaan heidän katsoessa koskettavaa jälleennäkemistä. Jonkin ajan kuluttua lordi Alexander nosti päänsä katsoakseen ryhmää. Hän näytti edelleen väsyneeltä, mutta hänen epätoivonsa oli haihtunut ja tilalle oli tullut ilo, jota hän ei luultavasti ollut tuntenut pitkään aikaan. ”Teitte sen! Pelastitte poikani! Kiitos niin paljon!” Sitten hän antoi toisen tiukan halauksen pojalleen. Mutta pian hän vapautti hänet ja katsoi vartijaa. ”Kokoa niin monta miestä kuin pystyt, Colton”, Alexander sanoi. ”Ajetaan Yönväki pois kaupungistamme.” Vartija kumarsi kunnioittavasti lordille. ”Kyllä herra.” Ja täten vartija kiiruhti täyttämään lordin käskyn. Hänen raskaat askeleensa kaikkoontuivat pian ja Alexander katsoi Nicolasta, Mustaa Kissaa ja Cedriciä. Hän huokaisi raskaasti ja pudisti päätään. ”On valitettavaa, että asiat ovat päätyneet tähän”, lordi Alexander totesi. ”Taivaankullan kaupungilla oli aiemmin hyvät suhteet Yönväen kanssa. Mutta Kalpeanaama… hän on muuttanut kaiken.” ”Tiedätkö, mikä hänen tavoitteensa on?” Musta Kissa kysyi yhtäkkiä. Lordi Alexander oli lievästi yllättynyt kuullessaan hänen puhuvan, hän ei luultavasti ollut odottanut hänen pystyvän puhumaan. Mutta hän toipui siitä pian ja sanoi: ”Hän valmistelee hyökkäystä muuta Yönväkeä vastaan. Se on oikeastaan surullinen tarina… Hän vain haluaa, että muut tunnustaisivat hänet suurena soturina. Häntä on syrjitty turkkinsa värin takia, valkoista pidetään heikkouden värinä hänen lajinsa keskuudessa. Vaikuttaa siltä, että hänen on täytynyt todistaa arvonsa koko elämänsä ajan sen takia. Aivan… hän kertoi tämän minulle vähän aikaa sitten.” Nicolaksen mieleen nousi tuore muisto Kalpeanaamasta. Tuo pitkä ja lihaksikas keho, se voima, joka hänellä oli kun hän oli heiluttanut suurta kirvestään… Kuinka joku saattoi ajatella hänen olevan heikko? Nicolas ei ymmärtänyt sitä ollenkaan, mutta toisaalta, hän ei tiennyt paljoakaan Yönväestä – tai Kalpeanaamasta. Mutta kuultuaan lordi Alexanderin sanat, hän tunsi hieman surua Yönväen johtajaa kohtaan. ”Joten… mitä nyt tapahtuu?” Nicolas kysyi. ”Me rikomme Yönväen muodostelmat”, Alexander vastasi. ”Ja toivottavasti pakotamme heidät pois kaupungista. Toivon todella, että asiat normalisoituvat pian.” Hän hymyili pienelle ryhmälle. ”Olette auttaneet valtavasti vapauttamaan Taivaankullan kaupungin Yönväen kynsistä. Lupaan, että teidät palkitaan, mutta ei juuri nyt.” Lordi Alexander käveli pienen pyöreän pöydän luo, jonka sivuilla oli kauniita kaiverruksia. Sen päällä lepäsi pieni kultainen kello, mutta lordi poimi sen ja ravisteli sitä, jolloin se soi miellyttävällä äänellä. Nicolas oli myös näkevinään heikon pöllähdyksen sinistä tomua tulevan siitä ulos, mutta hän ei ollut varma, oliko hän todella nähnyt jotain. ”Sallikaa minun tarjota teille yöpymispaikka täksi yöksi. Se on vähintä, mitä voin tehdä”, lordi Alexander sanoi. ”Kiitoksia ystävällisyydestänne”, Cedric sanoi. ”Me arvostamme sitä.” Pienen hetken kuluttua he kuulivat kevyitä askeleita portaista ja pian ilmestyi yksinkertaisiin palvelijan vaatteisiin pukeutunut nuori mies. Hän kiiruhti lordin huoneeseen ja kumarsi, valmiina ottamaan vastaan käskyjä Alexanderilta. ”Vie nämä miehet vierashuoneeseen”, lordi käski. ”Kyllä, herra”, palvelija sanoi. Hän oli valmis lähtemään ja johdattamaan pientä ryhmää, mutta ennen kuin he pääsivät liikkeelle, Cedric astui lordia kohti ja sanoi: ”Minulla olisi pieni neuvo, jos olisitte ystävällinen ja kuuntelisitte.” Alexander teki kädellään eleen, joka rohkaisi bardia sanomaan, mitä hänellä oli mielessään. ”Olen pelkkänä korvana.” ”Kohtasimme Kalpeanaaman pelastaessamme poikaasi”, Cedric sanoi. ”Ja me… no, hänet tyrmättiin. Hän on luultavasti hyvin vihainen heti kun hän herää. Ehdotan, että suojelet itseäsi ja poikaasi hänen vihaltaan.” Lordi nyökkäsi. ”Kiitos kun kerroit tämän minulle. Lähetän muutaman miehen vartioimaan huonettanne, koska on mahdollista, että hän ottaa kohteekseen myös teidät. Älkää huoliko, minä hoitelen hänet.” Sitten Nicolas, Musta Kissa ja Cedric alkoivat seurata palvelijaa jättäen lordin yksin poikansa kanssa. He alkoivat laskeutua portaita, mutta eivät menneet ihan alas asti. Palvelija ohjasi heidät yhteen kerroksista, joka tuntui olevan yksi keskimmäisistä. Se oli paremmin valaistu kuin pohjakerros ja näytti tilavammalta. Pieni ryhmä ohitti monia ikkunoita ja Nicolas huomasi, että taivas oli alkanut vaalentua; aamunkoitto oli tulossa. He olivat olleet valveilla koko yön, ei ihme, että hän tunsi itsensä väsyneeksi. Pian he huomasivat kävelevänsä hyvin valaistulla käytävällä. Se vaikutti melko kodikkaalta ja ilmeisesti tämä oli heidän määränpäänsä, kun palvelija avasi yhden monista ovista, joihin pääsi tästä käytävästä. Hän piti ovea auki pienelle ryhmälle ja kumarsi heille heidän astuessaan sisään huoneeseen. ”Voitte oleskella täällä. Toivotan teille hyvää yötä”, hän sanoi ja sulki oven heidän perässään. Hänen kiireiset, loittonevat askeleensa olivat merkki siitä, että hän oli jättänyt heidät keskenään. Nicolas vilkuili uteliaana ympärilleen vierashuoneessa. Se oli varsin kodikas paikka, sänkyjä oli yhteensä viisi ja siellä oli takka, vaikkakin siinä ei sillä hetkellä palanut tulta. Paikka oli kauniisti sisustettu pienillä pöydillä, tuoleilla ja kaapeilla. Valtava ikkuna avasi hienot näkymät Taivaankullan kaupunkiin, mutta koska oli vielä pimeää, ei paljon nähtävää ollut. ”Onpa kiva huone”, Cedric sanoi enimmäkseen itselleen antaen katseensa vaeltaa ympäri huonetta, sitten hän istuutui yhden sängyn reunalle. ”Joo, se on aika viihtyisä”, Nicolas myönsi. Hän haukotteli ja päätti ottaa sängyn, joka oli lähinnä ikkunaa. Kun hän oli sen vieressä, hän riisui suurimman osan vaatteistaan ja jätti vain housunsa päälle. Sitten hän päätti mennä makuulle vetäen peiton päälleen ja nautti siitä, kuinka pehmeä ja mukava hänen petinsä oli. Siitä oli aikaa, kun hän oli nukkunut näin miellyttävässä sängyssä. Hän sulki silmänsä juurikaan kiinnittämättä huomiota siihen, mitä Musta Kissa ja Cedric tekivät. ”No, hyvää yötä”, Nicolas onnistui mutisemaan kahdelle muulle. ”Hyvää yötä”, Musta Kissa ja Cedric sanoivat yhteen ääneen. Tämä oli ollut niin pitkä yö. Tuntui kuin päiviä olisi kulunut… Yönväki oli vanginnut Nicolaksen, sitten hän oli kuullut kauhean tunnustuksen Edgarilta, mutta pian Musta Kissa ja Cedric olivat pelastaneet hänet, vain jotta lordi Alexander oli pyytänyt heitä pelastamaan poikansa… Ja sitten hän tapasi Kalpeanaaman… Se kuitenkin häiritsi häntä, tämä juttu Yönväen johtajan kanssa. Hän oli ollut niin pelottava, se miten hän oli katsonut häntä. Hän halusi hänet jostain syystä, mutta hän ei silti tiennyt miksi. Hän tunsi kylmien väreiden kulkevan pitkin selkärankaa, kun hän muisti kuinka Kalpeanaama oli uhannut katkaista hänen raajansa. Mitä jos hän tulisi etsimään häntä hänen nukkuessaan? Ajatus sai hänet ahdistuneeksi loppuyön ajaksi, vaikka hän yritti vakuuttaa itselleen, että lordi Alexander oli aikonut sijoittaa vartijoita heidän huoneensa luokse. Mutta Nicolas oli niin väsynyt tämän uuvuttavan päivän jälkeen, ettei mennyt kauaa, ennen kuin hän nukahti. Ja hänen unissaan, hänen huolensa loihtivat esiin painajaisia hehkuvista silmistä ja mahtavasta kirveestä, joka janosi hänen vertaan.The Wizard's Cat - Chapter 10Chapter 10: Rescue Nicolas' heart was heavy at that moment. His mind had fallen into deep depths of depression, anxiety and desperation filling his soul. He was grasping his cape tightly; it was his only comfort in that dark time. He wasn't sure how much time had passed since the Nightfolks had shut him in his cell with Edgar. Even though he had the older man in there in the same cell, he felt lonelier than ever. It was like he had been betrayed by everyone in the world, completely abandoned inside deep stone. Nicolas was in such an awful mood that he hadn't even eaten anything, even though his captors had brought bread and water for him and Edgar. The thief had taken his portion of their indigent meal and had left the rest for the young wizard, but Nicolas just couldn't put anything in his mouth. “Even if you don't want to, you should eat something”, Edgar had tried to encourage him. “You need strength.” Strength for what? Nicolas didn't utter a single word, he just didn't want to talk to the older man at all. He kept his bitter thoughts to himself, but Edgar probably sensed them anyway, as he remained silent as well, dwelling in his own mind. They just sat there in silence with anguished hearts, the only sounds they heard was from the neighboring cells. Some people were muttering something, but kept their voices so low that Nicolas couldn't understand what they were saying. Someone was weeping and the young wizard felt sorry for that poor soul; he sort of wanted to cry as well. Then he heard someone screaming in her sleep, speaking of visions of horror, that Skygold Town would get filled with blood. It made Nicolas wonder if she was truly seeing into the near future or was she just having nightmares. Whatever the case was, Nicolas hoped that her visions wouldn't become reality. At some point the young wizard started to ponder what time of the day was. They were locked up so deep that there weren't any windows, so it was hard to tell the time. But did it matter though? He felt so anxious that he couldn't even think about sleeping and it seemed like this applied to Edgar as well. The older man looked exhausted, but perhaps he was plagued by such a horrible amount of guilt that he couldn't close his eyes. Nicolas did feel a bit of sympathy for him, even though he didn't want to. It almost felt like that time had frozen, that this place was forsaken by the universe, and so it was impossible to tell how much time had passed. And because they all were abandoned down here and no one was coming to see how they were doing, apart from that one moment when food got brought, it started to become more likely that they were floating inside of a small parallel world. Nicolas couldn't help but think nasty and dark thoughts, and he did scold himself for doing that, but such notions were persistent and he couldn't reap them. However, light would soon shine into the dark world. Suddenly Nicolas heard the horrid screech of the metal door which was guarding the prison. Even in his desperate state he became curious about who had just come through it, this was a sign that they weren't completely abandoned by the outside world. Was someone bringing them more food and water? Or was one of the cells getting a new inmate? Or – the most horrible and stomach twisting possibility he could think of – were the Nightfolks now coming to get him and use him for whatever they were planning to do? All of his focus was now in listening to who could possibly be descending the stairs into the prison. He tried his best to listen carefully, but all he could hear were light footsteps coming down, and he could swear that there was only one person coming closer. It was strange… The footsteps were so perplexingly light, they couldn't possibly belong to a beastman. Then who could it be? Nicolas was tense and had his gaze fixed on the corridor – well, to the small part he was able to see from his cell – hoping to catch a glimpse of the person who had dared to come down here. In the light of a torch, a small dark figure came into view – and Nicolas couldn't believe his eyes. It was the black cat. He had come for him after all! In that moment, the young wizard's anxieties and feelings of loneliness and betrayal were washed away, so incredibly happy he was to see the black cat. His optimism was back and things didn't seem so desperate anymore. Nicolas basically bounced up and took a hold of the bars of his cell and followed with his gaze how the black cat walked closer and closer with soundless steps. Then Nicolas realized that indeed, no noise of footsteps came from his soft paws, so whom did those light footsteps belong to? He got an answer to this question as soon as some foreign man came to his view. The man was a little older person who was dressed in the bard's colorful clothes. In his hands he was carrying a musical instrument which resembled a lute. And in one hand he was also grasping a bunch of keys. But soon the young wizard's gaze bounced back to the black cat. “I'm so glad to see you!” he said to his travel companion. “But how did you get in here? I saw Nightfolks guarding every door.” “It was rather simple”, the black cat answered and looked at the bard. “This man was able to play music that put Nightfolks in a deep sleep!” “That… That's actually pretty incredible”, Nicolas said while the bard opened the cell. “Thank you, sir. How can I repay your kindness?” “Ah, you don't owe me anything”, the man spoke with a gentle smile on his face. “I'm simply doing what is right and I firmly believe freeing you is for the greater good.” “Oh… Okay.” Nicolas was a bit fazed by these words and didn't completely understand what the man meant. “Uh… My name is Nicolas, nice to meet you, sir.” “Cedric”, the bard replied and extended his hand, Nicolas grabbed it and they shook their hands. “And this is”, the young wizard said as he pointed at his little companion, “uh… Black… Cat?” The young man in cat's form didn't say anything, but there was a spark in his deep blue eyes, but what that meant, Nicolas couldn't say. At this point, Edgar, who had stayed in the background this whole time, managed to get on his feet and tried sneakily slip away. Awkwardly he bypassed all the others, gave a weird apologetic glance at them before he left the scene, and ran away. Nicolas watched his receding figure and that was the last time he saw Edgar in this life. “Well”, Cedric spoke suddenly, “let's cause a little bit of mayhem for our friends.” The bard began his little tour around the prison and opened every single door so the prisoners could get out. Some of them dashed out right away, while some were a bit puzzled by their sudden freedom and had sluggish movements. Few of them thanked Cedric while some remained quiet. But in the end, everyone was free and no one missed their dark and reeking cells. They all disappeared from sight just like Edgar and soon only Nicolas, Black Cat and Cedric remained at the prison. “We should get going”, Black Cat suggested and began to walk towards the stairs. Nicolas and Cedric simply nodded and then all three of them headed to the stairway. They ascended with a rather quick pace and shortly came to the metal door which was now gaping open. Nicolas noticed that there were still few beastmen by the door, but they were lying on the floor, snoring loudly. The trio tiptoed past them, even though they seemed to be fast asleep and hadn't woken up although every other prisoner had already bypassed them. They climbed the stairs all the way up, panting a little bit after this performance and they started their task of finding the way out of the castle. Nicolas hoped that his two companions knew where to go since he had become so disoriented when some of the Nightfolks had escorted him and Edgar through the zigzagging corridors. And indeed, Black Cat managed to get their little group to the grand hall of the castle where the red carpet was leading the way right into the darkness. Before Nicolas was able to open his mouth to ask what their plan was, a voice, a tormented and weary voice, came from the dark: “Who are you people?” The gazes of all three of them got drawn to the direction where the voice had come from and they saw a tall man who was dressed in noble clothing, indicating that he was an important person. He was standing in the dark, barely visible in the light of the candles. His brown eyes were gleaming in the dim light and there was a curious but also cautious look in them. “I don't recognize you”, the man said. “You look like you're not from here. Let me ask you again: who are you?” Nicolas nor Black Cat couldn't even speak before Cedric had come forth and bowed respectfully to the man and said: “Ah, greetings, lord Alexander. We are just humble travelers, caught in this mess Nightfolks have unfortunately cooked.” Lord Alexander let out a heavy sigh. “Yes, I'm awfully sorry about it. But my hands are tied, I can't do anything to resolve the situation.” “May I ask you, my lord, why is that?” Cedric inquired. “I suppose I can tell you”, Alexander responded, suddenly looking even more exhausted than the moment before. “I'm tired and desperate, even terrified. It's all because Nightfolks have captured my son.” “Your son?” Cedric was surprised, and so was Nicolas and Black Cat. “Yes. He's being held in one of the towers, heavily guarded by Nightfolks”, Alexander told. “If I do anything against these barbarians, they will hurt my son… or worse.” “Hmm, that is indeed troublesome”, Cedric admitted. “Please, save my son.” The trio got completely bewildered by these words as soon as they left lord's mouth. The poor man looked like he was on the verge of a total breakdown, there was a pleading expression on his face. It seemed like this was his last resort, to ask for help from travelers he hadn't even seen before. “But… what can we do?” Nicolas asked after a brief moment had passed. “My men can't approach the guarding Nightfolks”, the lord said. “They'll get aggressive immediately. But you… you don't look threatening at all. You may have a chance. I don't know how you can do it, but… Please… you're my only hope.” The trio exchanged looks with each other. They hadn't expected at all that they would get caught up in a situation like this. But they didn't really have the heart to say no to a man this desperate. Nicolas felt anxious about this – he wasn't a hero – and the look in Black Cat's eyes told that he was't feeling thrilled, either. But Cedric seemed very calm and had a gentle expression on his face and at that moment, he made the decision for them all. “We will do it”, he said. “Can you point us in the direction we need to go?” “Oh, thank you, thank you!” A spark of hope was lit in Alexander's tired and desperate eyes. “Walk through this hallway towards the throne room. When you're at the doors, turn right and continue forward. Keep going until you come across a set of stairs. Climb them all the way to the top and you'll get to the exact tower. Nightfolks are guarding the door to the room where my son is held, so you'll know when you've found the right place.” Nicolas was a little confused by these instructions and had a hard time memorizing them, but thankfully it looked like Cedric had managed to internalize them well. “Thank you, my lord”, Cedric spoke and bowed to Alexander once more. “We will go and rescue your son right away.” “Good luck”, lord Alexander said, his voice being barely more audible than a whisper. “Let's go then”, the bard stated to Nicolas and Black Cat and they began to follow the red carpet into the belly of the castle. Lord Alexander stared at them as long as he could before darkness devoured them. Then he left the scene as well, going his own ways. But he nor the trio hadn't been aware that in the darkness there had been a spy, listening to their talk. And as soon as they had left the grand hall, the spy swiftly disappeared, desiring to find Paleface as fast as he could. Nicolas, Black Cat and Cedric walked through the hallway under the surveillance of the paintings that portrayed the lords of the past. Their frozen gazes looked eerie in the dim light of the candles and Nicolas felt like they weren't the only ones following their journey, there was something weird about the shadows. But he tried to brush it off, deeming that his imagination was just going wild and focused on walking. Cedric was at the head of their little convoy while Nicolas and Black Cat followed behind him. “So, uh…” Nicolas tried to find the right words. “Cedric, are you a mage as well?” “Not exactly”, Cedric answered with a soft voice. “Let's just say that my instrument… it's magical.” “Oh, alright”, Nicolas said, being eager to know more but didn't dare to speak the words. “Well, what's your story? I mean, how did you end up here?” “Oh, there's nothing special in my journey”, the bard chirped cheerfully. “I'm just like any other bard, traveling around the world, singing about heroes and adventures and royalty. I came to Skygold Town and got stuck like everybody else. I've been here for a while, observing the situation.” “But you could have escaped, right?” the young wizard inquired. “Black Cat said you can put Nightfolks in a deep sleep. Why haven't you used that?” “Well, I haven't really had an urgent need to leave”, Cedric admitted. “I want to see with my own eyes when the crisis of Skygold Town gets resolved. Besides, you put too much trust in my abilities, Nicolas. My music can't fix everything.” “Oh, okay…” After that, the trio kept going in complete silence. But it didn't take for long when they were able to distinguish a set of decorative doors appearing in front of them. Nicolas was in total awe and stopped to admire the great double doors. They were red and had absolutely gorgeous wood carvings on them, making beautiful and complex curls that represented vines and leaves and flowers. The doors were a magnificent piece of art, made by the most skilled craftsmen in the region. It really suited the place, considering how wealthy town Skygold Town was. Nicolas was curious to know what the throne room behind these doors looked like, but they weren't sightseeing here, so he turned right to follow Cedric and Black Cat who had managed to get a bit distance, but the young wizard soon caught them and they continued to advance deeper into the castle as a group. The corridor felt almost endless. It branched into many other passages and once again Nicolas wondered how long it would take for anyone to memorize the layout of the castle. He was sure he would have gotten lost already if they had strayed from their path even once. But since their little group was going forward only, he didn't have to worry about it. And in addition, he wasn't wandering through these hallways by himself and at that moment he was really glad he had Black Cat and Cedric with him. The castle was eerily silent. And because the trio didn't encounter anyone on their little journey, it made the place feel like there were no living beings around; no humans, no Nightfolks. It was probably because it was nighttime, as Nicolas noticed when they finally passed some windows. The world was completely dark and he wondered if it was a new moon tonight. But since it was pointless to try looking into the utter darkness, he didn't give more attention to the view the windows offered and just continued to walk forward with his companions. Finally they came to a set of stairs. They were made of stone and spiraled upwards. At this point Nicolas started to feel really anxious about their mission and he did notice some tension in the air, so probably Black Cat and Cedric felt the same. But without uttering a single word, they started to climb the stairs. Torches had been placed at regular gaps to illuminate this part of the castle and they were casting playful shadows along the way of the group. They passed many different floors as they kept climbing higher and higher, but at some point, they all were left behind and there was nothing but stairs leading to the tower. It felt like the longest set of stairs in the young wizard's life. Then they came at the top. Few final steps and they found themselves from a platform. There was only one door, nothing else, and that door was guarded by Nightfolks; it was exactly how Alexander had described. Five beastmen were in a formation before the door and the gazes of all of them hit the trio as soon as they came forth. But what were they thinking of their little group, it was hard to tell as they were as expressionless as always. Nicolas nervously glanced at the sharp weapons of the Nightfolks: spears, axes, short swords… So threatening, so deadly. But Cedric, who had already turned out to be a brave man, stepped in front of the beastmen while plucking the strings of his instrument. “Leave immediately”, one of the Nightfolks commanded bluntly. “There's nothing for you here.” “Pardon, but I think you need to take a break for a little bit”, Cedric said while smiling. Then he began to play music. It was one of the most beautiful songs Nicolas had ever heard. The melody was tranquil and Cedric played it slowly, which inflicted strange calmness into the young wizard's mind. He started to feel drowsy and content, it was like his head was getting filled with soft haze, washing away all the worries and negativity. He lost almost completely his sense of the situation as the feeling of bliss conquered his body. “Nicolas! Nicolas!” It wasn't until that point when Nicolas snapped out of the weird trance. It was Black Cat's voice that had pierced through his hazy state. He looked at the direction of Black Cat who seemed like Cedric's music hadn't affected him at all. “I'm sorry, I…” Nicolas struggled to find the right words. “I just got this weird feeling and…” “Oh, don't worry”, Cedric then chirped. “That happens sometimes even to those I'm not targeting, but less likely if you have heard my music before. Now, let's go in.” That's when Nicolas noticed that the group of Nightfolk guardians had fallen asleep. They could access the door now. Although they knew that Cedric's music was very effective, they still tiptoed past the guardians and opened the door carefully before slipping in. The sound of fire cracking in the fireplace was one of the first things Nicolas registered as they stepped in. It offered a little bit of dim light into the relatively small room. It was furnished nicely, fitting even for a king. Nicolas got a feeling that for being a captive, the lord's son still had a nice place to be in. Then his gaze wandered to a decorative – and maybe a little too big – bed where a small figure was sleeping soundly. The trio walked towards this little one and once they had reached the bed, Cedric began to gently shake him awake. “Uh… huh?” The little boy slowly woke up. He yawned and opened his eyes. He was so young still, couldn't possibly be older than ten years old. “Who are you?” “We are here to take you to your father”, Cedric answered gently and smiled at the little boy. “Really?” Suddenly the child was up and ready to go. “I haven't seen my dad for a long time! The pigmen have kept me here forever! Let's go!” He had swung his little legs to the floor and was ready to leave already. He had already managed to run to the door when Nicolas, Black Cat and Cedric were just preparing to leave the room. The little boy was waiting for them to catch up and swiftly their group left the room and headed back to the stairs where they had come from. However, before they managed to get to the first steps, they noticed that someone was coming. Suddenly the little group froze and watched how the figure climbed the stairs all the way up. It was one of the Nightfolks, but more muscular and taller than most. This individual also had snow-white fur. Nicolas hadn't seen her before, but he had a strong guess who was now standing before him, fiery eyes blazing. It was Paleface.Velhon kissa - Luku 10Luku 10: Pelastus Nicolaksen sydän oli raskas tuolla hetkellä. Hänen mielensä oli vaipunut syvään masennukseen, ahdistuksen ja epätoivon täyttäessä hänen sieluaan. Hän oli takertunut viittaansa tiukasti; se oli hänen ainoa lohtunsa tuona synkkänä hetkenä. Hän ei ollut varma, kuinka kauan aikaa oli kulunut siitä, kun Yönväki oli sulkenut hänet selliinsä Edgarin kanssa. Vaikka hänellä olikin vanhempi mies seuranaan samassa sellissä, hän tunsi itsensä yksinäisemmäksi kuin koskaan. Tuntui kuin kaikki maailman ihmiset olisivat pettäneet hänet, hylänneet hänet täysin syvän kiven sisälle. Nicolas oli niin huonolla tuulella, että hän ei ollut edes syönyt mitään, vaikka hänen vangitsijansa olivat tuoneet leipää ja vettä hänelle ja Edgarille. Varas oli ottanut osansa heidän köyhästä ateriastaan ja jättänyt loput nuorelle velholle, mutta Nicolas ei vain kyennyt laittamaan mitään suuhunsa. ”Vaikka et haluaisi, sinun pitäisi syödä jotain”, Edgar oli yrittänyt rohkaista häntä. ”Tarvitset voimia.” Voimia mihin? Nicolas ei lausunut sanaakaan, hän ei vain halunnut puhua vanhemman miehen kanssa ollenkaan. Hän piti katkerat ajatuksensa omana tietonaan, mutta Edgar luultavasti aisti ne joka tapauksessa, koska hänkin pysytteli hiljaa omissa mietteissään. He vain istuivat vaiti tuskastunein sydämin, ainoat äänet, jotka he kuulivat, olivat peräisin naapuriselleistä. Jotkut ihmiset mutisivat jotain, mutta pitivät äänensä niin matalana, että Nicolas ei ymmärtänyt mitä he sanoivat. Joku itki ja nuori velho sääli tuota sieluparkaa; myös hän halusi itkeä. Sitten hän kuuli jonkun huutavan unissaan, puhuen kaameista näyistä, että Taivaankullan kaupunki täyttyisi verestä. Se sai Nicolaksen miettimään, näkikö hän todella lähitulevaisuuteen vai piinasiko häntä vain painajaiset. Oli tilanne mikä tahansa, Nicolas toivoi että hänen visioistaan ei tulisi totta. Jossain vaiheessa nuori velho alkoi pohtia, mikä aika vuorokaudesta oli. He olivat lukittuna niin syvälle ettei ikkunoita ollut, joten aikaa oli vaikea sanoa. Mutta oliko sillä väliä? Hän tunsi olonsa niin ahdistuneeksi ettei voinut edes ajatella nukkumista ja vaikutti siltä, että tämä päti myös Edgariin. Vanhempi mies näytti uupuneelta, mutta kenties häntä vaivasi niin kauhea syyllisyys, ettei hän voinut sulkea silmiään. Nicolas tunsi hieman myötätuntoa häntä kohtaan, vaikka ei olisi halunnutkaan. Tuntui melkein siltä että aika oli jäätynyt, että tämä paikka oli universumin hylkäämä, joten oli mahdotonta sanoa, kuinka paljon aikaa oli kulunut. Ja koska he kaikki olivat hylättyinä täällä alhaalla, eikä kukaan ollut tulossa katsomaan kuinka he voivat, paitsi sinä yhtenä hetkenä kun ruokaa tuotiin, alkoi tuntua todennäköiseltä, että he kelluivat pienen rinnakkaismaailman sisällä. Nicolas ei voinut olla ajattelematta inhottavia ja synkkiä ajatuksia, ja hän moitti itseään niiden ajattelusta, mutta ne olivat sitkeitä eikä hän voinut niittää niitä. Kuitenkin, pian valo tulisi loistamaan pimeään maailmaan. Yhtäkkiä Nicolas kuuli vankilaa vartioineen metallioven hirvittävän kirskunnan. Jopa epätoivoisessa tilassaan hän tuli uteliaaksi siitä, kuka oli juuri tullut sen kautta, tämä oli merkki siitä ettei ulkomaailma ollut hylännyt heitä kokonaan. Oliko joku tuomassa heille lisää ruokaa ja vettä? Vai saiko yksi selleistä uuden vangin? Vai – hirvittävin ja vatsaa vääntävin mahdollisuus jonka hän pystyi kuvittelemaan – oliko Yönväki nyt tulossa hakemaan häntä ja käyttämään häntä kaikkeen mitä aikoivatkaan tehdä? Hän keskittyi nyt vain kuuntelemaan kuka mahdollisesti oli laskeutumassa portaita pitkin vankilaan. Hän yritti parhaansa mukaan kuunnella tarkasti, mutta kuuli vain kevyitä askelia jotka olivat tulossa alas, ja hän saattoi vannoa että vain yksi henkilö oli tulossa lähemmäksi. Se oli outoa… Askeleet olivat niin hämmentävän kevyen kuuloisia, ne eivät voineet mahdollisesti kuulua petomiehelle. Kuka se sitten voisi olla? Nicolas oli jännittynyt ja kiinnittänyt katseensa käytävään – no, siihen pieneen osaan jonka hän näki sellistään – toivoen näkevänsä vilauksen henkilöstä joka oli uskaltautunut tulla tänne alas. Soihdun valossa pieni musta hahmo tuli näkyviin – eikä Nicolas voinut uskoa silmiään. Se oli musta kissa. Hän oli sittenkin tullut hakemaan häntä! Sillä hetkellä nuoren velhon huolet ja yksinäisyyden ja petoksen tunteet huuhtoutuivat pois, niin uskomattoman onnellinen hän oli nähdessään mustan kissan. Hänen optimisminsa oli palannut ja asiat eivät näyttäneet enää niin epätoivoisilta. Nicolas periaatteessa pompahti ylös ja tarttui sellinsä kaltereihin ja seurasi katseellaan, kuinka musta kissa käveli äänettömin askelin lähemmäs ja lähemmäs. Sitten Nicolas tajusi että tosiaan, hänen pehmeistä tassuistaan ei kuulunut askelten ääntä, joten kenelle nuo kevyet askeleet kuuluivat? Hän sai vastauksen tähän kysymykseen saman tien, kun joku vieras mies tuli hänen näköpiiriinsä. Mies oli hieman vanhempi henkilö, joka oli pukeutunut bardin värikkäisiin vaatteisiin. Käsissään hän kantoi soitinta, joka muistutti luuttua. Ja yhdessä kädessään hän myös piteli avainnippua. Mutta pian nuoren velhon katse kääntyi takaisin mustaan kissaan. ”Olen niin iloinen nähdessäni sinut!” hän sanoi matkakumppanilleen. ”Mutta kuinka sinä pääsit tänne? Näin Yönväen vartioivan jokaista ovea.” ”Se oli melko yksinkertaista”, musta kissa vastasi ja katsoi bardia. ”Tämä mies pystyi soittamaan musiikkia joka sai Yönväen sikeään uneen!” ”Se… Se on oikeastaan aika uskomatonta”, Nicolas sanoi samalla kun bardi avasi sellin. ”Kiitos herra. Kuinka voin maksaa takaisin ystävällisyydestäsi?” ”Ah, et ole minulle mitään velkaa”, mies sanoi lempeä hymy kasvoillaan. ”Teen vain sen mikä on oikein ja uskon vakaasti että sinun vapauttamisesi on suuremman hyvän eduksi.” ”Ai… okei.” Nicolas oli hieman ymmällään näistä sanoista eikä ymmärtänyt täysin, mitä mies tarkoitti. ”Öö… Nimeni on Nicolas, mukava tavata, herra.” ”Cedric”, bardi vastasi ja ojensi kätensä, Nicolas tarttui siihen ja he kättelivät. ”Ja tämä on”, nuori velho sanoi osoittaessaan pientä toveriaan, ”eh… Musta… Kissa?” Kissanhahmoinen nuori mies ei sanonut mitään, mutta hänen syvänsinisissä silmissään välkähti kipinä, mutta mitä se tarkoitti, Nicolas ei osannut sanoa. Tässä vaiheessa koko tämän ajan taustalla pysynyt Edgar onnistui nousemaan jaloilleen ja yritti hiippaillen luikahtaa pois. Kiusallisesti hän ohitti kaikki muut, loi heihin omituisen anteeksipyytäväisen katseen ennen kuin poistui paikalta ja juoksi karkuun. Nicolas katseli hänen taantuvaa hahmoaan ja se oli viimeinen kerta, kun hän näki Edgarin tässä elämässä. ”No”, Cedric sanoi yhtäkkiä, ”aiheuttakaamme vähän sekasortoa ystävillemme.” Bardi aloitti pienen kiertueensa ympäri vankilaa ja avasi joka ikisen oven, jotta vangit pääsisivät ulos. Jotkut heistä ryntäsivät ulos saman tien, kun taas toiset olivat hieman ymmällään äkillisestä vapaudestaan ja heidän liikkeensä olivat hitaita. Osa heistä kiitti Cedriciä ja jotkut pysyivät hiljaa. Mutta lopulta kaikki olivat vapaita, eikä kukaan jäänyt kaipaamaan synkkiä ja haisevia sellejään. He kaikki katosivat näkyvistä kuten Edgar ja pian vain Nicolas, Musta Kissa ja Cedric olivat jäljellä vankilassa. ”Meidän pitäisi mennä”, Musta Kissa ehdotti ja alkoi kävellä portaita kohti. Nicolas ja Cedric vain nyökkäsivät ja sitten he kaikki kolme suuntasivat portaikkoon. He nousivat melko nopealla tahdilla ja tulivat pian metalliovelle joka nyt ammotti auki. Nicolas huomasi, että oven luona oli vielä jokunen petomies, mutta he makasivat lattialla kuorsaten äänekkäästi. Kolmikko hiipi heidän ohitseen, vaikka he näyttivätkin nukkuvan sikeästi eivätkä olleet heränneet vaikka kaikki muut vangit olivat jo ohittaneet heidät. He kiipesivät portaat ylös asti, huohottaen hieman tämän suorituksen jälkeen ja aloittivat tehtävänsä löytää tie ulos linnasta. Nicolas toivoi, että hänen kaksi toveriaan tiesivät minne mennä, koska hän oli mennyt sekaisin suunnasta kun muutamat Yönväestä olivat saattaneet häntä ja Edgaria mutkittelevien käytävien läpi. Ja todellakin, Musta Kissa onnistui saamaan heidän pienen ryhmänsä linnan mahtavaan saliin, jossa punainen matto johdatti tien suoraan pimeyteen. Ennen kuin Nicolas ehti avata suunsa kysyäkseen, mikä heidän suunnitelmansa oli, ääni, piinattu ja väsynyt ääni, kuului pimeydestä: ”Keitä te olette?” Kaikkien kolmen katseet kohdistuivat siihen suuntaan, mistä ääni oli tullut, ja he näkivät pitkän miehen, joka oli pukeutunut yleviin vaatteisiin, mikä osoitti hänen olevan tärkeä henkilö. Hän seisoi pimeässä, hädin tuskin näkyvissä kynttilöiden valossa. Hänen ruskeat silmänsä loistivat hämärässä ja niissä oli utelias mutta myös varovainen ilme. ”En tunnista teitä”, mies sanoi. ”Näytätte siltä, että te ette ole täältä kotoisin. Kysyn teiltä vielä kerran: keitä te olette?” Nicolas taikka Musta Kissa ei ehtinyt edes puhumaan ennen kuin Cedric oli astunut eteen ja kumarsi kunnioittavasti miehelle ja sanoi: ”Ah, tervehdys, lordi Alexander. Olemme vain vaatimattomia matkailijoita, juuttuneina tähän sotkuun, jonka Yönväki on valitettavasti valmistanut.” Lordi Alexander huokaisi raskaasti. ”Niin, olen todella pahoillani siitä. Mutta käteni ovat sidotut, en voi tehdä mitään tilanteen ratkaisemiseksi.” ”Saanko kysyä teiltä, herrani, miksi näin on?” Cedric tiedusteli. ”Luulen, että voin kertoa teille”, Alexander vastasi ja näytti yhtäkkiä vieläkin uupuneemmalta kuin hetki sitten. ”Olen väsynyt ja epätoivoinen, jopa kauhuissani. Kaikki johtuu siitä, että Yönväki on vanginnut poikani.” ”Sinun poikasi?” Cedric oli yllättynyt, samoin Nicolas ja Musta Kissa. ”Aivan. Häntä pidetään yhdessä torneista, Yönväen tiukasti vartioimana”, Alexander kertoi. ”Jos teen jotain näitä barbaareja vastaan, he satuttavat poikaani… tai vielä pahempaa.” ”Hmm, tuo on todellakin hankala asia”, Cedric myönsi. ”Pyydän, pelastakaa poikani.” Kolmikko hämmentyi täysin näistä sanoista saman tien, kun ne tulivat ulos lordin suusta. Miesparka näytti olevan täydellisen romahtamisen partaalla, hänen kasvoillaan oli rukoileva ilme. Vaikutti siltä, että tämä oli hänen viimeinen keinonsa, pyytää nyt apua matkalaisilta joita hän ei ollut edes nähnyt ennen. ”Mutta… mitä me voimme tehdä?” Nicolas kysyi hetken kuluttua. ”Minun mieheni eivät voi lähestyä vartioivaa Yönväkeä”, lordi sanoi. ”Heistä tulee aggressiivisia välittömästi. Mutta te… te ette näytä uhkaavilta ollenkaan. Teillä voi olla mahdollisuus. En tiedä, kuinka kykenette tekemään sen, mutta… Pyydän… Olette ainoa toivoni.” Kolmikko vaihtoi katseita keskenään. He eivät olleet odottaneet ollenkaan, että joutuisivat tällaiseen tilanteeseen. Mutta heillä ei juurikaan ollut sydäntä sanoa ei näin epätoivoiselle miehelle. Nicolas tunsi olonsa hermostuneeksi – hän ei ollut sankari – ja Mustan Kissan katse kertoi, ettei hänkään ollut innostunut. Mutta Cedric vaikutti hyvin rauhalliselta ja hänellä oli lempeä ilme kasvoillaan, ja sillä hetkellä hän teki päätöksen heidän kaikkien puolesta. ”Me teemme sen”, hän sanoi. ”Voitko kertoa meille suunnan, johon meidän on mentävä?” ”Oi kiitos, kiitos!” Toivon kipinä syttyi Alexanderin väsyneisiin ja epätoivoisiin silmiin. ”Kävelkää tämän käytävän läpi kohti valtaistuinsalia. Kun olette ovella, kääntykää oikealle ja jatkakaa eteenpäin. Jatkakaa matkaa kunnes kohtaatte portaat. Kiivetkää ne aina huipulle asti ja pääsette oikeaan torniin. Yönväki vartioi sen huoneen ovea, jossa poikaani pidetään, joten tiedätte, kun olette löytäneet oikean paikan.” Nicolas oli hieman hämmentynyt näistä ohjeista ja hänen oli vaikea panna ne mieleensä, mutta onneksi näytti siltä, että Cedric oli onnistunut sisäistämään ne hyvin. ”Kiitos, herrani”, Cedric sanoi ja kumarsi Alexanderille vielä kerran. ”Me lähdemme pelastamaan poikasi saman tien.” ”Onnea matkaan”, lordi Alexander sanoi, hänen äänensä oli tuskin kuiskausta kuuluvampi. ”Mennään sitten”, bardi totesi Nicolakselle ja Mustalle Kissalle ja he alkoivat seurata punaista mattoa kohti linnan vatsaa. Lordi Alexander tuijotti heitä niin kauan kuin pystyi, kunnes pimeys nieli heidät. Sitten hänkin poistui paikalta ja lähti omia teitään. Mutta hän tai kolmikkokaan ei ollut tietoinen, että pimeässä oli ollut vakooja kuuntelemassa heidän puheitaan. Ja heti kun he olivat lähteneet ylväästä salista, vakooja katosi vikkelästi, toivoen löytävänsä Kalpeanaaman niin nopeasti kuin pystyi. Nicolas, Musta Kissa ja Cedric kävelivät käytävän läpi menneisyyden lordeja kuvaavien maalausten tarkkailun alla. Heidän jähmettyneet katseensa näyttivät aavemaisilta kynttilöiden hämärässä valossa, ja Nicolaksesta tuntui, etteivät he olleet ainoita jotka seurasivat heidän matkaansa, varjoissa oli jotain outoa. Mutta hän yritti lakaista sen pois mielestään, uskoen että hänen mielikuvituksensa vain temppuili ja keskittyi kävelyyn. Cedric oli heidän pienen saattueensa kärjessä, kun taas Nicolas ja Musta Kissa seurasivat häntä. ”Joten, uh…” Nicolas yritti löytää oikeat sanat. ”Cedric, oletko sinäkin maagi?” ”En aivan”, Cedric vastasi pehmeällä äänellä. ”Sanotaan vain, että minun soittimeni… se on maaginen.” ”Ai, okei”, Nicolas sanoi haluten tietää enemmän, mutta ei uskaltanut sanoa sanoja. ”No, mikä on tarinasi? Tarkoitan, kuinka päädyit tänne?” ”Voi, matkani ei ole mitenkään erikoinen”, bardi sirkutti iloisesti. ”Olen aivan kuten kaikki muutkin bardit, matkustelen ympäri maailmaa, laulaen sankareista, seikkailuista ja kuninkaallisista. Tulin Taivaankullan kaupunkiin ja jäin jumiin kuten kaikki muutkin. Olen ollut täällä jonkin aikaa ja tarkkaillut tilannetta.” ”Mutta olisit voinut paeta, eikö niin?” nuori velho tiedusteli. ”Musta Kissa sanoi, että voit laittaa Yönväen syvään uneen. Mikset ole tehnyt niin?” ”No, minulla ei ole varsinaisesti ollut kiireellistä tarvetta lähteä”, Cedric myönsi. ”Haluan nähdä omin silmin, milloin Taivaankullan kaupungin kriisi ratkeaa. Sitä paitsi luotat liikaa kykyihini, Nicolas. Musiikkini ei voi ratkaista kaikkea.” ”Ai, selvä…” Sen jälkeen kolmikko jatkoi matkaansa täydessä hiljaisuudessa. Mutta ei kestänyt kauan, kun he pystyivät erottamaan eteensä ilmestyneet koristeelliset ovet. Nicolas oli aivan hämmästynyt ja pysähtyi ihailemaan mahtavia pariovia. Ne olivat punaiset ja niissä oli aivan upeat puukaiverrokset, jotka tekivät kauniita ja monimutkaisia pyörteitä, jotka esittivät köynnöksiä, lehtiä ja kukkia. Ovet olivat loistelias taideteos, jonka olivat tehneet alueen kaikkein taitavimmat käsityöläiset. Ne todella sopivat tänne, kun otti huomioon kuinka varakas kaupunki Taivaankullan kaupunki oli. Nicolas oli utelias siitä, miltä näiden ovien takana oleva valtaistuinsali näytti, mutta he eivät olleet täällä katsomassa nähtävyyksiä, joten hän kääntyi oikealle seuratakseen Cedriciä ja Mustaa Kissaa, jotka olivat onnistuneet saamaan jo hieman etäisyyttä, mutta nuori velho sai heidät pian kiinni ja he jatkoivat etenemistä syvemmälle linnaan yhtenä ryhmänä. Käytävä tuntui melkein loputtomalta. Se haarautui moniin muihin välikköihin ja jälleen kerran Nicolas ihmetteli, kuinka kauan kestäisi opetella ulkoa linnan pohjapiirustus. Hän oli varma että olisi jo eksynyt, jos he olisivat kerrankin poikenneet tieltään. Mutta koska heidän pieni ryhmänsä kulki vain eteenpäin, hänen ei tarvinnut murehtia siitä. Sen lisäksi, hän ei vaeltanut näillä käytävillä yksin ja sillä hetkellä hän oli todella iloinen, että hänellä oli Musta Kissa ja Cedric mukanaan. Linna oli aavemaisen hiljainen. Ja koska kolmikko ei tavannut ketään pienellä matkallaan, se sai paikan tuntumaan siltä kuin siellä ei olisi ollut eläviä olentoja; ei ihmisiä, ei Yönväkeä. Se johtui luultavasti siitä että oli yö, kuten Nicolas huomasi kun he lopulta ohittivat ikkunoita. Maailma oli täysin pimeä ja hän pohti, oliko tänä yönä uusi kuu. Mutta koska oli turhaa yrittää katsoa täydelliseen pimeyteen, hän ei kiinnittänyt enempää huomiota ikkunoiden tarjoamaan näkymään ja jatkoi vain kävelemistä eteenpäin tovereittensa kanssa. Lopulta he tulivat portaiden luo. Ne oli tehty kivestä ja ne kiertyivät ylöspäin. Tässä vaiheessa Nicolas alkoi tuntea olonsa todella hermostuneeksi heidän tehtävänsä vuoksi ja hän huomasi jännitystä ilmassa, joten luultavasti Musta Kissa ja Cedric tunsivat samoin. Mutta sanaakaan lausumatta he alkoivat kiivetä portaita. Soihtuja oli aseteltu säännöllisin väliajoin valaisemaan tätä osaa linnasta, ja ne heittivät leikkisiä varjoja ryhmän matkalle. He kulkivat monien eri kerrosten ohi kiivetessään yhä korkeammalle, mutta jossain vaiheessa ne kaikki jäivät taakse, eikä ollut muuta kuin torniin johtavat portaat. Ne tuntuivat nuoren velhon elämän pisimmiltä portailta. Sitten he tulivat huipulle. Muutama viimeinen askel ja he löysivät itsensä porrastasanteelta. Siellä oli vain yksi ovi, ei mitään muuta, ja sitä ovea vartioi Yönväki; se oli juuri niin kuin Alexander oli kuvaillut. Viisi petomiestä oli muodostelmassa oven edessä ja kaikkien heidän katseensa kohdistuivat kolmikkoon heti heidän astuessaan esiin. Mutta mitä he ajattelivat heidän pienestä ryhmästään, se oli vaikea sanoa, koska he olivat yhtä ilmeettömiä kuten aina. Nicolas katsoi hermostuneena Yönväen teräviä aseita: keihäitä, kirveitä, lyhyitä miekkoja… Niin uhkaavia, niin tappavia. Mutta Cedric, joka oli jo osoittautunut rohkeaksi mieheksi, astui petomiesten eteen näppäillessään soittimensa kieliä. ”Lähtekää välittömästi”, yksi Yönväestä käski tylysti. ”Täällä ei ole teille mitään.” ”Anteeksi, mutta luulen, että teidän täytyy pitää pieni tauko”, Cedric sanoi hymyillen. Sitten hän alkoi soittaa musiikkia. Se oli yksi kauneimmista sävelmistä, jonka Nicolas oli koskaan kuullut. Melodia oli rauhallinen ja Cedric soitti sitä hitaasti, mikä toi nuoren velhon mieleen outoa tyyneyttä. Hän alkoi tuntea olonsa uneliaaksi ja tyytyväiseksi, tuntui, että hänen päänsä täyttyi pehmeällä sumulla, joka huuhtoi pois kaikki huolet ja negatiivisuuden. Hän menetti käsityksensä tilanteesta lähes kokonaan autuuden tunteen valloittaessa hänen ruumiinsa. ”Nicolas! Nicolas!” Vasta siinä vaiheessa Nicolas heräsi oudosta transsista. Se oli Mustan Kissan ääni, joka oli tunkeutunut läpi hänen utuisen tilansa. Hän katsoi Mustan Kissan suuntaan, joka näytti siltä, ettei Cedricin musiikki ollut vaikuttanut häneen ollenkaan. ”Anteeksi, minä…” Nicolas kamppaili löytääkseen oikeat sanat. ”Minulle tuli tämä outo tunne ja…” ”Voi, älä huoli”, Cedric sirkutti sitten. ”Noin tapahtuu joskus jopa niille, joita en ole ottanut kohteekseni, mutta epätodennäköisemmin jos olet kuullut musiikkiani aiemmin. Nyt, mennään sisään.” Silloin Nicolas huomasi, että ryhmä Yönväen vartijoita oli nukahtanut. He pääsivät nyt ovelle. Vaikka he tiesivät, että Cedricin musiikki oli erittäin tehokasta, he silti hiipivät vartijoiden ohi ja avasivat oven varovasti ennen kuin livahtivat sisään. Tulen räsähtely takassa oli yksi ensimmäisistä asioista, jonka Nicolas huomasi heidän astuessaan sisään. Se tarjosi hieman himmeää valoa suhteellisen pieneen huoneeseen. Paikka oli kalustettu kauniisti, sopien jopa kuninkaalle. Nicolakselle tuli tunne, että vangituksi lordin pojalla oli silti hyvä paikka olla. Sitten hänen katseensa vaelsi koristeelliseen – ja ehkä hieman liian isoon – sänkyyn, jossa pieni hahmo nukkui sikeästi. Kolmikko käveli tätä pikkuista kohti ja kun he olivat saapuneet sängyn luo, Cedric alkoi hellästi ravistella häntä hereille. ”Öh… häh?” Pikkupoika heräsi hitaasti. Hän haukotteli ja avasi silmänsä. Hän oli vielä niin nuori, ei voinut olla kymmentä vuotta vanhempi. ”Keitä te olette?” ”Olemme täällä viemässä sinut isäsi luo”, Cedric vastasi lempeästi ja hymyili pienelle pojalle. ”Todellako?” Yhtäkkiä lapsi oli ylhäällä ja valmis lähtemään. ”En ole nähnyt isääni pitkään aikaan! Possumiehet ovat pitäneet minua täällä ikuisuuden! Mennään!” Hän oli heilauttanut pienet jalkansa lattialle ja oli jo valmis lähtemään. Hän oli jo ehtinyt juosta ovelle, kun Nicolas, Musta Kissa ja Cedric olivat vasta valmistautumassa poistumaan huoneesta. Pikkupoika odotti heidän saavuttavan hänet ja heidän ryhmänsä poistui nopeasti huoneesta ja suuntasi takaisin portaille, joista he olivat tulleet. Kuitenkin, ennen kuin he ehtivät päästä ensimmäisille askelmille, he huomasivat jonkun olevan tulossa. Yhtäkkiä heidän pieni ryhmänsä jähmettyi ja he katselivat kuinka hahmo kiipesi portaat ylös asti. Se oli yksi Yönväestä, mutta lihaksikkaampi ja pitempi kuin useimmat. Tällä yksilöllä oli myös lumivalkoinen turkki. Nicolas ei ollut nähnyt häntä aiemmin, mutta hänellä oli vahva arvaus, kuka nyt seisoi hänen edessään tuliset silmät leiskuen. Se oli Kalpeanaama.The Wizard's Cat - Chapter 9Chapter 9: Secrets within the walls Lord Alexander was standing by one of the windows of his bedroom. His room was located on the highest tower of the castle, so he did have quite a nice view over a part of the town. The port of Skygold Town was the most important point of interest he could see from his window. In fact, right in that moment, he was inspecting the port. The sight of its current state did make him feel a little sad. The day was coming to an end and the last rays of sunshine made the sea water glimmer in warm colors, which was quite a beautiful scene. But the almost overly crowded port looked messy and the ships seemed dull as they were unable to carry out their purpose; it was like their spirit had been sucked out of them. Now they were just waiting, their sails down, longing for the sea breeze to blow on them once more. And nobody knew when that would happen. The lord could see mostly Nightfolks moving around the docks, which wasn't surprising at all since they had overrun the town. In one spot he could observe an argue between a human, possibly a captain of one of recent ships, and some Nightfolks. The man seemed really angry, judging by his body language, while the beastmen remained rigid like they usually tend to do. Alexander had witnessed such cases for too many times already and knew in advance how this conflict would end. The Nightfolks always won. Always. And just like he had predicted, the captain stormed off from the docks. He was now stuck in here like so many others and if he didn't agree to comply the orders of Nightfolks, his ship would get destroyed. There had already been one incident today where the beastmen had taken a vessel out of the port and then set it on fire. Luckily there hadn't been people on board, but it had eliminated the livelihood of few individuals. Ships were allowed to get in, but not out. Only the vessels of the Nightfolks could come and go however they wanted. This applied to others as well, not just ships, such as carriages, merchant caravans and all kinds of travelers. The inns of the town were getting completely over-crowded, if they weren't already. The Nightfolks were guarding all the gates, making sure that no one could leave. There was no way to send a word to outside world that Skygold Town needed help. Lord Alexander was completely powerless in this situation and being painfully aware of it tormented his mind. The Nightfolks had stripped him from all of his lordship and turned him into one of the helpless victims. Many of the residents and visitors of Skygold Town probably blamed him for this mess, and why wouldn't they? He had allowed this to happen, and in addition, he hadn't made even one single attempt to banish the Nightfolks. But there was a very good reason for all of this. When the Nightfolk invasion began a couple of months ago, Paleface did something that made sure that Alexander wouldn't be able to do anything against them. She captured the lord's only son, Kendrick, who is under a heavy guard right now in one of the towers. If Alexander dared to oppose the Nightfolks, they would harm his son, or worse. And so, the lord was toothless against the invaders, allowing them to make Skygold Town into one of their strongholds. A heavy sigh left Alexander's mouth as he turned away from the window. He began to pace around his room aimlessly. His family had ruled over Skygold Town for many, many generations and never before had something like this happened. Alexander felt like that he had dishonored his ancestors, even though he knew that in the end, this situation wasn't his fault. Nobody could understand his plight. He was desperate, and at this point, praying for a miracle to occur. There was nothing else he could do. After circling around his room for a while, he could hear heavy stomps getting closer to the door. Such steps had got familiar to him over the span of a couple months, and so he knew that a Nightfolk was coming to meet him. And just like that, the door to his bedroom opened with a slight creak. There had been no knocking as Nightfolks weren't really courteous beings; that was what Alexander had learned. The lord was a little surprised when he saw the individual that had entered his room. It was Paleface herself. She was quite an impressive sight as she was more muscular and taller than most Nightfolks. Her snow-white fur also gave an impression that she was more special than the rest of her kind. She had golden eyes that were blazing like the fires of war. Just like the other Nightfolks, she appeared calm, but it was clear that one shouldn't provoke her. Her huge axe would always enjoy spilling blood. Alexander did a slight bow; the Nightfolk was a figure of authority nonetheless. “Ah, Paleface. What brings you here?” The boar-faced creature gave her own kind of mark of respect by slamming her left fist against her breastplate. “I am here to talk about something.” Her voice was strangely resonant, it could fit even a prettiest maiden. Lord Alexander had a bad feeling about this and his mood turned foul in an instant. “What is it?” “Your soldiers caused trouble to my men”, Paleface said bluntly, and there was no emotion in her face or voice. “They wouldn't let my men enter certain parts of the castle. A quarrel broke out.” Alexander had a good guess about where this clash had happened. There was a precious chamber at the heart of the castle where numerous riches were stored. Generation after generation its contents had become more and more valuable as the lords of Skygold Town had got gifts from many traveling merchants that had visited exotic lands. This chamber had been guarded quite heavily for decades and Alexander had hoped that it wouldn't interest the Nightfolks. Apparently, that wasn't the case anymore. He truly had wished that the beastmen would leave it be, but now, he had to consent to give them access to the chamber. The lord lowered his head in an apologetic manner. “It won't happen again. I'm sorry.” “I truly hope so.” Paleface turned around and was preparing to leave. “Wait!” Alexander yelled, raising his hand as if wanting to take a hold of the Nightfolk. Paleface did stop and glanced back at the man. “Can I see my son?” Alexander asked desperately. “Please, I just want to see my son…” “No. I won't allow that.” The voice of the Nightfolk leader suddenly sounded so frigid. “Why? Why are you doing this to us?” Alexander's frustration that had been bottled up for weeks suddenly started to overflow. He saw himself as a patient man, but now, he demanded answers for questions he had been harboring. He hadn't dared to interfere with the matters of the Nightfolks, but now, he had lived in the unknown for far too long. To his surprise, the Nightfolk leader did turn around to face him again. But like usually, he couldn't tell what boar-faced creature was thinking as they weren't really expressive beings. “Do you really want to know?” Paleface asked. “Yes, of course!” the lord replied. “Hmm. Perhaps I do owe you an explanation.” The Nightfolk began to walk towards the man who stayed still, then moved past him and stopped at the great window from which the lord had been watching the port just a little while ago. Paleface just stared out of it, however Alexander wasn't sure was she looking at anything specific in that moment. For a while the room was wrapped in silence as the lord waited patiently for Paleface to speak once more. Finally, Paleface opened her mouth again. “Did you know that among my kind, white fur is a color of weakness?” she asked. Lord Alexander was slightly surprised by this. In the end, he didn't know much about Nightfolks, even though they had been doing business in Skygold Town for generations. He didn't answer anything, however, and just let the Nightfolk leader continue. “It's because white ones can't blend in with the darkness that we hold dear”, Paleface said. “I was an unlucky individual, born with white fur instead of the dark one. Throughout my whole life I have been seen as a weakling because of that, not equal with others. I learned at a very young age, that I need to work hard to get the respect from the others of my kind. So I toughened my body and now, I'm stronger than most.” She paused for a moment and flexed her arm, showing just how muscular she was. There was no doubt that she was strong. Alexander had a feeling that there wasn't that many fellow Nightfolks who would dare to mess with her. With silent respect, the lord didn't speak, he was just waiting to hear more. Paleface soon continued. “Getting strong paid off. I was getting the recognition I had desired and became a valued warrior. However, among many of the high ranks, I was still seen as a weakling. They couldn't see past my fur color and ignored me. To them, I was just a defective, not a warrior.” Paleface clenched her hands into fists and probably for the first time, Alexander could see a Nightfolk expressing some sort of emotion. Clearly her memories had surfaced repressed anger, and why wouldn't they? Bit by bit the lord learned more about the individual who was responsible for the harsh situation in his town. It was a strange feeling he couldn't really explain. The Nightfolk leader's anger subsided just as suddenly as it had arrived. Her hands became relaxed again. “I'm going to show them how wrong they are about me. I have managed to gather some followers, my companions who came here into this town with me.” Suddenly she spun around and met the lord's gaze with her fiery eyes. “I have sworn that I will challenge them if they won't acknowledge my strength. I will crush them, if that is what they choose. They will know my wrath. But the strength of the body is limited. To gain more power, I need a wizard.” “A wizard?” Alexander finally opened his mouth after being quiet for so long, just listening. “Why? And where would you get one that would help you?” “My kind doesn't have magical abilities, we rely solely on the strength of our bodies”, Paleface answered. “So, I have to seek one among your kind. I have already dispatched someone to seek out a wizard for me.” “But how you could make sure that they would help you?” Alexander repeated his question. “It's simple. I will drain their power and make it mine.” “Oh dear…” Alexander shook his head in disbelief. He didn't know how that deed would be performed, but he had a feeling that it wouldn't be pleasant. “Is that why you're stationed at my town?” “We are here simply because it's convenient place for me to do my preparations”, Paleface explained. “I won't let anyone to interfere with my plans. Don't you worry, lord Alexander, you will get your town back. We will leave when I'm ready to launch an attack.” Well, at least there was some reassuring information. Suddenly the lord's heart felt a little lighter. But still, there was something he wanted to know. “Why are you telling me all this?” Alexander asked. “Because I respect you as a leader”, Paleface replied. “It is only fair for you to know what is going on.” “I see…” Alexander scratched his dark beard a little. After that, a short moment of silence fell to the bedroom. What he had just learned gave the lord mixed feelings. He didn't hate Paleface, but didn't like her, either. For the first time in ages, he knew what was going on in his town and it truly felt relieving. Perhaps he was getting too optimistic way too soon, but he could see an end to the harsh situation in Skygold Town. The silence was soon broken. Lord Alexander could hear some strange crackling sound behind him, so he turned around to see what was going on. There were some dark purple and black lights flashing, making the obnoxious sound and the brightness caused the lord to raise his arm to cover his eyes. He had never experienced something like this and wondered what was causing it, but one thing was for sure: he was witnessing the usage of magic. Then he heard a loud boom and suddenly the lights were gone. Slowly he lowered his arm to see what had happened. A scrawny figure had taken the place where the lights had been going wild just a moment ago. Their body was completely covered by a black robe, even their head was hidden under a hood. They had a bad posture, almost if they had an invisible weight on their back. But although their body seemed frail, their presence felt ominous and powerful, which gave cold shivers to Alexander. “Master Paleface…” The shady individual had a really hoarse voice and it sounded like that they had trouble speaking. “A wizard… has been found…” “Excellent”, Paleface replied with a nod. “Let's start the preparations for the ritual.” The black stranger gave a bow to her and suddenly, they were gone. Their departure was much less flashy, it was like they had been made of ashes and wind had just blown them away. That was when Paleface made her leave as well, not uttering a single word as she did so. Lord Alexander was left alone in his room with his thoughts. He wondered who that person in a robe had been. He was pretty sure that he hadn't seen them before, but to his understanding, they had come to Skygold Town with the Nightfolks, judging by the exchange he had just witnessed. Alexander still had unpleasant feeling, even after they were gone. And what kind of ritual they had been talking about? The lord had a feeling that it wasn't something nice. He felt sad for the poor wizard they had got their hands into. But what could he do? Lord Alexander let out another heavy sigh. He was such a useless man. He walked to the window once more and let his gaze wander around the town he loved. If only the sunset would offer him solutions so everything would be fine once again.Velhon kissa - Luku 9Luku 9: Salaisuuksia seinien sisällä Lordi Alexander seisoskeli yhden makuuhuoneensa ikkunan luona. Hänen huoneensa sijaitsi linnan korkeimmassa tornissa, joten hänellä oli melko hyvät näkymät osalle kaupunkia. Taivaankullan kaupungin satama oli tärkein mielenkiinnon kohde, jonka hän näki ikkunastaan. Itse asiassa, juuri tuolla hetkellä hän tarkkaili satamaa. Sen nykyisen tilan näkeminen sai hänet hieman surulliseksi. Päivä oli loppumassa ja viimeiset auringonsäteet saivat meriveden kiiltämään lämpimissä väreissä, mikä oli varsin kaunis näky. Mutta lähes liian täynnä oleva satama näytti sotkuiselta ja laivat vaikuttivat loistonsa menettäneiltä koska ne eivät pystyneet toteuttamaan tarkoitustaan; oli kuin niiden sielu olisi imetty pois niistä. Nyt ne vain odottivat, purjeet alhaalla, kaivaten merituulen puhaltavan niihin vielä kerran. Eikä kukaan tiennyt milloin tuo tapahtuisi. Lordi näki enimmäkseen Yönväkeä liikkuvan laitureilla, mikä ei ollut lainkaan yllättävää, koska he olivat vallanneet kaupungin. Yhdessä paikkaa hän pystyi tarkkailemaan kiistaa ihmisen, mahdollisesti yhden viimeaikaisen laivan kapteenin, ja joidenkin Yönväen edustajien välillä. Mies vaikutti kehonkielestä päätellen todella vihaiselta, kun taas petomiehet pysyivät lujina, kuten heillä oli yleensä tapana olla. Alexander oli todistanut tällaisia tapauksia jo liian monta kertaa ja tiesi etukäteen, kuinka tämä konflikti päättyisi. Yönväki voitti aina. Aina. Ja aivan kuten hän oli ennustanut, kapteeni poistui äkäisesti laiturilta. Hän oli nyt jumissa täällä kuten niin monet muutkin, ja jos hän ei suostuisi noudattamaan Yönväen käskyjä, hänen aluksensa tuhottaisiin. Tänään oli jo ollut yksi tapaus, jossa petomiehet olivat vieneet aluksen pois satamasta ja sitten sytyttäneet sen tuleen. Onneksi kyydissä ei ollut ollut ihmisiä, mutta se oli tuhonnut muutaman henkilön toimeentulon. Laivat saivat tulla sisään, mutta ei ulos. Vain Yönväen omat alukset saattoivat tulla ja mennä miten halusivat. Tämä koski myös muita, ei pelkästään laivoja, kuten vaunuja, kauppakaravaaneja ja kaikenlaisia matkustajia. Kaupungin majatalot olivat täyttymässä ääriään myöten, elleivät olleet sitä jo. Yönväki vartioi kaikkia portteja ja varmistivat, ettei kukaan voinut poistua. Ei ollut mitään keinoa lähettää sanaa ulkomaailmalle, että Taivaankullan kaupunki tarvitsi apua. Lordi Alexander oli täysin voimaton tässä tilanteessa ja siitä tuskallisen tietoisena oleminen piinasi hänen mieltään. Yönväki oli riistänyt häneltä kaiken herruutensa ja tehneet hänestä yhden avuttomista uhreistaan. Monet Taivaankullan kaupungin asukkaat ja vierailijat luultavasti syyttivät häntä tästä sotkusta, ja miksi he eivät tekisi? Hän oli sallinut tämän tapahtua, ja lisäksi hän ei ollut edes yrittänyt karkottaa Yönväkeä. Mutta kaikkeen tähän oli erittäin hyvä syy. Kun Yönväen invaasio alkoi pari kuukautta sitten, Kalpeanaama teki jotain, joka varmisti, ettei Alexander pystyisi tekemään mitään heitä vastaan. Hän vangitsi lordin ainoan pojan, Kendrickin, joka oli tällä hetkellä raskaan vartioinnin alaisena yhdessä torneista. Jos Alexander uskaltaisi vastustaa Yönväkeä, he vahingoittaisivat hänen poikaansa, tai vielä pahempaa. Ja niin, lordi oli hampaaton hyökkääjiä vastaan, sallien heidän tekevän Taivaankullan kaupungista yhden linnoituksistaan. Raskas huokaus pääsi Alexanderin suusta hänen kääntyessään poispäin ikkunasta. Hän alkoi kävellä ympäri huonetta päämäärättömästi. Hänen sukunsa oli hallinnut Taivaankullan kaupunkia monien, monien sukupolvien ajan, eikä tällaista ollut tapahtunut koskaan ennen. Alexanderista tuntui että hän oli häpäissyt esi-isänsä, vaikka tiesi, ettei tämä tilanne loppujen lopuksi ollut hänen syynsä. Kukaan ei voinut ymmärtää hänen ahdinkoaan. Hän oli epätoivoinen ja tässä vaiheessa rukoili ihmettä tapahtuvaksi. Mitään muuta hän ei voinut tehdä. Kierreltyään huoneessaan jonkin aikaa, hän kuuli raskaiden askelien lähestyvän ovea. Tällaiset askeleet olivat tulleet hänelle tutuiksi parin kuukauden aikana, ja niin hän tiesi, että joku Yönväestä oli tulossa häntä tapaamaan. Ja juurikin niin, hänen makuuhuoneensa ovi avautui hieman naristen. Koputusta ei ollut kuulunut, koska Yönväen edustajat eivät liiemmin olleet kohteliaita olentoja; sen Alexander oli oppinut. Lordi oli hieman hämmästynyt nähdessään henkilön, joka oli saapunut hänen huoneeseensa. Se oli Kalpeanaama itse. Hän oli varsin vaikuttava näky, sillä hän oli lihaksikkaampi ja pitempi kuin useimmat Yönväestä. Hänen lumivalkoinen turkkinsa antoi myös vaikutelman, että hän oli erityisempi kuin muut hänen kaltaisistaan. Hänellä oli kultaiset silmät, jotka leiskuivat kuin sodan tulet. Aivan kuten muutkin Yönväestä, hän vaikutti rauhalliselta, mutta oli selvää, ettei häntä kannattaisi provosoida. Hänen valtava kirveensä tulisi aina nauttimaan veren vuodattamisesta. Alexander kumarsi hieman; tämä Yönväen edustaja oli kuitenkin auktoriteettinen henkilö. ”Ah, Kalpeanaama. Mikä tuo sinut tänne?” Villisikanaamainen olento antoi omanlaisensa kunnianosoituksensa lyömällä vasenta nyrkkiään rintapanssariaan vasten. ”Olen täällä puhumassa eräästä asiasta.” Hänen äänensä oli oudon sointuva, se sopisi kauneimmallekin neidolle. Lordi Alexanderilla oli paha aavistus tästä ja hänen mielialansa muuttui hetkessä huonoksi. ”Mikä on?” ”Sotilaasi aiheuttivat ongelmia miehilleni”, Kalpeanaama sanoi suorasukaisesti, eikä hänen kasvoillaan tai äänessään ollut havaittavissa mitään tunteita. ”He eivät päästäneet miehiäni tiettyihin linnan osiin. Syntyi riita.” Alexanderilla oli hyvä veikkaus siitä, missä tämä yhteenotto oli tapahtunut. Linnan sydämessä oli kallisarvoinen kammio, jossa säilytettiin lukuisia rikkauksia. Sukupolvi toisensa jälkeen sen sisällöstä oli tullut yhä arvokkaampaa, kun Taivaankullan kaupungin lordit olivat saaneet lahjoja monilta eksoottisissa maissa käyneiltä kiertokauppiailta. Tätä kammiota oli vartioitu varsin raskaasti vuosikymmenien ajan ja Alexander oli toivonut, ettei se kiinnostaisi Yönväkeä. Ilmeisesti asia ei enää ollut näin. Hän todella oli toivonut, että petomiehet jättäisivät sen rauhaan, mutta nyt, hänen täytyi myöntyä antamaan heille pääsy kammioon. Lordi laski päänsä anteeksipyytävästi. ”Se ei toistu. Olen pahoillani.” ”Toivon todellakin niin.” Kalpeanaama kääntyi ympäri ja valmistautui lähtemään. ”Odota!” Alexander huudahti ja kohotti kätensä ikään kuin olisi halunnut tarttua Yönväen edustajaan. Kalpeanaama pysähtyi ja katsahti takaisin mieheen. ”Saanko nähdä poikani?” Alexander kysyi epätoivoisesti. ”Ole kiltti, haluan vain nähdä poikani…” ”Ei. En salli sitä.” Yönväen johtajan ääni kuulosti yllättäen niin hyiseltä. ”Miksi? Miksi teet tämän meille?” Alexanderin turhautuminen joka oli patoutunut viikkojen ajan alkoi yhtäkkiä tulvia yli. Hän piti itseään kärsivällisenä miehenä, mutta nyt hän vaati vastauksia kysymyksiin, joita hän oli hautonut mielessään. Hän ei ollut uskaltanut puuttua Yönväen asioihin, mutta nyt hän oli elänyt pimennossa aivan liian kauan. Hänen yllätyksekseen, Yönväen johtaja kääntyi kohdatakseen hänet jälleen. Mutta kuten yleensä, hän ei osannut sanoa mitä villisikakasvoinen olento ajatteli, sillä he eivät olleet kovinkaan ilmeikkäitä olioita. ”Haluatko todella tietää?” Kalpeanaama kysyi. ”Kyllä, totta kai!” lordi vastasi. ”Hmm. Kenties olen sinulle selityksen velkaa.” Yönväen edustaja alkoi kävellä kohti miestä joka pysyi paikoillaan, kulkien sitten hänen ohitseen ja pysähtyi suuren ikkunan ääreen, sen saman josta lordi oli katsellut satamaa vain hetki sitten. Kalpeanaama vain tuijotti ulos siitä, joskin Alexander ei ollut varma katseliko hän mitään tiettyä tuolla hetkellä. Hetken aikaa huone oli hiljaisuuden peitossa, kun lordi odotti kärsivällisesti Kalpeanaaman puhuvan taas. Lopulta Kalpeanaama avasi suunsa jälleen. ”Tiesitkö, että minun väkeni joukossa valkoinen turkki on heikkouden väri?” hän kysyi. Lordi Alexander oli hieman yllättynyt tästä. Loppujen lopuksi, hän ei tiennyt paljoakaan Yönväestä, vaikka he olivat harjoittaneet liiketoimintaa Taivaankullan kaupungissa sukupolvien ajan. Hän ei kuitenkaan vastannut mitään, vaan antoi Yönväen johtajan jatkaa. ”Se johtuu siitä, että valkoiset eivät voi sulautua pimeyteen jota rakastamme”, Kalpeanaama sanoi. ”Olin epäonninen yksilö, synnyin valkoturkkisena tumman sijaan. Koko elämäni ajan minut on nähty sen vuoksi heikkona, ei tasavertaisena muiden kanssa. Opin jo hyvin nuorena, että minun on tehtävä lujasti töitä saadakseni kunnioitusta muilta kaltaisiltani. Joten vahvistin vartaloani ja nyt olen vahvempi kuin useimmat.” Hän piti hetken tauon ja koukisti kätensä osoittaen kuinka lihaksikas hän olikaan. Ei ollut epäilystäkään, etteikö hän olisi väkevä. Alexanderilla oli tunne, että ei ollut montaakaan Yönväen edustajaa, joka uskaltaisi ärsyttää häntä. Hiljaisen kunnioituksen vallassa, lordi ei puhunut, hän vain odotti kuulevansa lisää. Kalpeanaama jatkoi pian. ”Vahvistuminen kannatti. Sain tahtomaani tunnustusta ja minusta tuli arvostettu soturi. Kuitenkin, monien korkea-arvoisten joukossa minua pidettiin edelleen heikkona. He eivät nähneet turkinvärini ohitse ja jättivät minut huomiotta. Heille olin vain viallinen, en soturi.” Kalpeanaama puristi kätensä nyrkkiin ja luultavasti ensimmäistä kertaa Alexander saattoi nähdä jonkun Yönväestä ilmaisevan jonkinlaista tunnetta. Selvästikin hänen muistonsa olivat nostaneet pintaan tukahdutettua vihaa, ja miksi eivät olisi? Vähitellen lordi oppi lisää henkilöstä, joka oli vastuussa hänen kaupunkinsa hankalasta tilanteesta. Se oli kummallinen tunne, jota hän ei oikein osannut selittää. Yönväen johtajan suuttumus laantui yhtä äkkiä kuin se oli saapunutkin. Hänen kätensä rentoutuivat jälleen. ”Aion näyttää heille, kuinka väärässä he ovat minusta. Olen onnistunut keräämään seuraajia, kumppaneita, jotka tulivat tänne tähän kaupunkiin kanssani.” Yhtäkkiä hän pyörähti ympäri ja kohtasi lordin katseen leimuavilla silmillään. ”Olen vannonut haastavani heidät, jos he eivät tunnusta voimaani. Murskaan heidät, jos he niin valitsevat. He tulevat tuntemaan vihani. Mutta kehon voima on rajallinen. Saadakseni lisää voimaa, tarvitsen velhon.” ”Velhon?” Alexander avasi vihdoin suunsa oltuaan vaiti niin pitkään pelkästään kuunnellen. ”Miksi? Ja mistä saisit sellaisen, joka auttaisi sinua?” ”Minun kaltaisillani ei ole maagisia kykyjä, me luotamme pelkästään kehojemme vahvuuteen”, Kalpeanaama vastasi. ”Joten minun on haettava sellainen teidän joukostanne. Olen jo lähettänyt jonkun etsimään minulle velhon.” ”Mutta kuinka voit varmistaa, että hän auttaisi sinua?” Alexander toisti kysymyksensä. ”Se on yksinkertaista. Vien hänen voimansa ja teen siitä omani.” ”Voi hyvänen aika…” Alexander pudisti päätään epäuskoisena. Hän ei tiennyt, kuinka tuo teko suoritettaisiin, mutta hänellä oli tunne, ettei se tulisi olemaan miellyttävää. ”Siksikö olette minun kaupungissani?” ”Olemme täällä yksinkertaisesti siksi, että tämä on sopiva paikka tehdä valmisteluni”, Kalpeanaama selitti. ”En anna kenenkään häiritä suunnitelmiani. Älä huoli, lordi Alexander, saat kaupunkisi takaisin. Lähdemme, kun olen valmis aloittamaan hyökkäyksen.” No, ainakin hän sai kuulla jossain määrin lohduttavaa tietoa. Yllättäen lordin sydän tuntui hieman kevyemmältä. Mutta silti, oli vielä jotain jota hän halusi tietää. ”Miksi kerrot minulle tämän kaiken?” Alexander kysyi. ”Koska kunnioitan sinua johtajana”, Kalpeanaama vastasi. ”On vain kohtuullista, että tiedät mitä on meneillään.” ”Ymmärrän…” Alexander raapi hieman tummaa partaansa. Sen jälkeen lyhyt hiljaisuus laskeutui makuuhuoneeseen. Se, mitä hän oli juuri oppinut, antoi lordille ristiriitaisia tunteita. Hän ei vihannut Kalpeanaamaa, muttei myöskään pitänyt hänestä. Ensimmäistä kertaa aikoihin hän tiesi, mitä hänen kaupungissaan tapahtui, ja se tuntui todella helpottavalta. Ehkä hän oli tulossa liian optimistiseksi aivan liian aikaisin, mutta hän saattoi nähdä Taivaankullan kaupungin vaikean tilanteen päättyvän. Hiljaisuus rikkoontui pian. Lordi Alexander kuuli omituista rätisevää ääntä takaansa, joten hän kääntyi katsomaan, mitä oli tekeillä. Huoneessa välähteli tummia violetteja ja mustia valoja, jotka pitivät ärsyttävää ääntä ja kirkkaus sai lordin nostamaan kätensä peittääkseen silmänsä. Hän ei ollut koskaan kokenut mitään tallaista ja ihmetteli, mikä tämän aiheutti, mutta yksi asia oli varma: hän oli todistamassa taikuuden käyttöä. Sitten hän kuuli kovan pamauksen ja yhtäkkiä valot olivat poissa. Hitaasti hän laski kätensä nähdäkseen mitä oli tapahtunut. Hintelä hahmo oli ottanut paikan juuri äsken villisti kieppuneilta valoilta. Musta kaapu peitti hänen kehonsa kokonaan, jopa hänen päänsä oli piilossa hupun alla. Hänellä oli huono ryhti, aivan kuin hänellä olisi ollut näkymätön paino selässään. Mutta vaikka hänen ruumiinsa vaikutti heikolta, hänen olemuksensa tuntui pahaenteiseltä ja voimakkaalta, mikä aiheutti Alexanderille kylmiä väreitä. ”Mestari Kalpeanaama…” Hämäräperäisellä henkilöllä oli todella käheä ääni ja kuulosti siltä, että hänellä oli vaikeuksia puhua. ”Velho… on löytynyt…” ”Erinomaista”, Kalpeanaama vastasi nyökäten. ”Aloittakaamme rituaalin valmistelut.” Mustanpuhuva muukalainen kumarsi hänelle ja yhtäkkiä hän oli poissa. Hänen lähtönsä oli paljon vähemmän näyttävä, oli kuin hän olisi ollut tuhkasta tehty ja tuuli olisi juuri puhaltanut hänet menemään. Silloin Kalpeanaama alkoi myöskin tehdä lähtöä, sanomatta sanaakaan. Lordi Alexander jäi yksin huoneeseensa ajatustensa kanssa. Häntä mietitytti, kuka tuo henkilö kaavussa oli ollut. Hän oli melko varma, ettei ollut nähnyt häntä aiemmin, mutta hänen käsityksensä mukaan tämä oli tullut Taivaankullan kaupunkiin Yönväen kanssa, päätellen juuri todistamastaan sananvaihdosta. Alexanderilla oli edelleen epämiellyttävä tunne, vaikka hän olikin poissa. Ja millaisesta rituaalista he olivat puhuneet? Lordilla oli tunne, ettei se voinut olla mitään miellyttävää. Hän tunsi surua sen velhoparan puolesta, jonka he olivat saaneet käsiinsä. Mutta mitä hän voisi tehdä? Lordi Alexander huokaisi jälleen raskaasti. Hän oli niin hyödytön mies. Hän käveli ikkunalle jälleen kerran ja antoi katseensa vaeltaa ympäri rakastamaansa kaupunkia. Kunpa vain auringonlasku voisi tarjota hänelle ratkaisuja, joiden avulla kaikki saattaisi olla jälleen hyvin.The Wizard's Cat - Chapter 8Chapter 8: Edgar's story A young man in a form of a black cat dashed through the wide main street of Skygold Town. It was paved with clean, smooth white stones, and it was leading straight to a small castle, the crown jewel of this settlement. The whole town looked glorious, but oddly, there weren't much people in sight. One would think that such a wealthy place would be bustling with people, both residents of the town and travelers from many locations, especially since this town had a port. There was clearly something strange going on, the young man thought to himself as he slowed his pace, eventually stopping entirely in front of a building that seemed to be an inn. In his head, he tried to piece together what was happening. Judging by the fact that there hadn't been any travelers coming from this direction and that the beastmen had been guarding the gates, it seemed like that the Nightfolks had conquered Skygold Town. Before setting a foot in this town he had sensed that something was wrong, but how exactly, he didn't know. He should have listened to his instincts. And that man, that thief… He was somehow involved in all of this. The young man shook his head. Why hadn't the voices of the dead warned him that the thief would bring trouble? There was certainly something very wrong with that man. The young man felt a little guilty for leaving the young wizard alone with such person. “What are you pondering, my little feline friend?” The man in a cat's form almost jumped into the air because he got startled by a sudden voice. He hadn't noticed anyone to come near him, and he looked at the direction of the individual who had just spoken. It was a bit of an older man and judging by his clothes and the fact that he was plucking leisurely strings of an instrument that resembled lute, he was a bard. The man was leaning against the door of the inn and he had a gentle smile decorating his face. Although he appeared to be friendly, the young man was wary. He stared at the face of the stranger with his deep blue eyes, but not uttering even a single word. The bard chuckled a little. “Seems like you just came into Skygold Town. It's quite beautiful, but not currently the best place to be in. Nightfolks have taken over. People are allowed to get in, but not out. Maybe you're the one to resolve this crisis.” What a strange thing to say. The young man looked at him suspiciously. It really felt like that somehow this stranger had some kind of understanding who he was. But how? However, his train of thoughts got crashed by the sound of many steps coming his way. Instinctively he hid himself into the very narrow alley that was between the inn and some other building. It was too tight for a human, but for his cat form it was a perfect spot to hide. His black fur merged together with the shadows and he stood still, waiting for the group to pass by. Soon he could distinguish a pack of Nightfolks stomping along the main street. And inside their tight formation were the young wizard and the thief. The wizard looked scared and anxious, and this sight made the young man's heart ache a bit. Meanwhile the older man tried to beg that his captor's would set him free. But the Nightfolks didn't listen. None of the group noticed the cat that lurked in the shadows, watching them to pass by. He left his little hideout only after they had proceeded further into the town. He peeked around the corner to watch how the Nightfolks were taking the duo to the castle. As he stared intently at their receding figures, he decided that he had to help them. After all, he needed the wizard's aid. “Are those your friends?” the bard asked, still plucking the strings of his instrument like he had no worries at all. “Seems like they got into trouble. Do you want to lend them a helping hand?” The young man shifted the gaze of his deep blue eyes at the stranger's face and just stared at him for a moment, trying to figure out what kind of person he was. There definitely was something odd about him, but he didn't seem malicious. Then he decided to answer to the older man's question: “Yes. I do want to help them.” Meanwhile, the Nightfolks were taking Nicolas and Edgar towards the castle. Under normal circumstances, the young wizard would have been excited to see the many wonders of Skygold Town, but unfortunately, his situation wouldn't allow it at the moment. Now he could only go where the Nightfolks were leading him along with Edgar. Every now and then the beastmen would poke him with their weapons at his back if they felt like that he was walking too slowly. Not even a single word left the mouths of the Nightfolks, even though Edgar kept pleading and complaining the whole time. Their cold yet calm presence felt oppressive and threatening. Nicolas didn't understand this situation at all and that was probably the main reason he was scared. He was walking into the unknown, guided by the bloodthirsty weapons of beastmen. Eventually the convoy reached the gates of the small castle. They were open, and probably usually would appear welcoming, but now the gates were guarded by another pack of Nightfolks. They were eyeing the group, but didn't really seem to care much about them, and so their encounter was short and uneventful. Nicolas, Edgar and the Nightfolks surrounding them disappeared into the mouth of the great building, heading to its belly. A grand hall greeted them and it seemed that it was leading right to the deepest parts of the castle. The great hall was split by a red carpet that was just as long as the hall itself. Numerous paintings decorated the walls and the place got illumination from many candles that were set on beautiful candleholders. The place looked pleasant, but this wasn't where the Nightfolks were taking them. The beastmen guided Nicolas and Edgar to a smaller corridor that was accessible on their left, and took them to a much less grand part of the castle. Nightfolks were leading them through duller and darker corridors that were zigzagging around the building in such a manner that Nicolas completely lost his sense of direction. And as they kept wandering inside the castle, few humans passed by, most likely servants. To see fellow humans was a welcomed sight in the young wizard's mind, even though there were no interactions. There hadn't been many humans on their way, so it felt sort of relieving to know that they still existed in this town. None of the servants paid attention to the convoy, it was like they had got used to seeing Nightfolks bring prisoners in. Nicolas had stopped for a brief moment to watch what the servants were doing, but got soon a light sting of a sharp weapon in his back as a sign to keep moving, so he did. At some point they began to descend a set of stairs. The surroundings became more dark and dreary, and the young wizard wondered why was that. Then they came to a big metal door that was guarded by few Nightfolks. One of these guards inserted a key into the lock and the door opened horribly screeching; the sound was so piercing that if felt like something was grating the walls inside the young wizard's head. The group walked through the now open doorway and found out even more stairs that led down. They were descending into a world of darkness, only few torches that were hanging on the walls offered some light for the group. The stairs swirled around deeper and deeper until they finally led the convoy to a long corridor. There lingered a foul musty smell in the air, along with a horrid scent of feces. Nicolas realized that this place was a prison. As they walked further in, the young wizard's curious stare wandered around the cells, just to see what kind of people had got locked up in here. There weren't many people held in captivity, and those few Nicolas saw didn't really pay any attention to the group. They sat in their cells in apathetic manner. The Nightfolks took Nicolas and Edgar to one of the cells that were farthest away. The door was slightly ajar. The beastmen opened it wide and pushed the men roughly inside, then closed the door forcefully, basically smacking it, and it got locked. Edgar took a grasp of one of the bars with his only hand, trying still to plead that the Nightfolks would let him go as the beastmen stomped away. Meanwhile Nicolas let his eyes wander around the cell where he had got abandoned. It wasn't particularly large, but not so little, either. The cell was rather empty, there was only a stack of dry hay, probably meant to be a spot to sleep in. Then there was a rusty bucket, and he didn't have to guess twice what its purpose was. The young wizard slowly sat down, his back against the brick wall, and he looked so lost and defeated. He tried to process what was happening. He could have never expected the possibility that he would get arrested just after arriving in Skygold Town. And for what? What had he done? What did the Nightfolks want from him? The young wizard's gaze shifted at Edgar who had just given up with his pleads and had sat down as well, his back resting against the opposite wall. Nicolas could feel his anxiety and fright subsiding and turning into anger as he stared at his older traveling companion, who clearly was somehow involved in this mess. But at the same time, Nicolas was very curious about the story behind all this. And so he spoke: “Edgar, what is happening?” The older man let out a heavy sight. All of a sudden, he seemed really exhausted and in the dim light coming from a torch in the corridor, he looked like he had aged a couple of years. “I suppose I owe you an explanation”, he said while scratching his beard. The young wizard stared intently at him, ready to hear the older man's tale. His amber eyes were shining in the light of a captured fire. “So… A couple of months ago I was traveling around here, in Skygold Town”, Edgar began explaining. “It was also when the Nightfolks were about to conquer the town. I ran into a group of these guys, and one of them was Paleface.” “Who is Paleface?” Nicolas asked, briefly interrupting the story. He remembered that his traveling companion had mentioned that name before. “She is the leader of these beastmen that are now in this town”, Edgar answered. “Unlike other Nightfolks, her fur is pure white, hence the name. But anyway, they weren't really happy that I was sneaking around these parts, it angered them somehow. They wanted to kill me and as I had no means to escape the situation, I begged for my life. I promised them that I would do anything they wanted. This is when Paleface gave me a mission. They would let me go if I did this task for them.” The man paused his story for a brief moment. It was like he was searching for the right words in order to continue. But as the seconds passed by and he remained silent, Nicolas asked: “What kind of mission Paleface gave you?” The young wizard wasn't able to read the emotions behind the eyes Edgar then had. “I was supposed to find them a mage and bring him to Skygold Town.” “You mean… me?” Nicolas whispered in disbelief. “But… why? How…?” He temporarily lost his ability to form sentences that made sense. He just stared at the older man, hoping that he would get the hint to continue his story. Instead, Edgar began to unbutton his vest surprisingly neatly. The young wizard didn't understand why, until the older man was done with this simple task. As his bare chest was revealed, amazement took hold of Nicolas. Right there, inserted to Edgar's chest, was a crescent moon-shaped jewel. Being very dark purple in color, it was glimmering ominously in the dim light coming from the torches. Pieces of flesh and veins were holding firmly the edges of the jewel, which looked kind of disgusting. “What… is that thing?” Nicolas asked, his gaze completely captured by the odd gem. “This is how I found you”, Edgar said. “Nightfolks inserted it to my chest. It can't be removed, at least not by force. It has two functions: it can detect someone with magical abilities, like you, and it can… well, kill me.” “Why?” It was all Nicolas could say. The older man started to button up his vest and a heavy sigh left his mouth. “It wasn't exactly you I was looking for”, Edgar said. “Any mage could have sufficed. But I guess I was lucky I bumped into you, since you're so young and inexperienced, both with your powers and with the world.” His tale got interrupted again as he chuckled a little. The young wizard could feel his cheeks becoming red, and he was glad that it couldn't be seen in this scarce illumination. Edgar's light laughter faded away. “The Nightfolks have a control over me”, he continued. “They can easily kill me anytime they want. I had no other choice but to do as they say. I had to bring you to them or I'd be a dead man.” “What do they want from me?” Nicolas asked. “Honestly, I don't know”, Edgar replied. “I thought it was best to not ask too many questions. I'm terribly sorry, Nicolas…” The young wizard could feel his previous anger returning. Edgar's head was hanging as if from great exhaustion and defeat, and perhaps he truly was going through remorse. But Nicolas could only feel rage at that moment. This man had pretended to be his friend, and had tangled him up into some mess with a barbaric race, and who knows what they would do to him, only because this cowardly thief wanted to save his own skin. However, the young wizard felt the same defeat. He leaned his head against the stone wall and looked up at the ceiling, not really focusing in anything particular. What would happen to him now? He felt so alone and trapped, even though he still had the older man rotting in the cell with him. But perhaps Edgar was going through same kind of emotions. Nicolas glanced at the older man. A question then came to his mind and he decided to say it aloud: “Does your wife and daughters know about this?” Edgar was silent for a good while as if a great mayhem was taking place inside his head. “They don't exist.” The young wizard blinked few times, being once more surprised by the man's words. “What… do you mean?” “I made them up”, Edgar confessed in a huff, seemingly being more angry at himself rather than the curious young man. “Many of the things I have told you have been lies. I just… I just wanted to be part of a story that's better than my life. I wish I had family. I wish that my lies would be true. But no, I'm nothing but a lowly thief.” Nicolas didn't know what to say. The older man's words were like poison, inflicting more pain the more he spoke. He didn't want to hear anything from him anymore. By the moment he had stepped into this town, his trust for this man had shattered, but now it was in even more pieces. But perhaps Edgar had already said all the words he had, as his head was hanging and he didn't want to meet the young wizard's gaze. Nicolas wrapped his cloak around him as if seeking even tiniest bit of comfort from it and looked at the opposite empty cell. A turmoil of emotions was raging inside of him. He felt betrayed. Angry. Lonely. Frightened. Anxious. Uncertain. The fear of unknown was gnawing his heart. Having no idea what was going to happen next made him tremble. He could only wait and hope for the best, even if it was hard to do. Then his thoughts got directed towards the black cat. Nicolas didn't blame him for fleeing. They weren't great friends or anything like that, so he didn't expect that he would want to stick around and get arrested as well. But, Nicolas did feel slightly betrayed by him, too. Still, he maintained a tiny bit of hope that the black cat would come and rescue him. He was still free. In the young wizard's head, that was the only way to get out of this situation. But there were no guarantees. Only childish hope. For now, he could only sit in his cell, waiting, fighting against his fears and anxieties.Velhon kissa - Luku 8Luku 8: Edgarin tarina Kissanhahmoinen nuorukainen syöksyi Taivaankullan kaupungin leveän pääkadun läpi. Se oli päällystetty siisteillä, sileillä valkeilla kivillä, ja se johti suoraan pienehköön linnaan, tämän asutuksen kruununjalokiveen. Koko kaupunki näytti loistokkaalta, mutta outoa kyllä, näkyvillä ei juurikaan ollut ihmisiä. Voisi olettaa, että tällainen varakas paikka olisi täynnä touhukkaita ihmisiä, niin kaupungin asukkaita kuin monista eri paikoista tulleita matkalaisiakin, etenkin kun tällä kaupungilla oli satama. Täällä oli selkeästi jotakin outoa meneillään, nuorukainen mietti itsekseen hidastaessaan vauhtiaan, lopulta pysähtyen kokonaan majatalolta vaikuttavan rakennuksen eteen. Mielessään hän yritti koota kasaan palasia siitä mitä oli tapahtumassa. Päätellen siitä seikasta että tältä suunnalta ei ollut tullut vastaan matkustajia ja että petomiehet olivat vartioineet portteja, vaikutti siltä että Yönväki oli vallannut Taivaankullan kaupungin. Ennen kuin hän oli astunut jalallaankaan kaupunkiin hän oli aistinut että jokin oli pielessä, mutta kuinka tarkalleen, hän ei tiennyt. Hänen olisi pitänyt kuunnella vaistojaan. Ja se mies, se varas… Hän oli jotenkin osallisena tähän kaikkeen. Nuori mies pudisti päätään. Mikseivät kuolleiden äänet olleet varoittaneet häntä että varkaasta koituisi ongelmia? Siinä miehessä oli takuulla jotakin hyvin paljon pielessä. Nuorukainen tunsi hieman syyllisyyttä että oli jättänyt nuoren velhon yksin sellaisen henkilön kanssa. ”Mitä sinä mietiskelet, pieni kissaystäväiseni?” Mies kissan hahmossa lähes hypähti ilmaan koska säikähti yhtäkkistä ääntä. Hän ei ollut huomannut kenenkään tulevan lähelleen, ja hän katsoi sen henkilön suuntaan joka oli juuri puhunut. Tämä oli hieman vanhempi mies ja päätellen hänen vaatteistaan sekä siitä, että hän näppäili verkkaisesti luuttua muistuttavan soittimen kieliä, hän oli bardi. Mies nojaili majatalon ovea vasten ja ystävällinen hymy koristi hänen kasvojaan. Vaikka hän vaikuttikin olevan hyväntahtoinen, nuori mies oli varovainen. Hän tuijotti tuon vieraan kasvoja syvänsinisillä silmillään, muttei sanonut ainuttakaan sanaa. Bardi naurahti hieman. ”Vaikuttaa siltä että vasta saavuit Taivaankullan kaupunkiin. Se on varsin kaunis, mutta ei tällä hetkellä paras paikka jossa olla. Yönväki on ottanut kaupungin haltuunsa. Ihmisten sallitaan päästä sisälle, muttei pois. Ehkä sinä olet se, joka selvittää tämän sotkun.” Miten omituinen asia sanoa. Nuori mies katsoi häntä epäluuloisesti. Hänestä todella tuntui että jotenkin tällä muukalaisella oli jonkinlainen käsitys siitä kuka hän oli. Mutta kuinka? Kuitenkin, hänen ajatuksenjuoksunsa katkaisi häntä lähestyvien monien askelten ääni. Vaistonvaraisesti hän piilotti itsensä hyvin kapealle kujalle joka oli majatalon ja toisen rakennuksen välissä. Se oli liian ahdas ihmiselle, mutta hänen kissahahmolleen se oli täydellinen piilopaikka. Hänen musta turkkinsa sulautui yhteen varjojen kanssa ja hän seisoi paikoillaan, odottaen ryhmän kulkevan ohitse. Pian hän pystyi erottamaan joukon Yönväkeä tömistelemässä pääkatua pitkin. Ja sisällä heidän tiukassa muodostelmassaan olivat nuori velho ja varas. Velho näytti pelokkaalta ja hermostuneelta, ja tämä näky sai nuoren miehen tuntemaan pienen piston sydämessään. Samaan aikaan vanhempi mies yritti anella että hänen vangitsijansa päästäisivät hänet vapaaksi. Mutta Yönväki ei kuunnellut. Kukaan ryhmästä ei huomannut kissaa joka piileksi varjoissa, katsoen heidän liikkuvan ohitseen. Hän jätti pienen piilopaikkansa vasta sitten kun he olivat edenneet pidemmälle kaupunkiin. Hän kurkisti nurkan takaa nähdäkseen kuinka Yönväki vei kaksikkoa kohti linnaa. Hänen katsellessaan tarkkaavaisesti heidän loittonevia hahmojaan, hän päätti, että hänen olisi autettava heitä. Loppujen lopuksi, hän tarvitsi velhon apua. ”Ovatko nuo ystäviäsi?” bardi kysyi, yhä näppäillen soittimensa kieliä kuin hänellä ei olisi lainkaan huolia. ”Vaikuttaa siltä että he joutuivat vaikeuksiin. Haluatko ojentaa heille auttavan käden?” Nuori mies siirsi syvänsinisten silmiensä katseen kohti muukalaisen kasvoja ja vain tuijotti häntä tovin, yrittäen selvittää minkälainen henkilö tämä oikein oli. Hänessä ehdottomasti oli jotakin outoa, mutta hän ei vaikuttanut pahantahtoiselta. Sitten hän päätti vastata vanhemman miehen kysymykseen: ”Kyllä. Haluan auttaa heitä.” Sillä aikaa, Yönväki oli viemässä Nicolasia ja Edgaria kohti linnaa. Normaaleissa olosuhteissa, nuori velho olisi ollut innoissaan nähdessään Taivaankullan kaupungin monet ihmeet, mutta valitettavasti, hänen tilanteensa ei sallisi sitä tällä hetkellä. Nyt hän voisi mennä ainoastaan sinne minne Yönväki johdatti häntä Edgarin kanssa. Aina välillä petomiehet tökkivät häntä selkään aseillaan jos heistä tuntui siltä että hän käveli liian hitaasti. Yksikään sana ei lähtenyt Yönväen suusta, vaikka Edgar jatkoikin pyytelyä ja valitusta koko ajan. Heidän kylmä mutta rauhallinen olemus tuntui painostavalta ja uhkaavalta. Nicolas ei ymmärtänyt tätä tilannetta alkuunkaan ja tämä oli luultavasti pääsyy hänen pelolleen. Hän oli kävelemässä kohti tuntematonta, petomiesten verenjanoisten aseiden opastamana. Lopulta saattue saapui pienen linnan porteille. Ne olivat auki, ja luultavasti yleensä toivottivat väen tervetulleeksi, mutta nyt portteja vartioi toinen joukko Yönväkeä. He silmäilivät ryhmää, mutta eivät vaikuttaneet välittävän juurikaan heistä, ja niin heidän kohtaamisensa jäi lyhyeksi ja tapahtumaköyhäksi. Nicolas, Edgar ja heitä ympäröivä Yönväki katosivat suuren rakennuksen suuhun, suunnaten kohti sen vatsaa. Mahtava halli tervehti heitä ja näytti siltä että se johti suoraan linnan syvimpiin osiin. Suuren hallin halkaisi punainen matto joka oli yhtä pitkä kuin itse käytäväkin. Lukuisat maalaukset koristivat seiniä ja paikka sai valaistuksensa monista kynttilöistä jotka oli aseteltu kauniisiin kynttilänjalkoihin. Paikka näytti mieluisalta, mutta tämä ei ollut se minne Yönväki oli heitä viemässä. Petomiehet ohjasivat Nicolasin ja Edgarin pienempään käytävään joka oli avoimena heidän vasemmalla puolellaan, vieden heidät paljon vähemmän loistokkaaseen osaan linnasta. Yönväki johdatti heitä läpi tylsempien ja synkempien käytävien jotka mutkittelivat ympäri rakennusta sellaiseen tyyliin että Nicolas kadotti täysin suuntavaistonsa. Ja heidän jatkaessa vaelteluaan linnan sisässä, muutama ihminen ohitti heidät, todennäköisimmin palvelijoita. Ihmistoverien näkeminen oli tervetullut näky nuoren velhon mielestä, vaikkakin mitään vuorovaikutusta ei tapahtunut. Heidän tiellään ei ollut ollut montaakaan ihmistä, joten se tuntui tavallaan helpottavalta tietää että heitä yhä oli olemassa tässä kaupungissa. Yksikään palvelijoista ei kiinnittänyt huomiota saattueeseen, oli kuin he olisivat tottuneet näkemään Yönväen tuovan vankeja sisään. Nicolas oli pysähtynyt pieneksi hetkeksi katselemaan mitä palvelijat tekivät, mutta sai pian kevyen piston terävästä aseesta selkäänsä merkiksi jatkaa kävelemistä, joten niin hän teki. Jossain kohtaa he alkoivat laskeutua portaita alas. Ympäristö muuttui pimeämmäksi ja kolkommaksi, ja nuori velho ihmetteli miksi. Sitten he tulivat suuren metallisen oven luokse jota vartioi muutama Yönväestä. Yksi näistä vartijoista pani avaimen lukkoon ja ovi avautui kammottavasti kirskahtaen; ääni oli niin läpitunkeva että tuntui siltä kuin jokin olisi raastanut seiniä nuoren velhon pään sisällä. Ryhmä käveli läpi nyt auki olevasta oviaukosta ja löysi vielä lisää alas vieviä portaita. He olivat laskeutumassa pimeyden maailmaan, vain muutamat seinillä roikkuvat soihdut tarjosivat jonkinlaista valoa ryhmälle. Portaat pyörteilivät ympäri syvemmälle ja syvemmälle kunnes ne vihdoin johdattivat saattueen pitkälle käytävälle. Epämiellyttävä tunkkainen löyhkä viipyili ilmassa, inhottavan ulosteiden hajun kanssa. Nicolas tajusi että tämä paikka oli vankila. Heidän kävellessään sisemmälle, nuoren velhon utelias katse vaelteli pitkin sellejä, ihan vain nähdäkseen minkälaisia ihmisiä tänne oli lukittuna. Montaakaan ihmistä ei ollut vangittuna täällä, ja nuo muutamat jotka Nicolas näki eivät oikeastaan kiinnittäneet mitään huomiota ryhmään. He istuivat selleissään apaattisen oloisina. Yönväki vei Nicolasin ja Edgarin yhteen selleistä jotka olivat kauimpana. Ovi oli hieman raollaan. Petomiehet avasivat sen täysin ja työnsivät miehet kovakouraisesti sisään, sitten sulkivat oven voimakkaasti, periaatteessa läimäyttäen sen, ja se meni lukkoon. Edgar tarttui yhteen kaltereista ainoalla kädellään, yrittäen yhä anoa että Yönväki päästäisi hänet menemään petomiesten tömistellessä poispäin. Sillä välin Nicolas antoi silmiensä vaeltaa pitkin selliä johon hänet oli hylätty. Se ei ollut erityisen iso, muttei pieni myöskään. Selli oli varsin tyhjä, siellä oli ainoastaan kasa kuivaa heinää, luultavasti tarkoitettu paikaksi jossa nukkua. Sitten siellä oli ruosteinen ämpäri, ja hänen ei tarvinnut arvata kahdesti mikä sen tarkoitus oli. Nuori velho istuutui hitaasti alas, hänen selkänsä vasten tiiliseinää, ja hän näytti niin hukassa olevalta ja kukistetulta. Hän yritti käsitellä mitä oli tapahtumassa. Hän ei olisi koskaan osannut odottaa sitä mahdollisuutta että joutuisi pidätetyksi juuri Taivaankullan kaupunkiin saapumisen jälkeen. Ja mistä syystä? Mitä hän oli tehnyt? Mitä Yönväki halusi häneltä? Nuoren velhon katse siirtyi Edgariin joka oli juuri luovuttanut pyyntöjensä suhteen ja istunut alas myöskin, hänen selkänsä leväten vasten vastakkaista seinää. Nicolas pystyi tuntemaan ahdistuksensa ja pelkonsa laantuvan ja muuttuvan suuttumukseksi hänen tuijottaessaan vanhempaa matkakumppaniaan, joka selkeästi liittyi tähän sotkuun jollain tavalla. Mutta samaan aikaan, Nicolas oli hyvin utelias tarinasta tämän kaiken takana. Ja niin hän puhui: ”Edgar, mitä on meneillään?” Vanhempi mies päästi ulos syvän huokauksen. Äkisti hän vaikutti hyvin uupuneelta ja hämärässä valossa joka tuli käytävässä olevasta soihdusta, hän näytti siltä kuin olisi vanhentunut muutaman vuoden. ”Arvelen, että olen sinulle selityksen velkaa”, hän sanoi samalla kun raapi partaansa. Nuori velho katsoi häntä keskittyneesti, valmiina kuulemaan vanhemman miehen tarinan. Hänen meripihkasilmänsä loistivat vangitun tulen valossa. ”Joten… Muutama kuukausi sitten olin matkustelemassa näillä main, Taivaankullan kaupungissa”, Edgar aloitti selostamisen. ”Se oli myös milloin Yönväki aloitteli kaupungin valtausta. Törmäsin ryhmään näitä kavereita, ja yksi heistä oli Kalpeanaama.” ”Kuka on Kalpeanaama?” Nicolas kysyi, hetkeksi keskeyttäen tarinan. Hän muisti että hänen matkakumppaninsa oli maininnut tuon nimen aiemmin. ”Hän on näiden nyt kaupungissa olevien petomiesten johtaja”, Edgar vastasi. ”Toisin kuin muulla Yönväellä, hänen turkkinsa on puhtaanvalkoinen, siitä nimi. Mutta kuitenkin, he eivät oikein olleet iloisia siitä että hiiviskelin näillä nurkilla, se suututti heidät jollakin tavalla. He halusivat tappaa minut ja koska minulla ei ollut keinoja paeta tilanteesta, anelin henkeni puolesta. Lupasin heille että tekisin mitä tahansa he haluaisivat. Tässä kohtaa Kalpeanaama antoi minulle tehtävän. He antaisivat minun mennä jos tekisin tämän työn heille.” Mies keskeytti tarinansa pieneksi hetkeksi. Oli kuin hän olisi etsinyt oikeita sanoja voidakseen jatkaa. Mutta sekuntien lipuessa ohitse ja hänen pysyessä vaiti, Nicolas kysyi: ”Minkälaisen tehtävän Kalpeanaama antoi sinulle?” Nuori velho ei pystynyt lukemaan minkälaisia tunteita Edgarin silmien taakse sitten kätkeytyi. ”Minun oli tarkoitus löytää heille maagi ja tuoda hänet Taivaankullan kaupunkiin.” ”Tarkoitatko… minua?” Nicolas kuiskasi epäuskoisena. ”Mutta… miksi? Miten…?” Väliaikaisesti hän menetti kykynsä muodostaa lauseita joissa oli järkeä. Hän vain tuijotti vanhempaa miestä, toivoen että hän ymmärtäisi vihjeen jatkaa tarinaansa. Sen sijaan, Edgar alkoi napittaa auki liiviään yllättävän näppärästi. Nuori velho ei ymmärtänyt miksi, ennen kuin vanhempi mies oli valmis yksinkertaisen tehtävänsä kanssa. Hänen paljaan rintansa paljastuessa, ihmetys otti otteen Nicolasista. Juuri siinä, Edgarin rintaan upotettuna, oli kuunsirpin muotoinen jalokivi. Ollen hyvin tummanvioletti väriltään, se kimalteli pahaenteisesti himmeässä soihduista tulevassa valossa. Kappaleet kudosta ja suonia pitivät tiukasti kiinni jalokiven reunoista, mikä näytti jokseenkin kuvottavalta. ”Mikä… tuo juttu on?” Nicolas kysyi, outo kivi oli kokonaan vanginnut hänen katseensa. ”Näin minä löysin sinut”, Edgar sanoi. ”Yönväki asetti sen rintaani. Sitä ei voi poistaa, ainakaan väkipakolla. Sillä on kaksi tarkoitusta: se pystyy havaitsemaan jonkun jolla on maagisia kykyjä, kuten sinut, ja se voi… no, tappaa minut.” ”Miksi?” Oli ainut asia jonka Nicolas pystyi sanomaan. Vanhempi mies ryhtyi napittamaan liiviään kiinni ja raskas huokaus pääsi hänen suustaan. ”Se et ollut juuri sinä jota etsin”, Edgar sanoi. ”Kuka tahansa maagi olisi kelvannut. Mutta luulen että olin onnekas kun törmäsin sinuun, koska olet niin nuori ja kokematon, niin voimiesi kuin maailmankin kanssa.” Hänen tarinansa keskeytyi jälleen hänen naurahtaessaan hieman. Nuori velho pystyi tuntemaan punan kohoavan poskilleen, ja hän oli iloinen että sitä ei pystynyt näkemään tässä niukassa valossa. Edgarin kevyt nauru haihtui. ”Yönväellä on ote minusta”, hän jatkoi. ”He voivat helposti tappaa minut koska tahansa. Minulla ei ollut muuta vaihtoehtoa kuin tehdä niin kuin he haluavat. Minun oli tuotava sinut heille tai olisin mennyttä miestä.” ”Mitä he haluavat minusta?” Nicolas kysyi. ”Totta puhuen, en tiedä”, Edgar vastasi. ”Arvelin että oli parasta olla kyselemättä liikaa. Olen todella pahoillani, Nicolas…” Nuori velho kykeni tuntemaan edellisen suuttumuksensa palaavan. Edgarin pää riippui kuin suuren uupumuksen ja tappion seurauksena, ja kenties hän todella oli käymässä läpi katumusta. Mutta Nicolas pystyi tuntemaan vain raivoa tuolla hetkellä. Tämä mies oli esittänyt olevansa hänen ystävänsä, ja oli sotkenut hänet johonkin sotkuun barbaarisen rodun kanssa, ja kuka ties mitä he tekisivät hänelle, vain koska tämä pelkurimainen varas halusi pelastaa oman nahkansa. Kuitenkin, nuori velho tunsi saman häviön tunteen. Hän nojasi päätään kiviseinää vasten ja katsoi ylös kattoon, keskittymättä kuitenkaan mihinkään erityisesti. Mitä hänelle nyt tapahtuisi? Hän tunsi olonsa niin yksinäiseksi ja ansaan jääneeksi, vaikka hänellä edelleen oli vanhempi mies hänen kanssaan mätänemässä sellissä. Mutta kenties Edgar oli käymässä läpi samankaltaisia tunteita. Nicolas vilkaisi vanhempaa miestä. Sitten kysymys tuli hänen mieleensä ja hän päätti lausua sen ääneen: ”Tietävätkö vaimosi ja tyttäresi tästä?” Edgar oli vaiti hyvän aikaa aivan kuin suuri sekasorto olisi raivonnut hänen päänsä sisällä. ”He eivät ole olemassa.” Nuori velho räpäytteli silmiään muutaman kerran, jälleen yllättyneenä miehen sanoista. ”Mitä… sinä tarkoitat?” ”Minä keksin heidät”, Edgar tunnusti puhisten, ilmeisesti ollen enemmänkin vihainen itselleen kuin uteliaalle nuorelle miehelle. ”Monet niistä asioista joita olen kertonut sinulle ovat olleet valhetta. Minä vain… Minä vain halusin olla osana tarinaa joka on parempi kuin elämäni. Toivoisin että valheeni olisivat totta. Mutta ei, en ole muuta kuin alhainen varas.” Nicolas ei tiennyt mitä sanoa. Vanhemman miehen sanat olivat kuin myrkkyä, aiheuttaen sitä enemmän kipua mitä enemmän hän puhui. Hän ei halunnut kuulla enää mitään muuta häneltä. Siitä hetkestä jona hän oli astunut tähän kaupunkiin, hänen luottamuksensa tähän mieheen oli särkynyt, mutta nyt se oli vielä enemmän palasina. Mutta ehkä Edgar oli jo sanonut kaikki sanansa mitä hänellä oli, sillä hänen päänsä riippui ja hän ei halunnut kohdata nuoren velhon katsetta. Nicolas kääri viittansa ympärilleen kuin hakien siitä edes pienen pientä lohdutusta ja katsoi vastakkaista tyhjää selliä. Tunteiden kaaos riehui hänen sisällään. Hänestä tuntui petetyltä. Vihaiselta. Pelokkaalta. Ahdistuneelta. Epävarmalta. Tuntemattoman pelko kalvoi hänen sydäntään. Hän vapisi, koska hänellä ei ollut aavistustakaan siitä, mitä seuraavaksi tapahtuisi. Hän pystyi vain odottamaan ja toivomaan parasta, vaikkakin se olisi vaikeaa. Sitten hänen ajatuksensa suuntautuivat mustaan kissaan. Nicolas ei syyttänyt häntä pakenemisesta. He eivät olleet hyviä ystäviä tai mitään sen kaltaista, joten hän ei olettanut että tämä haluaisi pysyä paikalla ja joutua pidätetyksi myöskin. Mutta, Nicolas tunsi olonsa hieman petetyksi myös hänen toimestaan. Silti, hän elätteli pikkuista toivetta että musta kissa tulisi ja pelastaisi hänet. Hän oli yhä vapaa. Nuoren velhon mielessä, se oli ainoa keino päästä pois tästä tilanteesta. Mutta takuita ei ollut. Vain lapsellista toivoa. Toistaiseksi, hän pystyi vain istumaan sellissään, odottaen, kamppaillen pelkojaan ja ahdistuksiaan vastaan.The Wizard's Cat - Chapter 7Chapter 7: The betrayal After the strange talking cat joined him, Nicolas basically tiptoed through the nightly woods, trying to move as quietly as possible when looking for the camp where he had left Edgar, the cat clinging on his shoulders. He didn't want to wake up the older man. While navigating in the forest, the young wizard noticed that the strange feeling he had been having was almost gone, leaving only small bit of it behind. He wondered why was that. He decided to ask about it from his new companion since he seemed to be knowledgeable about things. “You know…” Nicolas tried to keep his voice low. “I had this odd feeling when I got here. It sort of guided me to deeper into the forest where the unicorn was. I wonder what was that, because I don't really sense it anymore.” “I felt it as well”, the cat responded. “It's because some magical beings emit their magical energy. Kind of. I don't understand it much myself. The unicorn has taken distance, and so, the sensation has weakened. Common people usually won't notice things like this at all. It's the mages like you and me who have the gift to sense it.” “You're a mage too?” Nicolas sounded a little surprised. “Of course, you idiot”, the cat answered with amusement in his voice. “Talking cats don't exist.” This caused Nicolas to feel embarrassment. He should have known. He felt heat on his cheeks due to blushing and was happy that there was too dark to see clearly how red his face was. This tiny awkward moment silenced him and he kept walking in quietness. He hadn't wandered that far off to begin with, so it didn't take him that much time to reach the camp. Everything seemed to be fine. Edgar was still fast asleep and in the little campfire they had crafted smoke was still rising from it. The young wizard sought the depression his body had previously formed on the soft moss and laid down. He wrapped his cloak around him like a blanket, yawned a little and fell asleep in a short moment. The black cat had hopped to the ground and curled up near the campfire, closing his eyes. All three of them had a peaceful night. When the new day had dawned, Edgar, as usual, was the first one to wake from his sleep. He was surprised by the fact that their group had got a new member and shook Nicolas awake a bit more roughly than typically. “Look, here's a cat!” Edgar almost shouted enthusiastically before the young wizard was even completely conscious. “What?” This was the only answer Nicolas managed to give as he groggily rose from his moss bed, trying to come to his senses. “Here's a cat! Look! Where do you think it came from?” There was some excitement in the older man's voice, he really resembled a kid who was thrilled to see unfamiliar animal this close. As Nicolas looked at the direction where Edgar was pointing, he noticed that the black cat was awake as well, sitting next to the remains of a campfire. The cat was staring at Edgar with his deep blue eyes, but there was no way to tell what he was thinking. Nicolas scratched his head a little. “I… I, uh…“ The young wizard was slowly waking up. “I met him in the forest. Or no, actually I met him at the village, but now met him again… Is that a problem?” “No, not at all!” Edgar claimed. “Do you think it will company us? That would be like a blessing, having a furry friend around!” “'He', not 'it'”, the cat grunted, swinging his tail a little. This really surprised the older man. He just stared at the cat his mouth open, not really being able to form words. Apparently, he has not met talking cats on his journey either, Nicolas noticed. Good to know. “Edgar, this is… uh…” Nicolas glanced at the cat, struggling with words. “What was your name again?” “I have no name”, the cat responded bluntly. Edgar scratched his beard, looking thoughtful. “How come you don't have a name?” he asked. “It's none of your business, thief”, the cat replied with irritation in his voice. Edgar looked like that the cat had just spitted those words at his face. The man's mouth was closing and opening like a fish does and he looked a little pale. When it seemed that he had managed to get a little bit of hold of himself, he still managed to utter only few words: “How did you…?” Nicolas followed this scene unfolding with worry. His gaze jumped between the cat and the older man as those two eyed each other intensively. Edgar's good mood was now gone. He really looked like someone who had got caught with a big lie. If he had been innocent, he wouldn't have reacted like this. It seemed like that what the cat had revealed earlier to Nicolas was true. Edgar was a thief. The young wizard felt a horrible churn in his stomach. It was this situation that made him feel bad. He had known Edgar for a while now, but the older man apparently had kept his true background hidden from him. What else had he lied about? Nicolas felt helpless. He didn't know what to do or say. Perhaps the appearing of the cat was a bad thing. At least he had managed to shatter the peace of the men's journey. Who knows what trouble he would bring. At last, Edgar was the one who put an end to this tense situation. He shook his head as if that would help him to shake off the accusation the cat had made. Then he began to stomp at the remains of their campfire and soon after that he picked up his bag from the ground and threw it onto his back. “We should start to get going”, the older man simply stated and immediately began to continue their journey, even before the young wizard was ready. Nicolas finally got himself up from the moss bed and snatched his bag as well, hurrying after Edgar. The black cat followed, walking side by side with Nicolas. The young wizard glanced at him, not really sure what to think about this new addition to their group. They hadn't got far yet when Nicolas had to open his mouth. The question was burning on his tongue. “So… Are you really a thief?” he asked, obviously targeting this interrogation at the older man. The man remained silent for a little while, clearly pondering something. “Yes, yes I am”, Edgar answered quietly. “Oh… Why didn't you tell that?” Nicolas inquired. The cat let out a loud chuckle. “That's not something people will tell you when you meet them”, he said, amused. The young wizard felt stupid again. That talking cat was good at making Nicolas feel embarrassed. The young wizard blushed, once again silenced by the awkward feeling. They walked silently, the only sound almost being their steps taking them forward. So far, the mood of the group had been rather gloomy, but that certainly wasn't the case with the weather. It was sunny day; the world was bright and the temperature was still raising to pleasantly warm. The whole nature seemed to be in a good mood, too. Birds were singing and even a couple of rabbits crossed the group's way. Eventually the beauty and the tenderness of the environment made Nicolas feel better. But that was no surprise; the nature had always had calming effect on him. With pleasant feeling, Nicolas could ponder things more peacefully. And of course, it was the criminal background of his older companion that was on his mind. He wasn't exactly sure what to think about it. Sure, it was wrong and against the laws, but things aren't so black and white. Like, the theft could be justified if one was stealing food for their family. Maybe Edgar was that kind of guy, since he didn't seem bad. In Rose Path village, thievery wasn't common at all. The folks in young wizard's hometown were an honest bunch, so not a lot of crimes happened in there overall. Even if someone did steal, they probably were allowed to keep their hands. To Nicolas it seemed that chopping off someone's hand was a bit extreme punishment. What had Edgar stolen that it had cost him his hand? Nicolas didn't dare to ask. In fact, he didn't even dare to talk about this whole thief matter. And it seemed like that neither did Edgar or the cat. As the time and landscape passed by, Edgar started to feel more relaxed, and thus, the mood of their little group got lifted. He seemed to get back to his old cheerful self, while the cat remained rather silent. No one brought up the topic about Edgar being a thief. It was a thing that had got swept under the rug. The young wizard didn't mind that. He wasn't good at handling conflicts. And so, their group of three continued their journey like nothing had happened. Eventually the woods got swiped away, revealing enormous grasslands. Nicolas was in awe for seeing such vast space. He could barely see to the other end of the area! In the cat's opinion his reaction was amusing, and he sneered a little, but the young wizard pretty much ignored him. The group began to cross the grasslands. After some time, a gentle wind started to blow, caressing the travelers and the grass and the branches of some lonely trees that dotted the place here and there. It wished for the trio a pleasant journey and accompanied them until the nightfall, when it was sun's turn to retire from the sky. The group set up a camp and spent a peaceful night under the stars. In the morning they woke up early and continued their travel to Skygold Town. However, they weren't the only ones wandering in the grasslands. They encountered a couple of hunters from a tribe of people that inhabited in this area. These strangers were riding on their horses, which were the most valuable animal for them. The tribesmen were quite friendly folk and even offered small chunks of dried meat for the group. After this nice meeting their ways separated and the group continued on their path to cross the grasslands. It took them another day to reach the end of the area, and just when the darkness would envelope the world again, the group had arrived at the tree line of another forest, successfully concluding their journey through the grasslands. They would have probably had a peaceful night, but then the cat planted a seed of worry. He pointed out that it was odd that they hadn't encountered other people during their travel. It was especially strange because they were heading to a large town, so there should have been other travelers as well coming in and out of the place. Such thoughts hadn't even visited the mind of the young wizard, for he was completely possessed by excitement. The cat's observation did make him think, though. However, Edgar just brushed it off, his reasoning being that they were coming from a direction that wasn't the busy one, therefore, it wasn't that odd. The group didn't discuss the matter any further, and just went to sleep. They were getting closer to their destination. When the new day had dawned, the group woke up early to begin their last part of the journey to the great town. They had to just pass through a patch of woods and they would get to the outskirts of Skygold Town. It seemed like that the weather was in favor for them once again and the day turned out to be pleasant. The gentle sunshine caused Nicolas and Edgar to be in a good mood, but the cat stayed reserved. He didn't speak much at all while the young wizard and the older man kept a light conversation going as they walked forward. Finally, when the golden sun started to begin its descend from the sky, the group made it to their staging post: Skygold Town. The sight of huge structure was marvelous in Nicolas' eyes. He had never seen anything like it, he only had dreamed of places like this. The enormous walls surrounded the grand town, and a narrow stream was surrounding the place. From the direction where the group was coming, the road to the town transformed into a bridge that had to be crossed if you wanted get into the settlement. The beginning of the bridge was guarded by two huge statues that portrayed some mythical beasts which Nicolas couldn't identify. Skygold Town was mostly concealed by its great walls, making it tempting for travelers to enter the gate and see what kind of life lies within. Of course, this made the young wizard very excited and eager to experience the town by himself. He didn't even realize that his pace accelerated as he kept going forward, Edgar and the cat following him with more level-headedly. As their path took them to the long stone bridge and they began to cross it, Nicolas noticed something extraordinary waiting at the end of the structure. There was a dozen of figures around the gate to the town. It looked like they were guarding something. As the trio got closer and closer, Nicolas was finally able to distinguish what they were. Nightfolks. That's what Edgar had called them? Beings that were like a crossover of a human and a boar. They were bipedal creatures and clearly taller than average humans – even taller than Nicolas, even though he was pretty tall. They were also very muscular and no wonder; most of them wielded a large axe or a broad sword and were equipped with an armor that was partly thick leather and partly metal. They were covered in dark blue fur, which granted them their name. Nightfolks were obviously designed for battlefield and it was best to not provoke them. No one wanted to have one of these as their opponent. “Something is wrong”, the cat muttered silently as they walked closer to these beings. However, the two men didn't pay much attention to him. Nicolas felt different kind of excitement as their group walked closer the pack of Nightfolks. It was almost like he was meeting someone important. All the Nightfolks on the bridge had their eyes on the trio, but it wasn't possible to guess what thoughts they hid in their boar heads. Nicolas tried not to stare too much, but couldn't help it that these things fascinated him. None of the Nightfolks spoke anything as the group passed by, so their meeting remained short. They kept stationary as the trio entered Skygold Town. But it was a trap. The group had barely managed to walk into the town when they had got surrounded by a pack of Nightfolks. A circle of weapons, thirsting for blood, pointed at them and Nicolas had a feeling that if they did even a tiniest bit of mistake, it would be their blood that the weapons would taste. In a matter of seconds his excitement had turned into horror. The words got stuck in his throat and he couldn't say anything. Suddenly, his fate was in the hands of Nightfolks. The young wizard couldn't say anything even when the cat dashed away deeper into the town, his small figure easily passing through the circle of beastmen, abandoning Nicolas and Edgar. Nightfolks didn't seem to care about the cat at all, possibly thinking that he was just an animal, so they did nothing to stop him. Their attention was fully in the two men. While Nicolas was trembling from fear, Edgar stepped forward, smiling, looking way too calm. “Greetings, my friends!” he spoke. “I have brought to you what Paleface wanted!” Confusion found its way into the young wizard's mind. Did Edgar know these people? And who was Paleface? What was going on? Right at that moment, yet another Nightfolk appeared. But this one was slightly bigger than the rest and he had some odd ornament made of feathers decorating his head. Perhaps he was greater rank than the others? “You kept your word. Good.” His voice was deep and thick. “Take them to the jail.” This was when Edgar's face changed from smile to disbelief. “'Them'? But I did what was told! We had a deal!” he cried as some of Nightfolks began to lead him away along with Nicolas. The young wizard didn't know what to think about this situation. Too many thoughts were wrestling in his head as Nightfolks were taking them somewhere, occasionally poking them with their weapons as a reminder that there was no way out of this situation. But even in this uncertain state, one thing was for sure. Edgar had betrayed him.Velhon kissa - Luku 7Luku 7: Petos Sen jälkeen kun outo puhuva kissa liittyi hänen mukaansa, Nicolas periaatteessa hiipi läpi öisen metsän, yrittäen liikkua niin hiljaa kuin pystyi etsiessään leiriä minne hän oli jättänyt Edgarin, kissa roikkuen hänen harteillaan. Hän ei halunnut herättää vanhempaa miestä. Suunnistaessaan metsässä, nuori velho huomasi että se kummallinen tunne joka hänellä oli ollut oli nyt lähestulkoon poissa, jättäen vain pienen palasen sitä taakseen. Hän ihmetteli miksi näin oli. Hän päätti kysyä asiasta uudelta kumppaniltaan koska tämä vaikutti asioista perillä olevalta. ”Tiedätkös…” Nicolas yritti pitää äänensä matalana. ”Minulla oli eräs kummallinen tunne kun tulin tänne. Se tavallaan opasti minut syvemmälle metsään missä yksisarvinen oli. Minua ihmetyttää mikä se oikein oli, koska en oikein aisti sitä enää.” ”Minä tunsin sen myös”, kissa vastasi. ”Se johtuu siitä, että jotkin taikaolennot säteilevät maagista energiaansa. Tavallaan. En itse ymmärrä paljoakaan siitä. Yksisarvinen on ottanut etäisyyttä, ja niin, tuntemus on hälvennyt. Tavalliset ihmiset eivät yleensä huomaa tällaisia asioita ollenkaan. Se on sinun ja minun kaltaisten maagien lahja kyetä aistimaan ne.” ”Sinäkin olet maagi?” Nicolas kuulosti hivenen yllättyneeltä. ”Tietenkin, tomppeli”, kissa vastasi huvittuneisuutta äänessään. ”Puhuvia kissoja ei ole olemassa.” Tämä sai Nicolaksen tuntemaan olonsa nolostuneeksi. Hänen olisi pitänyt tietää. Hän tunsi kuumotusta poskissaan punastumisen takia ja oli iloinen siitä että oli liian pimeää nähdä kuinka punaisena hänen kasvonsa olivat. Tämä pieni kiusallinen hetki vaiensi hänet ja hän jatkoi kulkuaan hiljaisuudessa. Hän ei ollut vaeltanut kauas alkujaankaan, joten häneltä ei kulunut paljoa aikaa saapua leiriin. Kaikki vaikutti olevan kunnossa. Edgar oli yhä sikeässä unessa ja heidän tekaisemastaan pienestä nuotiosta nousi yhä savua. Nuori velho etsi hänen kehonsa aiemmin jättämää painaumaa pehmeästä sammaleesta ja asettui pitkäkseen. Hän kietaisi viittansa ympärilleen kuin peiton, haukotteli hieman ja nukahti pienen tovin kuluttua. Musta kissa oli hypännyt maahan ja kiertyi käppyrälle lähelle nuotiota, sulkien silmänsä. Kaikki kolme vietti rauhallisen yön. Kun uusi päivä koitti, Edgar, kuten tavallista, oli ensimmäinen joka heräsi unestaan. Hän oli yllättynyt siitä, että heidän porukkansa oli kasvanut yhdellä hengellä ja ravisteli Nicolaksen hereille hieman kovakouraisemmin kuin normaalisti. ”Katso, täällä on kissa!” Edgar lähes huudahti innostuneesti ennen kuin nuori velho oli edes kunnolla tajuissaan. ”Mitä?” Tämä oli ainoa vastaus minkä Nicolas kykeni antamaan noustessaan tokkuraisena sammalpediltään, yrittäen saavuttaa tietoisen tilan. ”Täällä on kissa! Katso! Mistä luulet sen tulleen?” Vanhemman miehen äänessä oli innokkuutta, hän todella muistutti lasta joka oli riemastunut nähdessään vieraan eläimen näin läheltä. Nicolaksen katsoessa suuntaan johon Edgar osoitti, hän huomasi että musta kissa oli hereillä myöskin, istuen nuotion jäännösten vieressä. Kissa tuijotti Edgaria syvänsinisillä silmillään, mutta oli mahdotonta kertoa mitä hän tuolla hetkellä ajatteli. Nicolas raapi hieman päätään. ”Minä… Minä, ööh…” Nuori velho oli hitaasti heräilemässä. ”Minä tapasin hänet metsässä. Tai ei, oikeastaan tapasin hänet kylässä, mutta kohtasin hänet nyt uudestaan… Onko se ongelma?” ”Ei, ei ollenkaan!” Edgar julisti. ”Luuletko, että se tulee seuralaiseksemme? Se olisi melkein kuin siunaus, saada karvainen ystävä seuraksi!” ”'Hän', ei 'se'”, kissa murahti, heilauttaen häntäänsä hiukan. Tämä todella yllätti vanhemman miehen. Hän vain tuijotti kissaa suu auki, kykenemättä juurikaan muodostamaan sanoja. Näköjään hänkään ei ollut kohdannut puhuvia kissoja matkoillaan, Nicolas huomasi. Hyvä tietää. ”Edgar, tämä on… öö…” Nicolas vilkaisi kissaa, kamppaillen sanojen kanssa. ”Mikä nimesi olikaan?” ”Minulla ei ole nimeä”, kissa vastasi suorasukaisesti. Edgar raapi partaansa, näyttäen mietteliäältä. ”Miten voi olla että sinulla ei ole nimeä?” hän kysyi. ”Se ei kuulu sinulle, varas”, kissa tiuskaisi ärtymystä äänessään. Edgar näytti siltä kuin kissa olisi juuri sylkäissyt nuo sanat hänen kasvoihinsa. Miehen suu sulkeutui ja avautui kuin kalalla ja hän näytti hieman kalpealta. Kun vaikutti siltä että hän oli onnistunut saamaan hitusen otteen itsestään, hän silti kykeni virkkomaan vain muutaman sanan: ”Kuinka sinä…?” Nicolas seurasi tämän kohtauksen kehittyvän huolestuneena. Hänen katseensa hyppi kissan ja vanhemman miehen välillä näiden kahden silmäillen tosiansa intensiivisesti. Edgarin hyvä tuuli oli nyt mennyttä. Hän todella näytti joltakulta joka oli jäänyt kiinni suuren valheen kanssa. Jos hän olisi ollut viaton, hän ei olisi reagoinut tällä tavalla. Vaikutti siltä että mitä kissa oli aiemmin paljastanut Nicolakselle oli totta. Edgar oli varas. Nuori velho tunsi ikävän myllerryksen vatsassaan. Se oli tämä tilanne joka sai hänet tuntemaan olonsa pahaksi. Hän oli tuntenut Edgarin jo jonkin aikaa, mutta vanhempi mies oli ilmeisesti pitänyt todellisen taustansa salassa häneltä. Mistä muusta hän oli valehdellut? Nicolas tunsi olonsa avuttomaksi. Hän ei tiennyt mitä tehdä tai sanoa. Kenties kissan ilmestyminen oli paha asia. Ainakin hän oli onnistunut pirstoamaan miesten matkan rauhan. Kuka tietää millaisia hankaluuksia hän saattaisi tuoda. Lopulta, Edgar oli se joka laittoi lopun tälle jännittyneelle tilanteelle. Hän pudisti päätään ihan kuin se voisi auttaa häntä ravistelemaan pois kissan tekemät syytökset. Sitten hän alkoi talloa heidän nuotionsa jäännöksiä ja pian sen jälkeen hän poimi pussinsa maasta ja heitti sen olalleen. ”Meidän pitäisi alkaa menemään”, vanhempi mies yksinkertaisesti tokaisi ja jatkoi välittömästi heidän matkaansa, ennen kuin nuori velho oli edes valmis. Nicolas vihdoin sai itsensä ylös sammalpediltään ja nappasi myös oman pussinsa, kiirehtien Edgarin perään. Musta kissa seurasi, kävellen rinnakkain Nicolaksen kanssa. Nuori velho vilkaisi hänen suuntaansa, epävarmana siitä mitä ajatella tästä uudesta lisästä heidän joukkoonsa. He eivät olleet vielä ehtineet kauas kun Nicolaksen oli pakko avata suunsa. Kysymys poltteli hänen kieltään. ”Joten… Oletko sinä todella varas?” hän kysyi, selkeästi osoittaen tämän kuulustelun vanhemmalle miehelle. Mies pysytteli hiljaa pienen tovin, selvästi miettien jotakin. ”Kyllä, kyllä minä olen”, Edgar vastasi hiljaa. ”Ai… Mikset kertonut sitä?” Nicolas tiedusteli. Kissa päästi ulos kovan hekotuksen. ”Se ei ole jotakin mitä ihmiset kertovat sinulle kun tapaatte”, hän sanoi, huvittuneena. Nuori velho tunsi itsensä typeräksi jälleen. Tuo puhuva kissa oli taitava saamaan Nicolaksen nolostumaan. Nuori velho punastui, jälleen kerran hiljentyen kiusallisen olon seurauksena. He kävelivät hiljaisesti, lähestulkoon ainoa ääni ollen heidän omat askeleensa jotka johdattivat heitä eteenpäin. Toistaiseksi, ryhmän mieliala oli ollut jokseenkin synkeä, mutta samaa ei todellakaan voinut sanoa säästä. Oli aurinkoinen päivä; maailma oli kirkas ja lämpötila oli yhä nousemassa mukavan lämpöiseksi. Myöskin koko luonto vaikutti olevan hyvällä tuulella. Linnut lauloivat ja jopa parin jäniksen polut ristesivät ryhmän tien kanssa. Lopulta ympäristön kauneus ja leppoisuus sai Nicolaksen mielialan kohoamaan. Mutta ei mikään yllätys; luonnolla oli aina ollut rauhoittava vaikutus häneen. Miellyttävän tunteen kanssa, Nicolas pystyi pohtimaan asioita rauhallisemmin. Ja tietenkin, se oli hänen vanhemman kumppaninsa rikollinen tausta joka hänellä oli mielessään. Hän ei ollut täysin varma mitä ajatella siitä. Toki, se oli väärin ja lakien vastaista, mutta asiat eivät aina ole niin mustavalkoisia. Kuten, varkaus voi olla oikeutettu jos joku varastaisi ruokaa perheelleen. Ehkä Edgar oli sellainen mies, koska hän ei vaikuttanut pahalta. Ruusupolun kylässsä ryöstöt eivät olleet yleisiä lainkaan. Väki nuoren velhon kotikylässä oli rehellistä sakkia, joten kaiken kaikkiaan siellä ei tapahtunut paljoa rikoksia. Ja vaikka joku olisikin näpistänyt, he varmaan saivat pitää kätensä. Nicolaksen mielestä vaikutti hieman äärimmäiseltä rangaistukselta leikata jonkun käsi irti. Mitä Edgar oli varastanut että se oli maksanut hänelle hänen katensä? Nicolas ei uskaltanut kysyä. Itse asiassa, hän ei kehdannut puhua tästä koko varasaiheesta. Ja vaikutti siltä että ei myöskään Edgar tai kissa. Ajan ja maiseman lipuessa ohitse, Edgar alkoi tuntua rennommalta, ja siten, heidän pienen ryhmänsä mieliala kohosi. Hän näytti palautuvan takaisin omaksi iloiseksi itsekseen, kun taas kissa pysytteli varsin vaitonaisena. Kukaan ei ottanut esille aihetta että Edgar oli varas. Se oli asia joka oli lakaistu maton alle. Tämä ei haitannut nuorta velhoa. Hän ei ollut hyvä käsittelemään konflikteja. Ja niin, heidän kolmen joukkionsa jatkoi matkaansa kuin mitään ei olisi tapahtunutkaan. Lopulta metsä pyyhkiytyi pois, paljastaen suunnattoman ruohotasangon. Nicolas oli aivan ällikällä nähdessään noin suuren paikan. Hän pystyi hädin tuskin näkemään toiselle puolelle aluetta! Kissan mielestä hänen reaktionsa oli huvittava, ja hän hymähti hieman, mutta nuori velho ei välittänyt tästä. Ryhmä ryhtyi ylittämään ruohotasankoa. Hetken tovin jälkeen, lempeä tuuli alkoi puhaltaa, hellien matkalaisia ja ruohoa ja oksia yksinäisten puiden jotka täplittivät aluetta siellä ja täällä. Se toivotti kolmikolle hyvää matkaa ja piti heille seuraa iltahämärään saakka, kun oli auringon vuoro vetäytyä pois taivaalta. Ryhmä pystytti leirin ja vietti rauhallisen yön tähtien alla. Aamulla he heräsivät aikaisin ja jatkoivat matkaansa Taivaankullan kaupunkiin. Tosin, he eivät olleet ainoita jotka vaelsivat tasangolla. He kohtasivat pari metsästäjää ihmisheimosta joka asutti tätä aluetta. Nämä muukalaiset ratsastivat hevosilla, jotka olivat kaikista arvokkain eläin heille. Heimolaiset olivat varsin ystävällistä väkeä ja jopa tarjosivat jokusen pienen kimpaleen kuivattua lihaa ryhmälle. Tämän mukavan tapaamisen jälkeen heidän tiensä erkaantuivat ja ryhmä jatkoi polullaan ruohotasangon ylittämiseksi. Se vei heiltä toisenkin päivän alueen toisen puolen saavuttamiseksi, ja juuri kun pimeys oli käärimässä maailmaa vaippaansa, ryhmä oli saapunut toisen metsän puurajalle, onnistuneesti päättäen heidän matkansa ruohotasangon halki. He olisivat kenties viettäneet rauhallisen yön, mutta sitten kissa istutti huolen siemenen. Hän toi esille että oli omituista etteivät he olleet kohdanneet muita ihmisiä heidän matkansa aikana. Se oli erityisesti outoa koska he olivat suuntaamassa suureen kaupunkiin, joten muita matkaajia olisi pitänyt olla suunnaten sisään ja pois tuosta paikasta. Tämänkaltaiset ajatukset eivät olleet edes käyneet nuoren velhon mielessä, sillä hän oli ollut kokonaan jännityksen valtaama. Kuitenkin, kissan havainnointi sai hänet kyllä miettimään. Tosin, Edgar sivuutti asian, hänen järkeilynsä ollen että he olivat tulossa suunnasta joka ei ollut vilkas, joten, se ei ollut niin kummallista. Joukko ei keskustellut asiasta sen enempää, ja menivät vain nukkumaan. He olivat lähestymässä määränpäätään. Kun uusi päivä valkeni, ryhmä heräsi aikaisin aloittaakseen viimeisen osuuden matkastaan kohti suurta kaupunkia. Heidän täytyi vain mennä läpi metsätilkun ja he tulisivat Taivaankullan laitamille. Vaikutti siltä että sää suosi heitä jälleen kerran ja päivästä kehittyikin miellyttävä. Lempeä auringonpaiste sai Nicolaksen ja Edgarin hyvälle tuulelle, mutta kissa pysytteli pidättäytyväisenä. Hän ei puhunut paljoa mitään sillä välin kuin nuori velho ja vanhempi mies kannattelivat kevyttä keskustelua yllä heidän kävellessään eteenpäin. Lopulta, kun kultainen aurinko alkoi laskeutua taivaalta, joukko onnistui pääsemään välietapilleen: Taivaankullan kaupunkiin. Valtaisan rakennelman näky oli ihmeellinen Nicolaksen silmissä. Hän ei ollut koskaan nähnyt mitään sen kaltaista, hän oli vain uneksinut tämän kaltaisista paikoista. Suunnattomat muurit piirittivät valtavaa kaupunkia, ja kapea virta ympäröi paikkaa. Siitä suunnasta josta joukkio oli tulossa, tie kaupunkiin muuttui sillaksi joka piti ylittää jos halusi päästä sisälle asutukseen. Sillan alkua vartioivat kaksi valtavaa patsasta jotka esittivät myyttisiä petoja joita Nicolas ei osannut nimetä. Taivaankullan kaupunki oli enimmäkseen muuriensa kätkemä, tehden siitä matkalaisille houkuttelevan astua sisään portista ja nähdä millaista elämää sisälle kätkeytyi. Tietenkin, tämä sai nuoren velhon hyvin innokkaaksi ja halukkaaksi kokea itse kaupungin ilot. Hän ei edes huomannut että hänen vauhtinsa kiihtyi hänen jatkaessa eteenpäin, Edgar ja kissa seuraten häntä maltillisemmin. Heidän polkunsa tuotua heidät pitkälle kivisillalle ja heidän alkaessa ylittää sitä, Nicolas huomasi jotakin erityistä odottamassa rakennelman toisessa päässä. Kaupungin portin luona oli tusina hahmoa. Näytti siltä kuin ne olisivat vartioineet jotakin. Kolmikon päästessä lähemmäs ja lähemmäs, Nicolas onnistui vihdoin erottamaan mitä ne olivat. Yönväkeä. Sillähän nimellä Edgar oli kutsunut niitä? Olentoja jotka olivat kuin ihmisen ja villisian risteytys. Ne olivat kaksijalkaisia otuksia ja selkeästi pidempiä kuin keskiverto ihminen – jopa Nicolastakin pidempiä, vaikka hän oli varsin pitkä. Ne olivat myöskin hyvin lihaksikkaita ja ei ihme; suurin osa niistä kantoi suurta kirvestä tai lyömämiekkaa ja olivat sonnustautuneet haarniskaan joka oli tehty osittain paksusta nahasta ja osittain metallista. Ne olivat tummansinisen turkin peitossa, josta heidän nimensäkin tuli. Yönväki oli selkeästi suunniteltu taistelutantereelle ja oli parasta olla provosoimatta niitä. Kukaan ei halunnut yhtä näistä vastustajakseen. ”Jokin on pielessä”, kissa mutisi hiljaisesti heidän kävellessä lähemmäs noita olentoja. Kuitenkin, mieskaksikko ei kiinnittänyt häneen paljoa huomiota. Nicolas tunsi erilaista jännityksen tunnetta heidän ryhmänsä kävellessä lähemmäs Yönväen joukkoa. Se oli aivan kuin hän olisi tapaamassa jotakuta tärkeää. Kaikki sillan Yönväen edustajat olivat kiinnittäneet katseensa kolmikkoon, muttei ollut mahdollista arvata minkälaisia ajatuksia he kätkivät villisikapäihinsä. Nicolas yritti olla tuijottamatta liikaa, mutta hän ei voinut sille mitään että nämä olennot kiehtoivat häntä. Yksikään Yönväestä ei puhunut mitään ryhmän liikkuessa ohitse, joten heidän kohtaamisensa jäi lyhyeksi. He jäivät paikoilleen kolmikon astuessa sisään Taivaankullan kaupunkiin. Mutta se oli ansa. Ryhmä oli hädin tuskin päässyt kävelemään sisälle kaupunkiin kun he olivat joutuneet Yönväkijoukon saartamiksi. Aseiden piiri, janoten verta, osoittivat heitä kohti ja Nicolaksella oli tunne että jos he tekisivät yhdenkään pienen virheen, se olisi heidän verensä jonka nuo aseet maistaisivat. Vain sekunneissa hänen jännityksensä oli muuttunut kauhuksi. Sanat jäivät jumiin hänen kurkkuunsa eikä hän kyennyt sanomaan sanaakaan. Yhtäkkiä, hänen kohtalonsa oli Yönväen käsissä. Nuori velho ei pystynyt sanomaan mitään silloinkaan kun kissa syöksyi poispäin syvemmälle kaupunkiin, hänen pieni hahmonsa helposti luikkien ohi petomiesten kehän, hyläten Nicolaksen ja Edgarin. Yönväki ei vaikuttanut välittävän kissasta lainkaan, mahdollisesti ajatellen että hän oli pelkkä eläin, joten he eivät tehneet mitään hänen pysäyttämisekseen. Heidän huomionsa oli kokonaan kahdessa miehessä. Nicolaksen väristessä pelosta, Edgar astui eteenpäin, hymyillen, näyttäen ihan liian rauhalliselta. ”Tervehdys, ystäväiseni!” hän puhui. ”Minä olen tuonut teille sen mitä Kalpeanaama halusi!” Hämmennys löysi tiensä nuoren velhon mieleen. Tunsiko Edgar nämä henkilöt? Ja kuka oli Kalpeanaama? Mitä oikein oli meneillään? Juuri tuolla hetkellä, vielä yksi lisää Yönväestä ilmestyi. Mutta tämä oli hitusen suurempi kuin muut ja hänellä oli jokin outo höyhenistä tehty koriste päässään. Kenties hän oli suuremmassa arvoasemassa kuin muut? ”Sinä pidit sanasi. Hyvä.” Hänen äänensä oli syvä ja paksu. ”Viekää heidät vankilaan.” Tämä oli se hetki kun Edgarin kasvoilla hymy vaihtui epäuskoksi. ”'Heidät'? Mutta minä tein mitä käskettiin! Meillä oli sopimus!” hän parkui kun Yönväki alkoi johdattaa häntä pois Nicolaksen kanssa. Nuori velho ei tiennyt mitä ajatella tästä tilanteesta. Liian monet ajatukset painivat hänen päänsä sisällä Yönväen viedessä häntä jonnekin, välillä tökkien heitä aseillaan muistuttaakseen että tästä tilanteesta ei ollut poispääsyä. Mutta jopa tässä epävarmassa tilassa, yksi asia oli päivänselvä. Edgar oli pettänyt hänet.Little ShadowsThe sea was like a completely different world to the land dwellers, having its own secrets and being home for many creatures that couldn't thrive on land. Humans had wondered what lies beneath the waves that carry their ships, but haven't yet discovered much, leaving a lot to their imagination. Of course, there are those very few who have had a chance to see what the underwater world is like, but their incredible tales are something a lot of people deem as fantasy, though there are also those cases that fellow sailors think are true. Nonetheless, the sea is a mysterious place and people can only ponder what it would be like to live at the bottom of the ocean, for it's one of the few places that hasn't yet been conquered by humans. But they respect the sea and remain endlessly curious about the life it hides under the surface. And sometimes, these two different worlds collide, although subtly. Meriri was a little mermaid who held a lot of curiosity in her heart. Long time ago she had developed an interest in the wreckages that had sunk to the very bottom of the sea. Finding all the strange objects from them was something she considered fun and she liked to wonder what they were used for. Humans were so weird, but very interesting at the same time. But that day, it wasn't her curiosity that had led her to visit the place where shipwrecks were resting, no, it was something else. She had been there many times before, it was one of the places where she would return time and time again. Which maybe was a little strange, since not that many sea dwellers lingered around that part of the sea. Meriri was swimming through a patch of seaweed, staying close to the ocean floor, and little by little the sand started to turn from brown to blue. It was the first change in scenery which she noticed, but over time the lush surroundings that offered food and shelter to many sea creatures started to become barren. And eventually, it seemed like life itself was avoiding that corner of the ocean where she was going. Even light was staying away from there as the sea was getting darker and darker the further Meriri swam. Her completely blue body, decorated by darker blue spots, blended in with the shadows and those few brighter bits that still came her way. But the darkness was closing in, embracing this corner of the sea tenderly, although ominously. This didn't hinder Meriri's travel, however, because she had been blessed by a gem, embedded in her chest, that began to glow with golden light and helped her to see around. She was like a shining star, wandering alone in the vast darkness. A somewhat solemn atmosphere ruled over this location. Soon enough Meriri came across the first shipwrecks that had laid there dormant for such a long time that nobody remembered their stories anymore. She was swimming among their black figures, they were like sleeping giants. They hadn't seen the light of day since the day they had sunken to the dark depths, but Meriri's little light gave them a welcome piece of sense that they hadn't been completely forsaken. Meriri wished she could learn what their stories were so she could cherish their memory and bring some sort of peace for them. But the best she could do was swim among them and her presence would serve as a reminder that there was still somebody who remembered their existence. The water started to feel a little colder, but that wasn't new to Meriri. Besides, that was to be expected in a place like this. It was like a graveyard of ships and although many of them had been resting there for a long time, sometimes new arrivals would come. This part of the sea was rumored to be cursed so a lot of sailors avoided it if they could. But Meriri wasn't afraid of this so-called curse, in fact, she was the one who would help to lift it. Yet again it was the reason why she had come to this place. Somebody had to. Meriri's little figure continued to wander among the shipwrecks and the waters were quiet like a grave. She tried her best to listen, because what she was seeking for could be found best if she could hear them. But so far, there was nothing but silence as the mighty bodies of the ships slumbered. Meriri was aware that she wouldn't find what she was looking for every time she visited this place, but she would try anyway, because she knew that it would bring peace to someone's soul. That was enough of a reason to continue doing this. After searching for a while and swimming around many vessels that would stay in these depths for an eternity, a faint sound made its way to Meriri's ears. She stopped for a very brief moment, trying to pinpoint where the voice was coming from. Once she was sure about which direction to take, she headed towards the sound, and it served as her guide. She bypassed a few smaller fishing boats as she followed the sad noise, and the closer she was getting, the more sorrowful feeling she got in her heart. It was the lamentation of a lost soul and no matter how many times Meriri would hear it, it always brought sadness to her own soul. But she would make it all better. A couple of more voices accompanied the one Meriri had heard first. It helped her to navigate among the sunken ships and finally, from the spot that was probably the darkest and coldest one in this remote location, she found what she was looking for. Three human children were sitting in a shade of a large shipwreck, whimpering and shivering, they had pressed their little bodies against each other for comfort and trying to warm up, but all the warmth in their bodies had disappeared a good while ago. There was no shelter from the coldness of these depths. The children looked so lost, so hopeless and so afraid. The sight made Meriri's heart ache. But she would help them, that's why she was here. She swam towards the children and the bright light she wielded caught their eyes and they looked at the mermaid with curious eyes, her arrival caused them to forget their plight for a moment. Once Meriri had gotten near them, she gave them a warm smile and said: “Have no fear, little ones. I will help you get out of here. Just follow me.” All the children stood up eagerly, they wanted to get away from this place as soon as possible and who could blame them? There was no creature in the whole vast sea who would like to linger in that place for long. Meriri became their guide and with her radiant golden light, she started to escort the children out of there. She was swimming slowly, occasionally stopping so the children could keep up with the pace. They couldn't swim so they had to walk on the seafloor. But it didn't really hinder their going, bravely the little ones pursued the golden light among the many shipwrecks that unlike them couldn't leave the place. Silently the huge dark figures wished good luck for the children, because even they didn't want the young ones to be lost in a harrowing location like this. Every now and then Meriri would make sure that the children were doing good. And sometimes when she would look at them, their forms would change for a brief moment, they would turn into black shades, their presence flickering between different dimensions – and then they would become normal again, as if nothing weird hadn't even happened, the children themselves hadn't noticed anything. Meriri had seen this happening before, it wasn't anything new to her, but it still gave her a strange sensation; it was like she had to hurry before the spirits of the children would turn too unstable to save. It was a legitimate worry, but she always had more time than she assumed. She could bring salvation to these little ones; she had already done that to many others before these three. With her golden radiant light, Meriri was able to guide the children away from the last resting place of the shipwrecks. Little by little their surroundings had turned brighter and life seemed to get back into the sea. Meriri noticed that the children started to perk up as well as they curiously glanced around the wonderful underwater world where they were now. Meriri didn't need the light anymore so gradually it faded away, until next time she would need it. The mermaid turned to face the children again and said: “Continue following me, there is this certain someone I want you to meet.” “Okay”, exclaimed the little ones in unison, and for a blink of an eye they became shadows again, then getting their regular forms back. Meriri took her leading role again and slowly started to swim forward, the children chasing after her as fast as they could with their tiny legs. The sea was getting more and more lively as they progressed and Meriri guided her little companions through gorgeous coral reefs which were bustling with life, something which the children hadn't seen ever before. All the beautifully colored fish and other animals did strike a sense of wonder in the minds of children and Meriri was happy to observe how amazed the little ones were, because now, the sea was their home. They probably wouldn't be able to return to the surface ever again, but maybe it didn't matter: this was a paradise. For a good while Meriri and the three children were roaming around the underwater wonderland, mostly because everything was so new and foreign to the little ones and they truly enjoyed observing a lot of things around them. And Meriri let them have their fun, it did bring warmth to her heart. But even with this slow pace, they were getting closer to the destination Meriri had in her mind. And finally, at some point their wanderings led them to a cave, its mouth open and wide. A couple of weird lanterns that were glowing with a pale green light guarded both left and right side of the opening in the otherwise solid rock. These lanterns were always the sign for Meriri that she had managed to guide the children to the right place. Once again she turned around to face the children and said: “Well done, my little ones! We made it! Now, shall we investigate what we will find from this cave?” This caught the curiosity of the children and they nodded enthusiastically and rushed inside the cave, Meriri still in the lead. The dimness that prevailed in the cave devoured the mermaid and her little companions and for a short while they wandered in a soft darkness, which was so different than the blackness of the graveyard of shipwrecks; this wasn't cold or ominous, it was more like a safe haven. They progressed deeper into the cave by following the tunnel and it didn't take much time for them to get to the other end. It was such a wondrous place. They had reached a chamber which was full of peculiar objects and instruments and the children were immediately mesmerized by the devices that were doing something at that moment, but they had no idea what their purpose was. Neither did Meriri. The chamber was like a workshop of an eccentric inventor. All of the three children had run to examine a device which was making huge bubbles in many different colors, all the while colorful liquids were swirling around its transparent insides. “Oh, hello Meriri.” Meriri turned her head to look at the direction where these words had come from. A familiar face greeted her; it was her friend Gahol. He was quite an unusual looking fellow: his lower body was like that of a fish and his blue scales glimmered in the light of many of the machines and other sources of lights in the chamber. But his upper body belonged to a grey horse, though he had hands instead of hooves. He was holding a golden rod in his hand and Meriri had no idea what he would do with that. The attention of the three children were still in the weird devices, they hadn't paid any attention to Gahol. But he eyed the kids for a short while. “So, you brought a few more to me”, he simply stated while he put the rod away. “Yes”, Meriri replied tepidly. “You know how it is… I couldn't ignore their cries. I never can.” “I've told it to you so many times already. Your heart is in the right place.” Gahol smiled at Meriri. Then he glanced at the children, just to see how their bodies became black for a couple of seconds, then shifting back to normal. “Hmm… They are a little bit more unstable than usual. But definitely not the worst kind of case I've seen.” “I trust that you can help them”, Meriri said and a smile appeared on her face as well. “Of course I can!” Gahol answered and looked quite vigorous. Meriri felt happy for the children, she always did when they had managed to get to this point. Gahol was a nice individual who helped the spirits of lost children get adapted to life in the sea. He would grant them new form, fins, webbed feet, whatever they desired, but most importantly, he would give them an artificial heart that would shed some lifeforce back into their bodies. Gahol did this simply because he wanted to help and didn't expect to get anything in return. However, there was one grim occurrence that had motivated him to help the children. Meriri observed from the side how Gahol introduced himself to the children and they were quite curious about him – they most likely hadn't seen a creature like him ever before. Meriri watched them interact with each other and little by little her smile faded away as sadness crept to her heart. If only that one tragedy hadn't happened, these children wouldn't have suffered this fate… Thinking about it never failed to make Meriri feel sorrowful, because that event still continued to make innocent victims. There had been a powerful sea witch a long time ago, living underwater like any other sea creature. And one day, she saved the life of a young sailor who had fallen to the raging waters during a storm. They were curious about each other, sharing stories about their different lives, since they were practically coming from two different worlds. And eventually, they fell in love. For a while, their shared life was perfect and they got two children together. They lived a happy family life, until the great tragedy happened. The children of the witch had inherited her magical powers and they liked to practice their powers by transforming into animals that lived in the sea. One day, they had taken the forms of two sharks, and they had radiant golden scales that glimmered as the sun's beams hit them while they were swimming near the surface of water. And unfortunately, that day a ship with greedy people had been sailing through those same waters and noticed those stunning sharks they hadn't seen ever before. With their harpoons they hunted them down. The witch sensed how the light of their life was extinguished and went into a mad rage. She pursued the ship that had done this unforgivable deed and made sure that no one could escape her revenge. That ship became the first one to sink into the dark depths where nothing thrived. The witch placed a curse on that location: if her children couldn't pass those waters peacefully, then no one else could. Every ship that had children aboard would be brought down to the treacherous waters, unable to leave, and those children would have to wander as shadows for an eternity. Then the sea witch just disappeared, along with her husband. Their fate remains a mystery, no one knows what happened to them. The only thing they left behind is the cursed zone where they lost their children. Not even Gahol knew what happened to them, even though he was the brother of the sea witch. But he had taken it as his duty to help those that would succumb to his sister's curse. And Meriri, as his friend, had wanted to help him with this task and so Gahol had crafted a gem that could illuminate the way even in the darkest depths so she could guide the spirits of children out of the darkness. Helping the children was something Meriri considered worthwhile. Just like at that moment, as she observed the little ones bouncing around and telling Gahol what they wanted to become, she knew that fighting against the curse was something she wanted to do for the rest of her life. “Well, I'm leaving now”, Meriri announced to her friend who raised his hand as a sign that he had heard her. “See you, Gahol.” Then Meriri headed back to the tunnel, wondering what the children would look like when she would meet them the next time.trophy